Schneider Electric Modicon Quantum Reference guide

पीडीएफ

दस्तावेज़

Modicon Quantum

Automation Series

Hardware Reference Guide

840 USE 100 00 Version 11.0

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Document Set

At a Glance This manual consists of two volumes.

Volume 1 z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

Quantum Automation System Overview

Quantum Configurations

Network Configurations

System Specifications for Quantum Modules

Hardware Specifications for Quantum Modules

Power Supply Modules

CPU Modules

Quantum Field Bus Modules

Distributed I/O (DIO) for Quantum Modules

Quantum Remote I/O Communication Modules

Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules

Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module

Quantum Ethernet Modules

Intelligent/Special Purpose Modules for Quantum

Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output Modules

Quantum Simulator Modules

Quantum Battery Module z z z z z z z z

Volume 2

Quantum I/O Modules

Miscellaneous Components

Spare Parts

Hardware Installation

Power and Grounding Guidelines

CableFast Cabling

Error Stopped Codes

Agency Approvals

840 USE 100 00 11/2004 iii

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Part I

Quantum Automation System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1 Modicon Quantum Automation System Overview . . . . . . . . . . 3

Modicon Quantum Automation Series Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Quantum Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Quantum CPU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Quantum I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Quantum Communication Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Quantum Simulator Modules (XSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Quantum Battery, Backplanes, and CableFast Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Quantum Programming Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Part II

Quantum System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Chapter 2 Quantum Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations. . . . . . . . . . 18

Quantum Local I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Quantum Remote I/O (RIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 3 Network Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Quantum Network Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Quantum Network Interface Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Part III

Quantum System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Chapter 4 System Specifications for the Quantum Module . . . . . . . . . . 43

840 USE 100 00 11/2004 v

Part IV

Quantum Module Specifications and Configuration . . . 47

Chapter 5 Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules. . . . . . . . 49

Chapter 6 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module (PV01 or Greater) . 63

140CPS11400 AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 11 A . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module . . . . . . 75

140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 11 A Module . . . . . 78

140CPS21100 DC Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module. . . . . . . . . . . 84

140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module . . . . . . . . . . 87

140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module. . . . . . . . . . . 90

140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module . . . . . . . . . . 93

140CPS51100 DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

140CPS52400 DC Standalone/Redundant Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A . . . . . . 99

Chapter 7 CPU Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

140CPU11302 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

140CPU11303 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

140CPU21304 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

140CPU42402 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

140CPU43412 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

140CPU43412A CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

140CPU53414 CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

140CPU53414A CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Chapter 8 Quantum Field Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Chapter 12 Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module . . . . . . 245

140NOM25200 Quantum Networking Modbus Plus on Fiber Module . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 13 Quantum Ethernet Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY/MAX Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Chapter 14 Intelligent/Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum . . . . . 289

140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

140MSB/MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Chapter 15 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output

Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

15.1

Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Intrinsically Safe Modules – General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

15.2

Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

15.3

Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Chapter 16 Quantum Simulator Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Chapter 17 Quantum Battery Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

I/O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Chapter 18 Quantum I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

18.1

Overview of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Quantum I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

I/O Map Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

18.2

Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

I/O Configuration for Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

840 USE 100 00 11/2004 vii

viii

140ACI03000 I/O Analog In Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

140ACI04000 High Density Analog in I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

140ARI03010 I/O RTD Input 8 Channel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

140ATI03000 I/O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

140AVI03000 I/O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

18.3

Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

I/O Configuration for Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

140ACO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Current Out Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

140AVO02000 Quantum I/O Analog Voltage Out Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

18.4

Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . 494

140AMM09000 Analog Input/Output Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

18.5

Discrete Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

I/O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

140DAI34000 Quantum I/O 24 VAC IN Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

140DAI35300 Quantum I/O AC Input 24 Vac Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

140DAI44000 Quantum I/O 48 VAC IN Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

140DAI45300 Quantum I/O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

140DAI54000 Quantum I/O 115 VAC In Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

140DAI54300 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524

140DAI55300 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

140DAI74000 Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

140DAI75300 Quantum I/O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

140DDI15310 Quantum I/O DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source Module . . . . . . . . . 536

140DDI35300 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

140DDI35310 Quantum I/O DC Input 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input Module . . . . 540

140DDI36400 I/O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . 542

140DDI67300 Quantum I/O DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module . . . . . . . . . . . 546

140DDI84100 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module . . . . . . . . 550

140DDI85300 Quantum I/O DC Input 10 ... 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module . . . . . . . . 553

18.6

Discrete Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

I/O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

140DAO84000 I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 16x1 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

140DAO84010 I/O AC Output 24 ... 115 Vac 16x1 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

140DAO84210 Quantum I/O AC Output 100 ... 230 Vac 4x4 Module . . . . . . . . 572

140DAO84220 Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 48 Vac 4x4 Module . . . . . . . . . . 577

140DAO85300 Quantum I/O AC Output 24 ... 230 Vac 4x8 Module . . . . . . . . . 582

140DDO15310 I/O DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586

140DDO35300 Quantum I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module . . . . . . . . 590

140DDO35301 I/O DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Discrete Source Module . . . . . . . . 594

140DDO35310 I/O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

140DDO36400 I/O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module . . . . . . . . 601

140DDO84300 Quantum I/O DC Output 10 ... 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module . . . 606

140DDO88500 Quantum I/O DC Output 24-125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module . . . . 609

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

140DRA84000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module. . . . . 613

140DRC83000 Quantum I/O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open/

Normally Closed Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

18.7

Discrete Verified Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

I/O Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module – 140DVO85300 . . 620

140DVO85300 I/O Verified 10-30 VDC Out Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

18.8

Discrete Supervised Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

I/O Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module – 140DSI35300 . . 630

140DSI35300 I/O DC 24V Supervised Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

18.9

Discrete Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

I/O Configuration for Discrete Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

140DAM59000 Quantum I/O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 /

AC Output 115 Vac 2x4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

140DDM39000 I/O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink/DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4

Source Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646

140DDM69000 I/O 125 VDC Input/High Power Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 651

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

Appendix A Miscellaneous Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Appendix B Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Appendix C Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

Hardware Installation – Selecting Backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Hardware Installation – Mounting Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

Hardware Installation – Space Requirements for the Quantum System . . . . . . 684

Hardware Installation – Mounting Quantum Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Appendix D Power and Grounding Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems . . . . 692

System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703

Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710

Closed System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712

840 USE 100 00 11/2004 ix

Appendix E CableFast Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

Features of the CableFast Cabling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716

140 CFA 040 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722

140 CFB 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

140 CFC 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

140 CFD 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733

140 CFE 032 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735

140 CFG 016 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

140 CFH 008 00 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742

140CFI00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746

140CFJ00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

140CFK00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

CableFast Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758

CableFast Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763

Appendix F Error Stopped Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

Appendix G Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Index

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Safety Information

Important Information

NOTICE Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.

DANGER

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, can result in injury or equipment damage.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Safety Information

PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be serviced only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material. This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons.

xii

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope This manual is a reference guide for the hardware of the Quantum automation system.

Validity Note The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding. We reserve the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development. The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric.

Product Related

Warnings

Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication, please notify us.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, without express written permission of

Schneider Electric.

All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this product. For reasons of safety and to ensure compliance with documented system data, only the manufacturer should perform repairs to components.

When controllers are used for applications with technical safety requirements, please follow the relevant instructions.

Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in improper operating results.

Failure to observe this product related warning can result in injury or equipment damage.

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at [email protected]

840 USE 100 00 11/2004 xiii

About the Book xiv

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Automation

System Overview

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Part?

This part provides an overview of the Quantum Automation System.

This part contains the following chapters:

Chapter

Chapter Name

Modicon Quantum Automation System Overview

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Overview

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Automation

System Overview

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

This chapter provides an overview of the Modicon Quantum Automation System, which includes Modicon Quantum software support.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

Modicon Quantum Automation Series Overview

Quantum Power Supplies

Quantum CPU Modules

Quantum I/O Modules

Quantum Communication Interface Modules

Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Modules

Quantum Simulator Modules (XSM)

Quantum Battery, Backplanes, and CableFast Cabling

Quantum Programming Packages

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Modicon Quantum Automation Series Overview

Overview z z z z z z z z z

The Modicon Quantum system is a special-purpose computing system with digital processing capabilities. Modicon Quantum is designed for real time control in industrial and manufacturing applications in a modular, expandable architecture employing the following modules.

Power Supply

CPU

I/O

I/O Network Interface

Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O

Simulator (XSM)

Battery

Backplanes

CableFast Cabling

Modicon

Quantum System

Block Diagram

The following figure is a block diagram of a typical Modicon Quantum system.

/RFDO,2'URS

Ethernet TCP/IP

P/S CPU RIO

Head

NOM NOE I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

Modbus Plus DIO

Twisted Pair Cable

',2'URS

MB+

Tap

MB+

Tap

RIO Coaxial

Modbus Plus Cable

5,2'URS

DIO

Drop

I/O I/O

P/S RIO

Drop

I/O I/O I/O I/O

MB+

Tap

RIO

Tap

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Quantum Power Supplies

Overview

Power Supply

Modes

Quantum power supplies are used to supply system power to all modules inserted into the backplane, including: z z z

Quantum CPU modules

Quantum Interface modules

Quantum I/O modules

Depending upon the system configuration, the option exists of using the power supply in three different modes.

The following table shows the power supply modes.

Power Supply Type

Standalone

Usage

For 3 A, 8 A or 11 A configurations that do not require fault tolerant or redundant capabilities.

Standalone Summable For configurations consuming more than the rated current of one supply, two summing power supplies can be installed in the same backplane.

Redundant For configurations requiring power for uninterrupted system operation. Two redundant power supplies are required for redundancy.

&$87,21

6\VWHP6DIHW\

Exercise caution when considering a combination of power supplies in a backplane. Use only like power supplies with the exceptions noted in 6\VWHP

'HVLJQ&RQVLGHUDWLRQVIRU4XDQWXP3RZHU6XSSOLHVS

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Quantum CPU Modules

Overview The Quantum CPU is a module residing on the Quantum local I/O backplane. The

CPU is a digitally operating electronic system, which uses a programmable memory for the internal storage of user instructions. These instructions are used to implement specific functions such as: z z z z z

Logic

Process sequencing

Timing

Coupling

Arithmetic

These instructions allow control through digital and analog outputs, for various types of machines and processes.

The Quantum CPU serves as a bus master controlling the local, remote, and distributed I/O of the Quantum system.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Quantum I/O Modules

Overview Quantum I/O modules are electrical signal converters that convert signals to and from field devices to a signal level and format, which can be processed by the CPU, such as: z z z z z

Limit switches

Proximity switches

Temperature sensors

Solenoids

Valve actuators

All I/O modules are optically isolated to the bus, ensuring safe and trouble-free operation. All I/O modules are also software configurable.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Quantum Communication Interface Modules

Overview

Network

Interface

Modules

Nine types of communication interface modules are available and presented in the table below, and are described in the following text.

The following table shows the communication interface modules.

Type

RIO

DIO

NOM

Description

Single and dual channel Remote I/O interface modules (RIO heads and drops) connected via a coaxial cable network.

Single and dual channel Distributed I/O interface modules connected via a twisted pair Modbus Plus cable network.

Single and dual channel Network Option Modules (NOM) connected via a twisted pair Modbus Plus cable network.

Fiber Optic

Modbus Plus

Modbus Plus on fiber module connected via a fiber optic Modbus Plus cable network.

Ethernet TCP/

Single channel Ethernet TCP/IP interface module connected via a twisted pair or fiber optic cable network.

InterBus

SY/MAX

Ethernet

LonWorks

MMS

Ethernet

Profibus

AS-i

InterBus Interface module connected via a twisted pair network.

SY/MAX Ethernet module connected via a twisted pair or fiber optic cable network.

LonWorks module connected via a twisted-pair network.

MMS Ethernet module connected via a fiber optic cable network.

Profibus Master module connected via a Profibus RS-485 port.

AS-i module connected via a two-wire AS-i port.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

RIO Modules

(CRA/CRP)

DIO Module

(CRA)

Quantum RIO head and drop modules use a S908-based networking I/O configuration. Communication is done via single or dual coaxial cabling up to 15,000 z z z z z feet away. This configuration supports a mix of the following product lines:

SY/MAX

200 Series

500 Series

800 Series

Quantum I/O

When Quantum RIO is required, the Quantum controller may support up to 31 RIO drops. In an RIO configuration, an RIO head module is connected with coaxial cable to RIO drop modules at each remote drop.

Quantum DIO is implemented over a Modbus Plus network. The CPU or NOMs module may be the network head via their Modbus Plus ports.

Quantum DIO Modbus Plus drop adaptors are specifically designed to link Quantum

I/O modules to the head via twisted pair shielded cable (Modbus Plus). The DIO drop modules also provide the I/O with power (maximum 3A) from a 24 Vdc or a 115/

230 Vac source. Each DIO network supports up to 63 distributed drops using repeaters.

Network Option

Module (NOM)

Quantum NOM modules provide extended communication capabilities for the

Quantum system within a Modbus Plus configuration.

Modbus Plus on

Fiber Module

(NOM)

Quantum Modbus Plus on Fiber modules provides connectivity to Modbus Plus nodes by fiber cable without fiber optic repeaters, and allows the creation of a pure fiber optic network or a mixed fiber optic/twisted-pair network (with the use of a

490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater).

Ethernet TCP/IP

(NOE) Modules

Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules make it possible for a Quantum controller to communicate with devices on an Ethernet network using TCP/IP – the de facto standard protocol. An Ethernet module may be inserted into an existing Quantum system and connected to existing Ethernet networks via fiber optic or twisted pair cabling.

SY/MAX Ethernet

Modules (NOE)

Quantum-SY/MAX-Ethernet modules are Quantum CPU network option modules that can be placed in a Quantum backplane to connect Quantum controllers to SY/

MAX devices and applications.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

MMS-Ethernet

Modules (NOE)

Quantum-MMS-Ethernet modules are Quantum CPU network option modules that can be placed in a Quantum backplane to connect Quantum controllers to MMS devices and applications.

InterBus

Interface Module

(NOA)

The Quantum InterBus is the interface module to the InterBus bus. The InterBus bus is a fieldbus network designed for I/O blocks and intelligent devices used in manufacturing. It offers a master/slave topology that permits deterministic I/O servicing over it’s 13 km twisted pair network.

LonWorks

Modules (NOL)

Profibus

Interface Module

(CRP)

Quantum Profibus module is the interface module to Profibus-DP networks. The interface modules use Type A, shielded twisted pair to join inline connectors, with or without service ports and bus terminators.

AS-i Interface

Module

Quantum NOL modules provide connectivity between a Quantum controller and a

LonWorks network, based on Echelon’s LonWorks technology. The NOL module is offered in three models for different transceiver types, and supports three twistedpair media types with different network topologies or data transfer speeds.

Quantum AS-i modules provide connectivity between a Quantum controller and ASi networks. AS-i bus cable is an unshielded flat two-wire link on which communication and power are transmitted to connected devices. The media insulation is self-healing to accommodate junction block removal.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Modules

Overview z z z z z

Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O modules operate with minimum intervention from the Quantum controller after initially downloading module parameters or programs. The Quantum intelligent/special purpose I/O modules include the following.

High Speed Counter modules (EHC)

ASCII Interface module (ESI)

High Speed Interrupt module (HLI)

Single Axis Motion Modules (MSx)

Multi-Axis Motion Modules (MMS)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Quantum Simulator Modules (XSM)

Overview

Discrete and

Analog

Simulators

There are two types of simulator modules, as described below.

The following table shows discrete and analog simulators.

Type

Discrete 16 Point

Simulator

(140XSM00200)

Analog Simulator

(140XSM01000)

Description

The Discrete Simulator (16 points) is used to generate up to 16 binary input signals to the 140DAI54000 and the 140DAI74000 AC input modules.

The Analog Simulator (2 channels in, 1 channel out) module is used for simulating 4 ... 20 mA field current loops used with current input

Quantum modules.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Quantum Battery, Backplanes, and CableFast Cabling

Battery Module

(XCP)

The Quantum battery module provides RAM backup power for the Quantum expert module.

Backplanes

(XBP)

CableFast

Cabling

Quantum backplanes may be used in all locations of local, remote, or distributed I/

O. There are six backplanes available in 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, and 16 slot versions. All I/O slots are usable with any module able to be used in any slot.

The Quantum CableFast wiring system consists of pre-wired Quantum field wiring terminal strips and DIN rail-mounted terminal blocks, offered in straight through or special application versions.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modicon Quantum Overview

Quantum Programming Packages

Overview Quantum controllers support several editors.

Quantum Editors The following table shows the editors for the Quantum controllers.

Editor

Modsoft V2.6

Concept V2.5

ProWORX NXT V2.1

ProWORX 32

(V 1.0 minimum)

ProWORX Plus

(V 1.0 minimum)

Modicon State Language

(V1.2 minimum)

Where Discussed

For more information on Modsoft, refer to the Modicon Modsoft

Programmer User Manual (890USE11500).

For more information on Concept, refer to the Concept User

Manual (840USE49300).

For more information on ProWorX, refer to the ProWorX User

Manual (372SPU68001 NMAN)

For more information on ProWORX 32, refer to the ProWORX

32 Programming Software for PLCs User Guide (372SPU780

01EMAN)

For more information on ProWORX Plus, refer to the

ProWORX Plus for Modicon Reference Manual

(371SPU68001 PMAN).

For more information on Modicon State Language, refer to the

Modicon State Language User Manual (GM-MSL1-001).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum System Configurations

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Part?

This part provides information on Quantum system configurations.

This part contains the following chapters:

Chapter

Chapter Name

Quantum Configurations

Network Configurations

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

The following chapter provides information on the Quantum configurations, including Local I/O, Remote I/O (RIO), and Distributed I/O (DIO).

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations

Quantum Local I/O

Quantum Remote I/O (RIO)

Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO)

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations

Overview The following information contains a description of the Local I/O, Remote I/O and

Distributed I/O and their configurations.

These configurations (see the configuration table below for valid Quantum z z z z z configurations) can be equipped with a combination of:

Quantum CPUs

Power supplies

I/O interfaces

Expert modules

I/O modules

1RWH Refer to

S for a complete list of part numbers for all Quantum modules.

Local, RIO, and

DIO

Configuration

The following table provides valid Quantum configurations, including backplanes and modules.

If Configuration

Type Is

Local

Backplane Types

(Typical) Are

6, 10, 16 slots

Required

Modules Are

Power Supply

CPU

Optional

Modules Are

RIO Head, I/O,

NOx*

Modules Not

Permitted Are

RIO Drop, DIO

Drop

RIO**

DIO

6, 10, 16 slots

2, 3, 4, 6 slots

Power Supply

RIO Drop

DIO Drop

I/O CPU, RIO Head,

DIO Drop NOx*

Power Supply,

I/O

CPU, RIO Head,

RIO Drop NOx*

*NOM, NOA, and NOE.

**Remote I/O is typically used for large (number of modules) drops 6, 10, or 16 slot backplanes. Distributed I/O is typically used for small drops using 2, 3, 4, or 6 slot backplanes.

1RWH Every Quantum module requires power from the backplane (except power supply and DIO modules). For a valid configuration, add up the required backplane current (in mA) for every module, and ensure that this number is less than the available power in the selected power supply.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

Local, Remote and Distributed

I/O Configuration

Depending on the type of configuration—Local, Remote, or Distributed I/O, a variety of features will apply, as shown in the following table.

Feature Configuration

Local I/O Remote I/O Distributed I/O

Maximum I/O Words

Per drop

Per network

Maximum Physical Discretes

Per drop

Maximum drops per network

Media

Speed

Maximum distance without repeaters

Scan synched I/O servicing

Momentum I/O support

Hot Standby support

Modbus Plus compatible

64 in / 64 out 64 in / 64 out 30 in / 32 out

1,984 in / 1,984 out 500 in / 500 out

*864 any mix *864 any mix

Coax

1.5 Mhz

448 any mix

Twisted Pair

1 MHz

15,000 ft. (4,573 m) 1,500 ft. (457 m)

Yes

*Requires use of backplane expander, Telefast module excepted (27 modules x 32 points = 864). May be limited by bus power requirements.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

Quantum Local I/O

Overview A local I/O configuration is contained in one rack and includes all Quantum modules mounted in a standard Quantum backplane. Quantum Local I/O can be as few as one I/O module (in a three slot backplane), or as many as 14, along with a CPU and power supply in a single 16 slot backplane.

If required for the application, system interface modules are also included in the

Local I/O backplane. These modules could consist of one RIO processor or network option modules.

I/O Configuration The following figure is an example of a typical local I/O configuration.

PS CPU I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

2 Slot

3 Slot

4 Slot

6 Slot

10 Slot

16 Slot

1RWH A maximum of 448 digital I/O points (14, 4x8 digital I/O modules), or a maximum of 48 analog input channels (six 8-channel analog in modules) and 32 analog output channels (eight 4-channel analog out modules) may be serviced in a single local I/O rack.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

Quantum Remote I/O (RIO)

Overview Quantum RIO can be set up in single or dual cable configurations (refer to the following two figures) and is contained in one rack at each RIO drop. When RIO is used, the Quantum CPU may support several drops (a drop can be either Quantum,

SY/MAX, 200, 500, or 800 Series I/O systems).

1RWH As stated above, the Quantum provides connectivity to other Modicon I/O products via the same system. It will connect to 800 series I/O via the J890, J892,

P890, or P892 remote I/O adapters; 200 series I/O via J290 and J291 remote I/O adapters; 500 series I/O via 29X/J540 remote I/O adapters; and SY/MAX

8030CRM931

Related

Documentation

For more information on use and installation of Quantum RIO, see Modicon Remote

I/O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide , Part Number 890USE10100

For more information on Hot Standby systems, see the Quantum Hot Standby

Installation and Planning Guide , Part Number 840USE10600.

Single Cable RIO

Configuration

The following figure is an example of a single cable Quantum RIO configuration.

&38

5,2

+HDG I/O I/O I/O

Local I/O

Drop

Up to 31 Drops

RIO Tap

Terminator

RIO Tap

5,2

'URS

I/O I/O I/O I/O

RIO Tap

5,2

'URS

I/O I/O I/O I/O

P81 J890

RIO Drop # m RIO Drop # n

*A RIO tap is required for every RIO drop in the system.

B800 Series Drop

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

Dual Cable RIO

Configuration

The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum RIO configuration.

PS CPU

RIO

Head

I/O I/O I/O

Local I/O

Drop

Up to 31 Drops

*RIO

Tap

*RIO

Tap

*RIO Tap

*RIO

RIO

Drop

I/O I/O I/O I/O

*RIO Tap and

Terminator

RIO

Drop

I/O I/O I/O

*RIO Tap and

Terminator (#52-0422-000)

P81 J890

Hot Standby

System

RIO Drop # m RIO Drop # n B800 Series

*An RIO tap (# MA-0185-100) is required for every RIO drop in the system.

1RWH The dual cable option is provided for systems that require added protection against cable breaks or damaged connectors. With two cables connected between the host and each node, no single cable break will disrupt communications.

The Quantum Hot Standby system is designed for use with remote I/O networks. A

Quantum Hot Standby system may be set-up using single or dual cable configurations (refer to the following two figures).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

Single Cable Hot

Standby

Configuration

The following figure is an example of a single cable Quantum Hot Standby configuration.

Primary Controller

PS PLC RIO CHS

Standby Controller

PS PLC RIO CHS

Self-terminating

F adapter

Fiber Optic Cable

Coaxial Cable

Splitter

#MA-0186-100

RIO Drop # 2

PS RIO I/O I/O I/O

Trunk

Cable

Self-terminating F adapter

#52-0411-000

(for quad shield cable)

#52-0399-000

(for non-quad shield cable)

Tap

#MA-0185-100

Last RIO Drop

PS RIO I/O I/O I/O

Trunk Terminator

#52-0422-000

Tap

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

Dual Cable Hot

Standby

Configuration

The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum Hot Standby configuration.

Primary PLC

PS PLC RIO CHS

Standby PLC

PS PLC RIO CHS

Self-terminating

F adapters Coaxial Cable

Coaxial Cable

Splitter

#MA-0186-100

RIO Drop # 2

PS RIO I/O I/O I/O

Trunk

Line

Fiber Optic Cable

Trunk

Line

Splitter #MA-0186-100

Drop Cable

Tap

#MA-0185-100

Self-terminating F adapters

#52-0411-000

(for quad shield cable)

#52-0399-000

(for non-quad shield cable)

Last RIO Drop

PS RIO I/O I/O I/O

Trunk Terminator

#52-0422-000

Trunk Terminator

#52-0422-000

Drop Cable

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO)

Overview Quantum DIO can be set up in standard single or dual cable configurations (refer to the following two figures). The Quantum DIO architecture is based on Modicon’s

Modbus Plus technology. When DIO is utilized, the Quantum system may support up to three distributed networks of up to 64 drops (using a repeater) each.

Communication between the various nodes and the Modbus Plus head, in both single and dual cable DIO configurations, is done by twisted pair cabling from the head to the DIO adapters at the drops.

For detailed information concerning the Quantum DIO systems, refer to the

MODBUS Plus I/O Servicing User Guide , part number 840USE10400.

Related

Documentation

Single Cable DIO

Configuration

The following figure is an example of a single cable Quantum DIO configuration.

PS CPU I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

Local I/O

* Tap

DIO

Drop

I/O I/O I/O

* Tap

Up to 31 drops (64 with repeater)

DIO

Drop

I/O I/O I/O

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Drop # m

** Drop Cable

Quantum Drop # n

** Drop Cable

* A MODBUS Plus tap is required for every participant on the network.

** A drop cable is required for each drop from the MODBUS Plus tap.

(Cables are not included with the mopdules and need to be ordered.)

Quantum Configurations

Dual Cable DIO

Configuration

The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum DIO configuration.

PS CPU NOM I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

Local I/O

*Tap

Trunk Cable

*Tap

DIO

Drop

I/O I/O I/O

Up to 31 Nodes (63 with repeater)

DIO

Drop

I/O I/O I/O

Quantum Drop # m Quantum Drop # n

***Drop Cables ***Drop Cables

*A MODBUS Plus tap (plastic, Part # 990NAD23000; ruggedized, Part # 990NAD23010) is required for every participant on the network.

***A drop cable (8 ft/2.4 m, Part # 990NAD21110; 20 ft/6 m, Part # 990NAD21130) is required for each drop from the MODBUS Plus tap. Cables are not included with the modules and need to be ordered.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Part Numbers

Quantum Configurations

MODBUS Plus taps that can be used for single and dual cable DIO configurations include: z z

Part Number 990NAD23000, plastic; and

Part Number 990NAD23010, ruggedized.

z z z z z

The following MODBUS Plus trunk cables can be used with these DIO configurations:

Part Number 490NAA27101 (100 ft/30 m)

Part Number 490NAA27102 (500 ft/152 m)

Part Number 490NAA27103 (1000 ft/304 m)

Part Number 490NAA27104 (1500 ft/456 m)

Part Number 490NAA27105 (5000 ft/1520 m)

Drop cables that can be used for these configurations include: z z

Part Number 990NAD21110 (8 ft/2.4 m)

Part Number 990NAD21130 (20 ft/6 m)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Configurations

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

The following chapter provides information on the Quantum network support, network interface techniques, and Modbus and Modbus Plus communications.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

Quantum Network Support

Quantum Network Interface Techniques

Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

Quantum Network Support

Overview Quantum systems provide multiple choices for open, standards-based networking z z z z z z z z z and fieldbus connectivity requirements. The Quantum supported networks include:

Modbus

Modbus Plus

Remote I/O

TCP/IP Ethernet

SY/MAX Ethernet

MMS Ethernet

Interbus

LonWorks

SERCOS

Combinations of these networks can be used to provide simple, high performance communication architectures which meet the tightly integrated needs of computer and controller connectivity. A summary of the services available on these networks is shown in the following table.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

Quantum

Supported

Networks

The following table shows the Quantum supported networks.

Service

Description

Native to

Quantum

CPU

Available on a

Network

Module

Modbus Modbus

Plus

Remote

I/O

Ethernet

TCP/

SY/

MAX

Y Y N N N

Y Y Y Y

CPU

Programming

CPU

Executive

Firmware

Support

Y Y Y Y Module

Firmware

Loaded From

CPU

Report By

Exception

Communications

Multi-node

Broadcast

Communications y Y

Synchronized

I/O Scanning

N NonSynchronized I/O

Scanning

Quantum I/O

Drops

Hot Standby

Quantum I/O

Drop Support

MMS

Interbus LonWorks SERCOS Profibus

Network Configurations

Service

Description

Hot Standby

Data

Communicati ons Support

Optional Dual

Cabling

Modbus Modbus

Plus

Remote

I/O

Ethernet

TCP/

SY/

MAX

Y N Y N

1 Y N N

MMS

Interbus LonWorks SERCOS Profibus

Optional

Fiber Optics

Momentum I/

O Drops

Variable

Speed Drives

Servo Motion

Control

HMI: Displays

& Panels

4 N

HMI: Workstations

1 N Y Y

4 N N

Refer to the Modbus Plus portion of the Quantum Specifier’s guide section for details of available services on

140NOM2XXX00 Modbus Plus Network modules

Service is only available on the native controller Modbus port when the XMIT loadable is used.

Available from third parties.

The SERCOS network standard is fiber optics.

The software for this module is a modConnect product.

Module firmware loaded through serial port on module.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

Quantum Network Interface Techniques

Overview

Direct CPU

Driver

Quantum communication and networking modules use a variety of different techniques to interface to the Quantum controller over the local backplane.

This technique allows the CPU to control high speed data transfers to and from the communication and networking modules, maximizing throughput and performance.

This technique is used extensively by the Remote I/O network and Hot Standby system to ensure highly deterministic synchronization of the CPU and I/O scans.

1RWH Only one Remote I/O Head Interface is supported for each Quantum CPU.

Option Module

Interface

CPU Interface

Support

This technique allows the communication and networking modules to control data transfers to and from the CPU, maximizing the flexibility of the communications interface.

This technique is used extensively by the Modbus Plus and Ethernet peer-to-peer network modules. The number of option module interfaces supported by each CPU model is described in the following table.

The following table shows the summary of Quantum CPU option module interface support in standalone configurations.

Quantum Controller Model Number Available Option Module Interfaces Supported

Per CPU

140CPU53414(A)

140CPU43412(A)

140CPU42402

140CPU21304

140CPU11303

140CPU11302

1RWH Refer to

S for details of available services on 140NOM2XX00 Modbus

Plus Network modules.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

I/O Map Interface Some network and communication modules are interfaced to the controller through the standard I/O map configuration tables. In the following table, note that some network and communication modules require a Loadable instruction which enhances the standard controller Executive to support certain unique features of individual modules.

In addition, some loadables allow the communication and networking modules to be controlled by means of user-application code. The number of loadables and associated modules that can be handled by an individual CPU depends upon its memory size, the size of the application program, and the size of the loadables.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

Communications and Networking

Model Number

140CRP81100

140CRP93100

140CRP93200

140CHS21000

140NOA61110

140NOM21100

140NOM21200

140NOM25200

140NOE21100

140NOE25100

140NOE31100

140NOE35100

140NOE510 0

140NOE5510 0

The following table shows the Quantum communications and networking modules.

Description

Profibus

Module

Interface

Technique

Direct CPU

Driver

Direct CPU

Driver

Remote I/O

Head Interface, single cable

Remote I/O

Head Interface, dual cable

Direct CPU

Driver

Hot Standby

Processor Kit

Direct CPU

Driver

Interbus Master Direct CPU

Driver

Option

Module

Modbus Plus

Options, single cable

Modbus Plus

Option, dual cable

Option

Module

Modbus Plus

Option, single channel fiber

Option

Module

Ethernet TCP/IP

Twisted Pair

Option

Module

Ethernet TCP/IP

Fiber Optic

Option

Module

Ethernet SY/

MAX Twisted

Pair

Option

Module

Ethernet SY/

MAX Fiber Optic

Option

Module

Ethernet MMS

Twisted Pair

Ethernet MMS

Fiber Optic

Option

Module

Option

Module

Loadable

Required

Backplane Support

Local RIO DIO

Bus Power mA

1200

780

700

780

900

1000

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

Model Number Description Module

Interface

Technique

140NOE77100/1 Ethernet TCP/IP

10/100 TX/FX

140NOE77110/1 Ethernet TCP/IP

10/100 TX/FX

Factory Cast

140MMS42500 Multi-Axis Motion

Controller w/

SERCOS

Option

Module

140NOL91100

140NOL91110

Loadable

Required

LonWorks

Interface, twisted pair FTT10

I/O Map (16/

16)

LonWorks

Interface, twisted pair TPT/XF-78

I/O Map (16/

16)

140NOL91120 LonWorks

Interface, twisted pair TPT/XF-

1250

I/O Map (16/

16)

Backplane Support

Local RIO DIO

1. The software for this module is a ModConnect product.

Bus Power mA

750

2500

950

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications

Overview

Modbus and

Modbus Plus

Features

Each Quantum CPU includes both a Modbus and Modbus Plus communications port. The features offered by both these communication protocols are listed in the following table.

The following table shows the Modbus and Modbus Plus features.

Features

Technique

Speed

Electrical

Modbus

Slaves polled by a master

19.2K typical

RS-232, various others

Distance without repeater RS-232, 50 ft. (15 m)

Media Various

Max nodes per network

Max network traffic

247

300 registers/sec @ 9.6 Kb

Programming

Read/Write data

Global data

Peer Cop

Yes

Modbus Plus

Peer-to-peer, token rotation

1 M

RS-485

1,500 ft. (457 m)

Twisted pair, Fiber optics

20,000 registers/sec

Modbus Modbus, a master/slave protocol, is a de facto industry standard with support from over 500 industrial suppliers.

On-line programming or data acquisition applications are easily supported directly from the serial port of any computer.

Modbus can be used in either a simple point-to-point manner with a pair of devices, or in a network architecture with up to 247 slave devices.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

Modbus Plus Modbus Plus combines high speed, peer-to-peer communication and easy installation to simplify applications and reduce installation costs.

It allows host computers, controllers and other data sources to communicate as peers throughout the network via low-cost twisted pair cable or optional fiber optic cable.

As a deterministic token-passing network, Modbus Plus communicates at one megabaud for fast access to process data. It’s strength is its ability to control realtime control devices like I/O and drives, without degraded performance due to loading or traffic.

Bridging between Modbus and Modbus Plus is done automatically on CPUs and

Modbus Plus network modules.

The bridge mode redirects Modbus messages onto the Modbus Plus network for easy connectivity between Modbus and Modbus Plus devices.

A summary of the available services on Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus ports is given in the following table.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

Modbus and

Modbus Plus

Services

Type

The following table shows the Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus services.

Service Description Native CPU Ports NOM 1-2 Ports NOM 3-6 Ports

Modbus

Services

Default Modbus Port Parameters Y

Configurable Modbus Port

Parameters

Modbus Modbus

Plus

Modbus to Modbus Plus Bridging

2 -

Modbus

Plus

Services

Local CPU Programming

Remote CPU Programming over

Modbus Plus

Modbus access to local CPU

Modbus access to remote CPU over Modbus Plus

Modbus Network Slave Support Y

Modbus Master support with

XMIT Loadable

Y Executive Firmware Loading

Support

MSTR read/write register messagin g

MSTR read/write Global Data messaging

MSTR get/clear local/remote statistics

Config Extension Global Data

Support

Config Extension Peer Cop

Support

Distributed I/O Support

CPU Programming

Executive Firmware Loading

Support

Modbus Modbus

Plus

Modbus Modbus

Plus

Y -

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Network Configurations

1RWH

Only supported on the 140CPU42402, 140CPU42412(A) and 140CPU53414(A)

Quantum Controllers.

The native CPU Modbus port can be disabled from bridge mode operation with the native Modbus Plus Port.

Modbus ports on NOMs are always in bridge mode with their associated

Modbus Plus port.

Only one programmer connection can be logged in at a time to any CPU, and only one program monitor can be attached at a time to any CPU.

Modbus port parameters on NOMs 3-6 are defined by Modbus Port 3 in Concept and Modsoft when the comm parameter selector switch is in mem.

Up to 4 MSTR read/write register instructions can be serviced per CPU scan per

Modbus Plus port.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum System Specifications

III

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Part?

This part provides system specifications for the Quantum automation system.

This part contains the following chapters:

Chapter

Chapter Name

System Specifications for the Quantum Module

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

System Specifications

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

System Specifications for the

Quantum Module

Quantum System Specifications

Overview

Mechanical

Specifications

All modules are designed to the following system specifications, which include: z z z mechanical electrical

AC/DC power supplies

It shows the I/O modules operating voltages for: z z less than 24 Vac or Vdc between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc z greater than 48 Vac or Vdc

Also given are the operating and storage conditions as well as agency approvals.

The following table shows individual Quantum module mechanical specifications.

Weight

Dimensions (H x D x W)

2 lbs. (1 kg) max

9.84 in. x 4.09 in. x 1.59 in. (250 mm x 103.85 mm x

40.34 mm)

Wire Size 1-14 AWG or 2-16 AWG max. 20 AWG min.

Material (Enclosures and Bezels) Polycarbonates

Space Requirements 1 backplane slot

Electrical

Specifications

The following table shows the Quantum electrical specifications.

RFI Immunity (IEC 1000-4-3)

Ground Continuity (IEC 1000-4-5)

Electrostatic Discharge (IEC 1000-4-2)

Flammability

80 ...1000 MHz, 10 V/m

2 kV shield to ground

8 kV air / 4 kV contact

Wiring Connector: 94V-0 Module Enclosure: 94V-

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

System Specifications

AC/DC Power

Supplies

The following table shows the Quantum AC/DC power supplies.

Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4)

Damped Oscillatory Transients

Surge Withstand Capability (Transients)

(IEC 1000-4-5)

Non Periodic Peak Input Voltage

2 kV common mode

1 kV differential mode

2 kV common mode

1 kV differential mode

2.3 times nominal for 1.3 ms (Nominal = DC average or AC peak)

I/O Modules -

Table 1

The following table shows the Quantum function I/O modules with operating voltages less than 24 Vac or Vdc.

Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4)

Damped Oscillatory Transients

Surge Withstand Capability (Transients)

(IEC 1000-4-5)

0.5 kV common mode

1 kV common mode

0.5 kV differential mode

1 kV common mode

0.5 kV differential mode

I/O Modules -

Table 2

The following table shows the Quantum I/O modules with operating voltages between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc.

Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4)

Damped Oscillatory Transients

Surge Withstand Capability (Transients)

(IEC 1000-4-5)

1 kV

2 kV common mode

1 kV differential mode

1 kV common mode

0.5 kV differential mode

I/O Modules -

Table 3

The following table shows the Quantum I/O modules with operating voltages greater than 48 Vac or Vdc.

Fast Transients (IEC 1000-4-4)

Damped Oscillatory Transients

Surge Withstand Capability (Transients)

(IEC 1000-4-5)

2 kV

2 kV common mode

1 kV differential mode

2 kV common mode

1 kV differential mode

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Operating

Conditions

System Specifications

The following table shows the Quantum operating conditions.

Temperature 0 ... 60° C (32 ... 140° F)

Humidity 0 ... 95 percent RH non-condensing at 60° C

Chemical

Interactions

Altitude

Enclosures and terminal strips are made of polycarbonates. This material can be damaged by strong alkalis and various hydrocarbons, esters, halogens and ketones in combination with heat. Common products containing these include detergents, PVC products, petroleum products, pesticides, disinfectants, paint removers, and spray paints.

2,000 meters. When the altitude exceeds this, reduce the 60°C maximum operating temperature by 6°C per 1000 meters of additional elevation.

Vibration

Shock

10 ... 57 Hz at 0.075 mm d.a. 57 ... 150 Hz at 1 g

+/-15 g peak, 11 ms, half-sine wave

Gas Resistance in Conformally

Coated Modules

The following table shows gas resistance data for conformally coated Quantum modules.

Mixed Flowing Gas Test, 22 days exposure

Standard

EIA364-65 Level lll

ISA-S71.04 (GX

Severe)

Gas

(Chlorine)

Test Requirement

20 PPB, +/- 5 PPB

Actual Exposure

20 PPB

(Nirtic Oxide) 200 PPB, +/- 50 PPB 1250 PPB

S (Hydrogen Sulfide) 100 PPB, +/- 20 PPB 100 PPB

(Sulfur Oxide) N/A 300 PPB

(Chlorine) 10 PPB 20 PPB

1250 PPB NO

((Nitric Oxide) 1250 PPB

S (Hydrogen Sulfide) 50 PPB

(Sulfur Oxide) 300 PPB

100 PPB

300 PPB

Storage

Conditions

The following table shows the Quantum storage conditions.

Temperature

Humidity

Free Fall

-40 ... 85° C (-40 ... 185° F)

0 ... 95 percent RH non-condensing at 60° C

3 ft. (1 m)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

System Specifications

Agency

Approvals

The following table shows the agency approvals.

UL 508

CSA 22.2-142

Factory Mutual Class 1, Div 2

European Directives (CE) 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and amendments

1RWH All Quantum system modules contain static-sensitive components. Each module is labeled with the following static-sensitive symbol.

The following figure shows the static sensitive symbol.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Module Specifications and Configuration

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Part?

This part provides information on Quantum module specifications as well as configuration of the modules.

This part contains the following chapters:

Chapter

Chapter Name

Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules

Power Supply Modules

CPU Modules

Quantum Field Bus Modules

Distributed I/O (DIO) for the Quantum Modules

Quantum Remote I/O Communication Modules

Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules

Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module

Quantum Ethernet Modules

Intelligent/Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum

Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output Modules

Quantum Simulator Modules

Quantum Battery Module

Quantum I/O Modules

429

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications and Configuration

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Hardware Specifications for the

Quantum Modules

Quantum Hardware Specifications

Overview

Power Supply

Specifications z z z z z

This section shows the specifications for Quantum hardware modules including:

Power Supplies

CPUs

Networking

Intelligent/Special Purpose

I/O

The following table shows the power supplies for local and RIO Drops.

Part Number Source Voltage Type

140CPS11100 115 ... 230 Vac Standalone

140CPS11400 115 ... 230 Vac

140CPS11410 115 ... 230 Vac

Standalone

Standalone/Summable

140CPS11420 115 ... 230 Vac

140CPS12400 115 ... 230 Vac

140CPS12420 115 ... 230 Vac

140CPS21100 24 Vdc

Standalone/Summable

Standalone/Redundant

Standalone

140CPS21400 24 Vdc

140CPS22400 24 Vdc

140CPS41400 48 Vdc

140CPS42400 48 Vdc

140CPS51100 100 ... 150 Vdc

140CPS52400 125 Vdc

Standalone/Summable

Standalone/Redundant

Standalone

Standalone/Redundant

8 A

3 A

8 A

Bus Current Provided

3 A

8 A

11A/16A/20A

3 A

8A/10A/11A

3 A

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Hardware Specifications

CPU

Specifications

The following table shows specifications for the CPUs.

Part Numbers

140CPU11302

140CPU11303

140CPU21304

140CPU42402

140CPU43412

140CPU43412A

140CPU53414

140CPU53414A

Max IEC

Program

109 k

368 k

606 k

570 k

896 k

2.5 M

SRAM

Size

256 k

512 k

768 k

2 M

4 M

Ladder

Logic

8 k

16 k

Available

Registers

10 k

Bus Current

Required

780 mA

790 mA

32 k or 48 k 64 k or 32 k 900 mA

64 k 64 k 1.8 A

64 k

57 k

1.8 A

1.25 A

64 k

57 k

1.8 A

1.25A

Networking

Modules – RIO

The following table shows specifications for RIO Networking modules.

Part Numbers (RIO)

140CRA93100

140CRA93200

140CRP93100

140CRP93200

Drop Location

Remote (Drop)

Local (Head)

Communication

Channel(s)

Bus Current

Provided

600 mA

750 mA

600 mA

750 mA

Field Bus

Modules

The following table shows specifications for field bus modules.

Part Number Communication Channel(s)

140CRP81100 1 Profibus port, 1 RS-232 port (db 9 pin)

140EIA92100 1 AS-i

140NOA61100 1InterBus, LED display, gen 3

140NOA61110 1 InterBus, 7 segment display, gen 3

140NOA62200 1 InterBus, LED, gen 4

140NOL91100 2 free topology, twisted pair; 78,000 BPS, LonWorks

140NOL91110 2 linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated,

78,000 BPS, LonWorks

140NOL91120 2 linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated, 1.25

BBPS, LonWorks

Bus Current

Required

1.2 A

250mA

700 mA

800 mA

400 mA

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Networking

Modules – DIO

(Modbus Plus)

Hardware Specifications

The following table shows specifications for DIO Networking modules.

Part Numbers (DIO) Source Voltage Communication Channel(s) Bus Current

Provided

140CRA21110

140CRA21210

115 Vac

3 A

140CRA21120

140CRA21220

24 Vdc

3 A

Networking

Modules –

Ethernet

The following table shows specifications for ethernet modules.

Part Numbers Communication Channels

140NOE21100 1 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port

140NOE25100 1 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) port

140NOE31100 1 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port

140NOE35100 2 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports

140NOE51100 1 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port

140NOE55100 2 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports

140NOE771xx 1 10/100 BASE-TX Ethernet network (RJ-45) port

1 100 BASE-FX (MT-RJ connector) fiber optic port

Bus Current

Required

1 A

750 mA

Networking

Modules – NOM

The following table shows specifications for Modbus Plus NOM Networking modules.

Part Numbers (NOM) Communication Channels

140NOM21100 1, twisted pair, 1 Modbus, 9-pin D-Sub

140NOM21200

140NOM25200

2, twisted pair, 1 Modbus, 9-pin D-Sub

Bus Current Required

780 mA

2, fiber optic (ST-style); 1 Modbus (RJ-45) 780 mA

Intelligent/

Special Purpose

– Hot Standby

Module

The following table shows specifications for the Hot Standby module.

Part Number Communication Channel Bus Current Required Special Features

140CHS11000 Fiber Optic 700 mA Use kit P/N -

140 CHS21000

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Hardware Specifications

Counter Modules The following table shows specifications for the high speed Counter modules.

Part Number Function

140EHC10500 High Speed

Counter (100 kHz)

140EHC20200 High Speed

Counter (500 kHz)

Points/

Channels

Bus Current

Required

250 mA

Special Features

650 mA

35 kHz @ 24 Vdc 100 kHz @ 5 Vdc

500 kHz, Incremental or Quadrature

ASCII Interface

Module

The following table shows specifications for the ASCII Interface Module.

Part

Numbers

Function

140ESI06210 Intelligent, Bi-directional,

ASCII Interface

Communication

Channels

Bus Current

Required

2 300 mA

Special

Features

1 Port @

19.2 kbps

High Speed

Interrupt Module

The following table shows specifications for the High Speed Interrupt module.

Part Number Function Points/Channels Bus Current

Required

140HLI34000 High Speed, Latch, and Interrupt 16 400 mA

Single Axis

Motion Modules

The following table shows specifications for the Single Axis Motion modules.

Part Numbers Function

140MSB10100 Motion Controller, Single

Axis Bi-directional,

ASCII Interface

Channels Bus Current

Required

750 mA

140MSC10100 Motion Controller, Single

Axis

1 1000 mA

Special Features

Dual Encoder

Feedback

Dual Encoder

Feedback and

Resolver Feedback

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

I/O Modules –

Discrete In

Hardware Specifications

The following table shows specifications for the Discrete In modules.

Type/Part

Number

Function

140DAI34000 24 Vac

140DAI35300 24 Vac

140DAI44000 48 Vac

140DAI45300 48 Vac

140DAI54000 115 Vac

140DAI54300 115 Vac

140DAI55300 115 Vac

140DAI74000 230 Vac

140DAI75300 230 Vac

140DDI15310 5 Vdc

140DDI35300 24 Vdc

140DSI35300 24 Vdc

140DDI35310 24 Vdc

140DDI36400 24 Vdc

140DDI67300 125 Vdc 24

140DDI84100 10 ... 60 Vdc 16

140DDI85300 10 ... 60 Vdc 32

140DSI35300 24 Vdc 32

Points/

Channels

N/A

Points per

Group

N/A

Bus Current

Required

180 mA

250 mA

180 mA

250 mA

180 mA

250 mA

180 mA

250 mA

170 mA

330 mA

250 mA

330 mA

270 mA

200 mA

300 mA

250 mA

Special

Features

Isolated

Grouped

Isolated

Grouped

Isolated

Grouped

Islolated

Grouped

Supervised inputs grouped

Grouped

Supervised

Inputs Grouped

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Hardware Specifications

I/O Modules –

Discrete Out

The following table shows specifications for the Discrete Out modules.

Special Features Type/Part

Number

140DAO84000

Function

24 ... 230 Vac

Points/

Channels

Points per

Group

N/A

Bus

Current

Required

350 mA

140DAO84010 24 ... 115 Vac 16

140DAO84210 115 ... 230 Vac 16

140DAO84220 24 ... 48 Vac

140DAO85300 230 Vac

140DDO15310 5 Vdc

140DDO35300 24 Vdc

140DDO35301 24 Vdc

140DDO35310 24 Vdc

140DDO36400 24 Vdc

140DDO84300 10 ... 60 Vdc

140DDO88500 24 ... 125 Vdc 12

140DRA84000 N.O. Relay

140DRC83000 N.O./N.C.

Relay

140DVO85300 10 ... 30 Vdc

N/A

350 mA

330 mA

250 mA

330 mA

250 mA

160 mA

6 points:

375 mA

12 points:

650 mA

1,100 mA

560 mA

500 mA

4 A per point, isolated

4 A per point, group fused

1 A per point, group fused

0.5 A per point, group fused

0.5 A per point

0.5 A per point, group fused

2 A per point, group fused

0.5 A per point with short circuit protection,

Group fused

2 A per point

5 A per point

0.5 A per point, verified output, group fused

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

I/O Modules –

Discrete In/Out

Hardware Specifications

The following table shows specifications for the Discrete In/Out modules.

Type/Part

Number

Type/Part

Number

140DAM59000 115 Vac

Points/ channels

16 In

8 Out

140DDM39000 24 Vdc

140DDM69000 125 Vdc

16 In

8 Out

4 In

4 Out

Points per group

Bus current required

Special features

250 mA

330 mA

0.5 A per point on outputs, grouped fused

N/A

350 mA Inputs: Grouped

Outputs: 4 A per point isolated

I/O Modules –

Analog In/Out

The following table shows specifications for the Analog In/Out module.

Type/Part

Number

Function

140AMM09000 Inputs

Vdc:

+/- 10

+/- 5

0 ... 10

0 ... 5

1 ... 5 mA:

+/- 20

0 ... 20

4 ... 20

Outputs

4 ... 20 mA

Points/

Channels

4 In

Points per group

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

N/A 350 mA Mixed inputs, current or voltage

2 Out N/A Isolated

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Hardware Specifications

I/O Modules –

Analog In

The following table shows specifications for the Analog In modules.

Type/Part

Number

Function

140ACI03000 4 ... 20 mA

1 ... 5 Vdc

140ACI04000 0 ...25 mA

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

140ARI03010 RTD: Pt, Ni,

Ohms

140AVI03000 0 ... 20 mA,

+/- 20 mA

+/- 10 Vdc

+/- 5 Vdc

140ATI03000 T/C: B, E, J,

K, R, S, T

Points/

Channels

Points per

Group

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

1 240 mA

16 360 mA

Mixed inputs, current or voltage

High density

200 mA

280 mA

IEC/American

Mixed inputs, current or voltage

CJC INT/EXT

I/O Modules –

Analog Out

The following table shows specifications for the Analog Out modules.

Type/ Part

Number

Function

140ACO02000 4 ... 20 mA

140ACO13000 0 ... 25 mA

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

140AVO02000 0 ... 10 Vdc,

+/1 10 Vdc

0 ... 5 Vdc

+/- 5 Vdc

Points/

Channels

Points per group

N/A

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

480 mA

550 mA

Channels isolated

High density

4 N/A 700 mA Mixed outputs

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Hardware Specifications

Intrinsic Safe

Analog Modules

The following table shows specifications for the Intrinsic Safe analog modules.

Type/Part

Number

Function

140AII33000 TC: B, E, J,

K, R, S, T

RTD: Pt, Ni

Ohms

Points/

Channels

8 140AII33010 0 ... 25 mA

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

140AIO33000 0 ... 25 mA

0 ... 20 mA

4 ... 20 mA

Points per

Group

Bus Current

Required

Special Features

1 400 mA CJC INT/EXT

IEC/American

1.5 A

2.5 A

Mixed inputs, current. Internal power supply.

Internal power supply.

Intrinsic Safe

Discrete

Modules

The following table shows the specifications for the Intrinsic Safe discrete modules.

Type/Part

Number

Function

140DII33000 Discrete In

140DIO33000 Discrete Out

Points/

Channels

Points per

Common

Bus Current

Required

Special

Features

8 400 mA

8 2.2 A

Internal power supply

Miscellaneous

Modules

The following table shows specifications for miscellaneous modules.

Type/Part Number

140XBE10000

140XCP90000

140XSM01000

Function

Backplane expander

Battery backup

Analog simulator

Bus Current Required

500 mA

None

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Hardware Specifications

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supply Modules

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Chapter?

The following chapter describes the Quantum power supplies, including: specifications, LED indicators and descriptions, and wiring diagrams. Where applicable, it includes operating curves and hold-up capacitor timing charts.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module (PV01 or Greater)

140CPS11400 AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module

Page

140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A

140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 11 A

140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module

140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 11 A Module

140CPS21100 DC Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A Module

140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module

140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module

140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module

140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module

140CPS51100 DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module

140CPS52400 DC Standalone/Redundant Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 3 A module (Product Version 01 or greater).

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

115Vac

AC L

AC N

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Power Supplies

The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11100 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Frequency

Input Voltage Total Harmonic

Distortion

Input Current

Inrush Current

VA Rating

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

93 ... 132 Vac (jumper installed)

170 ... 264 Vac (no jumper)

47 ... 63 Hz

Less than 10% of the fundamental ms value

0.4 A @ 115 Vac. 0.2 A @ 230 Vac

13 A @ 115 Vac. @ 25°C first power up

23 A @ 230 Vac. @ 25°C first power up

50 VA

1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

1.5 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502515 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

5.1 Vdc

3 A

None required

Over Current, Over Voltage Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector (included) 7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

Internal Power Dissipation 6 Watts typ.

Operating Mode Standalone

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS11100 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

1RWH For "Closed System" installations, connector 140XTS00 500 must be used

(see

The following table shows the CPS11100 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the CPS11100 wiring diagram.

Internally connected

}

Do not connect any external wiring to these points

Install jumper for 115 Vac operation only

AC L

AC N

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module (PV01 or Greater)

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 3 A module (PV01 or greater).

The following figure shows the power supply module (PV01 or greater) components.

LED Area

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

115Vac

AC L

AC N

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11100 115/230 VAC power supply module (PV01 or greater).

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Frequency

Input Voltage Total Harmonic

Distortion

Input Current

Inrush Current

VA Rating

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

100 ... 276 Vac

47 ... 63 Hz

Less than 10% of the fundamental ms value

0.4 A @ 115 Vac. 0.2 A @ 230 Vac

10 A @ 115 Vac. 20 A @ 230 Vac

50 VA

1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

1.5 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502515 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

(included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

3 A

0.3 A

Over Current, Over Voltage

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

2.0 + 3.0 x I

OUT

= Watts (where I

OUT

is in Amperes)

Standalone

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Indicator and Description

Power Supplies

The following figure shows the CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) LED indicator.

Pwr ok

1RWH For "closed system" installations, connector 140XTS00 500 must be used

(see

The following table shows the CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS11100 (PV01 or greater) wiring diagram.

}

Internally connected. Do not connect any external wiring to these points.

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only.

AC L

AC N

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS11400 AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the AC Power Supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

115Vac

AC L

AC N

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Power Supplies

The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11400 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Frequency

Input Voltage Total Harmonic

Distortion

Less than 10% of the fundamental ms value

Input Current

Inrush Current

VA Rating

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

93 ... 138 Vac. 170 ... 276 Vac

47 ... 63 Hz

1.1 A @ 115 Vac. 0.6 A @ 230 Vac

38 A @ 115 Vac. 19 A @ 230 Vac

130 VA

1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum-rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

2.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

5.1 Vdc

8 A @ 60° C (See the operating curve below)

None required

Over Current, Over Voltage Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

(included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

6.0 + 1.5 x I

Standalone out

= Watts (where I out

is in Amperes)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS11400 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

The following table shows the CPS11400 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs

Pwr ok

Color

Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram and Operating

Curve

The following figures show the CPS11400 Wiring Diagram (left) and operating curve

(right).

Internally connected.

}

Do not connect any external wiring to these points.

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only

AC L

AC N

40 45 50 55 60

Ambient Temperature (C)

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 8 A

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the AC power supply, 115/230 Vac, 8 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module and its components.

LED Area

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

$ODUP

5HOD\

115 VAC

115VAC

AC L

AC N

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11410 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Frequency

Input Voltage Total Harmonic

Distortion

Input Current

Inrush Current

VA Rating

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

93 ... 138 Vac. 170 ... 276 Vac

47 ... 63 Hz

Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value

1.1 A @ 115 Vac. 0.6 A @ 230 Vac

38 A @ 115 Vac. 19 A @ 230 Vac

130 VA

1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

2.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

(included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

8 A @ 60° C

None required

Over Current, Over Voltage

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

6.0 + 1.5 x I

OUT

= Watts (where I

Standalone / Summable

OUT

is in Amperes)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS11410 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

Power Supplies

The following table shows the CPS11410 LED description.

LED Descripton

LEDs

Pwr ok

Color

Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram The following figures shows the 140CPS11410.

} Internally connected.

Do not connect any external wiring to these points.

AC L

AC N

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115/230 Vac, 11 A

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the AC power supply, 115/230 Vac, 11 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module and its components.

LED Area

CPS 114 20

PS 115/230 VAC

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

Alarm

Relay

115 VAC

AC L

AC N

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Power Supplies

The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11420 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Frequency

Input Voltage Total Harmonic

Distortion

Input Current

93 ... 132 Vac.

170 ... 264 Vac

47 ... 63 Hz

Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value

Inrush Current @ 25° C (first power up)

VA Rating

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

1.2 A @ 115 Vac.

0.7 A @ 230 Vac

≤

20 A @ 115 Vac.

≤

25 A @ 230 Vac

160 VA @ 11 A

1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

2.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

5.1 Vdc

Stand alone configuration: 11 A @ 60° C

Summable configuration (Two 140CPS11420): 20 A @ 60°

C (Total load capacity)

Summable configuration (One 140CPS11420 and one

140CPS11410): 16A @ 60° C (Total load capacity)

None required

Over Current, Over Voltage

Minimum Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

(included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

Less than 12 W at full load

Standalone / Summable

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS11420 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

The following table shows the CPS11420 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram The following figures shows the CPS11420.

Power loss alarm

AC L

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only

AC N

1RWH A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF. The relay will de-energize when input power drops below

8 Vdc.

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 8 A Module

Power Supplies

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply, 115/230 Vac,

8 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

115 VAC

AC L

AC N

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS12400 PS 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Frequency

Input Voltage Total Harmonic

Distortion

Input Current

Inrush Current

VA Rating

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

93 ... 138 Vac. 170 ... 276 Vac

47 ... 63 Hz

Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value

1.1 A @ 115 Vac. 0.6 A @ 230 Vac

38 A @ 115 Vac. 19 A @ 230 Vac

130 VA

1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

2.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

(included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

8 A @ 60° C

None required

Over Current, Over Voltage

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

6.0 + 1.5 x I out

= Watts (where I out

is in Amperes)

Standalone / Redundant

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS12400 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

Power Supplies

The following table shows the CPS12400 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CPS12400 wiring diagram.

} Internally connected.

Do not connect any external wiring to these points.

AC L

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only

AC N

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply, 115/230 Vac 11 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply, 115/230 Vac,

11 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

&36

369$&

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

Power loss alarm

115 VAC

AC L

AC N

1RWH

When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Power Supplies

The following table shows the specifications for the CPS12420 PS 115/230 VAC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Frequency

Input Voltage Total Harmonic

Distortion

Input Current

93 ... 132 Vac.

170 ... 264 Vac

47 ... 63 Hz

Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value

Inrush Current

VA Rating

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

1.2 A @ 115 Vac

0.7 A @ 230 Vac

≤

20 A @ 115 Vac @ 25° C first power up

≤

25 A @ 230 Vac

160 VA @ 11 A

1/2 cycle @ full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

2.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

5.1 Vdc

Standalone configuration: 11 A @ 60° C

Redundant configuration (two 140CPS12420): 10 A @ 60°

C (total load capacity)

Redundant configuration (one 140CPS12420 and one

140CPS22400): 8 A @ 60° C (total load capacity)

Redundant configuration (one 140CPS12420 and one

140CPS42400): 8 A @ 60° C (total load capacity)

None required

Over Current, Over Voltage

Minimum Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

(included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

Less than 12 W at full load

Standalone / Redundant

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS12420 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

The following table shows the CPS12420 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS12420 wiring diagram.

Power loss alarm

AC L

Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only

AC N

8 Vdc.

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS21100 DC Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the DC power supply, 24 Vdc, 3 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

&36

369'&

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

X 4

24Vdc-

24Vdc+

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS21100 PS 24 VDC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Current

Inrush Current

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

20 ... 30 Vdc

1.6 A

30 A

1.0 ms max @ 20 V. 20.0 ms max @ 24 V

2.5 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502516 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector (included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

3 A

0.3 A

Over Current, Over Voltage

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043503328)

2.0 + 3 x I out

= Watts (where I out

is in Amperes)

Standalone

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS21100 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

The following table shows the CPS21100 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CPS21100 wiring diagram.

Not used

-24 Vdc (Common)

+24 Vdc

Not used

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the DC summable power supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

&36

369'&

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

Alarm

Relay

24Vdc-

24Vdc+

+ cap

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Power Supplies

The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPS21400 PS 24 Vdc power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Current

Inrush Current

Input Ripple

20 ... 30 Vdc

3.8 A max

25 A @ 24 Vdc. 14 A @ 20 Vdc

2.4 Vdc max, 94 ... 189 Hz

Input Power Interruption 1 ms max @ 24 Vdc (see the hold-up capacitor timing chart)

Fusing (external) 5.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502405 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

5.1 Vdc

8 A

None required

Over Current, Over Voltage Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal strip (Part # 043503328)

Internal Power Dissipation 6.0 + 1.8 x I

OUT

= Watts (where I

OUT

is in Amperes)

Operating Mode Standalone / Summable

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS21400 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

The following table shows the CPS21400 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Power Supplies

Wiring Diagram and Timing Chart

The following figures show the CPS214 wiring diagram (left) and the hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).

} Power Loss

Alarm

-24 Vdc (Common)

+24 Vdc

Capacitor

(Optional)

100

Capacitor Size (millifarads)

100 68 47

Times/ms 60

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Input Voltage

5.8

4.7

2.2

Capacitor

Size

(millifarads)

1RWH

A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF. The relay will de-energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc.

Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a ≥ 50 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the hold-up capacitor timing chart for capacitor values.

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the DC Redundant Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 8

A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

&36

369'&

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

X 4

Alarm

Relay

24Vdc-

24Vdc+

+ cap

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 24 Vdc, 8 A DC redundant power supply.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Current

Inrush Current

Input Ripple

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

20 ... 30 Vdc

3.8 A max

25 A @ 24 Vdc. 14 A @ 20 Vdc

2.4 Vdc max, 94 ... 189 Hz

1 ms max @ 24 Vdc

5.0 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502405 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Current

Protection

General

Surge Withstand

Field Wiring Connector

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

8 A

Over Current, Over Voltage

2.3 x Maximum Rated Input Voltage for 1.3 ms

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043503328)

6.0 + 1.8 x I out

= Watts (where I out

is in Amperes)

Standalone / Redundant

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS22400 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

The following table shows the CPS22400 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Wiring Diagram and Timing Chart

The following figures show the 140CPS22400 wiring diagram (left) and the

140CPS22400 hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).

} Power Loss

Alarm

-24 Vdc (Common)

+24 Vdc

Capacitor

(Optional)

100

Capacitor Size (millifarads)

100 68 47

Times/ms

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Input Voltage

5.8

4.7

2.2

Capacitor

Size

(millifarads)

1RWH

A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac, 6A / 30 Vdc, 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip. This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF, or a power supply failure. The relay will de-energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc.

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the DC summable power supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

&36

369'&

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

Alarm

Relay

48Vdc-

48Vdc+

+ cap

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Power Supplies

The following table shows the specifications for the CPS41400, 48 VDC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Current

Inrush Current

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

40 ... 72 Vdc

1.2 A @ 48 Vdc

25 A @ 40 Vdc

13 ms @ 48 Vdc

2.0 A medium time-lag recommended (Part # 57-0089-

000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

8 A (see operating curve)

Over Current, Over Voltage

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043503328)

15.6 W @ 8 A

Standalone / Summable

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS41400 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

The following table shows the CPS41400 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Power Supplies

Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the CPS41400 wiring diagram.

}

Power Loss

Alarm

-48 ... -60 Vdc (Common)

+48 ... +60 Vdc

Capacitor

(Optional)

1RWH

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

Operating Curve and Timing Chart

The following figures show the CPS41400 operating curve (left) and the hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).

Capacitor size/mF

47 22 10 6.8

4.7

100

90 2.2

40 45 50 55

Ambient Temperature (C)

40 45 50 55

Input Voltage

60 65 70

1RWH

Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a

≥

80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the hold-up capacitor timing chart (above) for capacitor values.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the DC redundant power supply, 48 Vdc, 8 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

&36

369'&

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

Alarm

Relay

48Vdc-

48Vdc+

+ cap

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

1RWH Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding an 80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the holdup capacitor timing chart (above) for capacitor values.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPS42400 PS 48 VDC RED power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Current

Inrush Current

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

40 ... 72 Vdc

1.3 A @ 48 Vdc

25 A @ 48 Vdc

13 ms @ 48 Vdc

2.0 A medium time-lag recommended (Part # 57-0089-

000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

8 A (see operating curve)

Over Current, Over Voltage

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043503328)

17.2 W @ 8 A

Standalone / Redundant

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS42400 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

The following table shows the CPS42400 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the CPS42400 wiring diagram.

}

Power Loss

Alarm

-48 ... -60 Vdc (Common)

+48 ... +60 Vdc

Capacitor

(Optional)

1RWH

See

for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

1RWH

Operating Curve and Timing Chart

The following figures show the CPS42400 operating curve (left) and the hold-up capacitor timing chart (right).

Capacitor size/mF

40 45 50 55

Ambient Temperature (C)

100

10 6.8

Input Voltage

4.7

65 70

2.2

1RWH Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a ≥ 80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip. Refer to the hold-up capacitor timing chart (above) for capacitor values.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

140CPS51100 DC Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A Module

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the DC power supply, 125 Vdc, 3 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

&36

369'&

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

125Vdc-

125Vdc+

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Power Supplies

The following table shows the specifications for the CPS51100 125 Vdc power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Current

Inrush Current

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

100 ... 150 Vdc including ripple

0.4 A

10 A

1.0 ms max

1.5 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 043502515 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

(included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

3 A

0.3 A

Over Current, Over Voltage

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506325)

2.0 + 3 x I out

= Watts (where I out

is in Amperes)

Standalone

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS51100 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

The following table shows the CPS51100 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the CPS51100 wiring diagram.

Not used

125 VDC +

125 VDC - (Common)

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

140CPS52400 DC Standalone/Redundant Power Supply, 125 Vdc, 8 A

Power Supplies

Overview

Power Supply

Module

The following provides information on the DC Standalone/Redundant power supply,

125 Vdc, 8 A module.

The following figure shows the power supply module components.

LED Area

&36

369'&

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

125 Vdc-

125 Vdc+

1RWH When field wiring the power supply module, the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 - 14 AWG or 2 - 16 AWG; the minimum is 20 AWG.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS52400 125 VDC power supply module.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Current

Inrush Current

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

100 ... 150 Vdc including ripple

0.5 A @ 125 Vdc

28 A @ 125 Vdc

1.0 ms max

2 A slo-blo recommended (Part # 57-0089-000 or equivalent)

Output to Bus

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Current

Protection

General

Field Wiring Connector

(included)

Internal Power Dissipation

Operating Mode

5.1 Vdc

8 A @ 60° C

None required

Over Current, Over Voltage

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506325)

6.0 + 1.5 x |

OUT

= Watts (where |

OUT

is in Amperes)

Standalone / Redundant

100

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Indicator and Description

The following figure shows the CPS52400 LED indicator.

Pwr ok

Power Supplies

The following table shows the CPS52400 LED description.

LED Description

LEDs Color

Pwr ok Green

Indication when On

Power is supplied to the bus.

Wiring Diagram

The following figure shows the CPS52400 wiring diagram.

}

Internally connected.

Do not connect any external wiring to these points.

Not used

125VDC +

125 VDC - (Common)

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

101

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Power Supplies

102

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

At a Glance

Introduction This chapter provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the Quantum CPU modules.

The following table shows an overview of the Quantum CPU modules.

CPU SRAM

(bytes)

140CPU11302 256 k

140CPU11303 512 k

140CPU21304 768 k

Ladder Registers Extended 984 Ladder

Performance

8 k

16 k

10 k

32 k or

48 k

57 k or

28 k * none none

0.3 - 1.4 ms/k

80 k or 0 k * 0.3 - 1.4 ms/k

Max IEC

Program

109 k

368 k

606 k

140CPU42402 2 M

140CPU43412 2 M

140CPU43412A 2 M

140CPU53414 4 M

64 k

64 K

64K

64 K

57 k

57 K*

96 k *

96 k

0.1 - 0.5 ms/k

570 k

896 k

0.9 - 0.45 ms/k 2.5 M

140CPU53414A 4 M 64 K 57 K* 96K 0.1 - 0.5 ms/k 2.5 M

*Refer to the individual specification pages for detailed information.

103

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

What’s in this

Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

140CPU11302 CPU Module

140CPU11303 CPU Module

140CPU21304 CPU Module

140CPU42402 CPU Module

140CPU43412 CPU Module

140CPU43412A CPU Module

140CPU53414 CPU Module

140CPU53414A CPU Module

Page

104

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

140CPU11302 CPU Module

Overview

CPU Module

The following provides information on the 140CPU11302 Controller module –

CPU 256 K, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 109 K (requires IEC-only Exec.)

The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.

LED Area

Battery

Memory Protect and

Comm parameter

Slide Switches

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

Chan A

&38

CONTROLLER

Modbus

Plus

Chan A

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Part #043513804

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door) Part #043502480

Date

Installed

Batt.

Spare mem prt off not used

ASCII

RTU mem

Modbus

Plus

Network

Node

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

105

CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU11302 CONTROLLER module.

Specifications

984 Ladder Logic

Reference Capacity

Discrete

8 k words max

8192 In and 8192 Out max

Local I/O (Main Backplane)

Maximum I/O Words

Maximum Number of I/O Racks

Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop

Maximum Number of Remote Drops

Distributed I/O

Maximum Number of Networks per

System

64 In and 64 Out*

2 (Requires expander)

64 In / 64 Out*

3**

Maximum Words per Network (For every

DIO drop, there is a minimum of two words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out

Maximum Words per Node

Watchdog Timer

30 In and 32 Out

250 ms (S/W adjustable)

Logic Solve Time

Battery

Service Life

Shelf Life

0.3 ms / k to 1.4 ms / k

3 V Lithium

1200 mAh

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

Battery Load Current @ Power-off

Typical

Maximum

Communication

Modbus (RS-232)

Modbus Plus (RS-485)

110

1 serial port (9-pin D-shelf)

1 network port (9-pin D-shell)

106

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Specifications

General

Diagnostics

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

TOD Clock

Maximum Number of NOM, NOE, and

MMS modules (any combination)

Power Up Runtime

RAM RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

User Logic Check User Logic Check

Processor

780 mA

3.9 W

+/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C

* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register

I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available.

The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured – one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Processor.–

107

CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Modbus

Modbus +

Bat Low

Error A

Mem Prt

The following table shows the LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Ready

Run

Green

Modbus

Modbus +

Mem Prt

Bat Low

Error A

Green

Amber

Red

Indication when On

The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics.

The CPU has been started and is solving logic. (See the following table for Run LED error codes).

Communications are active on the Modbus port.

Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Memory is write protected (the memory protect switch is on).

The battery needs replacing.

Indicates a communications error on the Modbus Plus network.

108

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table show the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error, and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex) for the

140CPU11302 module.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Continuous

623

624

625

626

61F

620

621

622

617

618

619

61E

609

614

615

616

605

606

607

608

72C

72F

730

604

82E

769

72A

72B

Code

0000

80B

80C

Error requested kernel mode ram error during sizing run output active failed

MB command handler stack error bus grant received not master asic on cpu master config write bad quantum bus DPM write failure plc asic loopback test plc asic BAD_DATA

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

UPI bus diagnostic error modbus cmd-buffer overflow modbus cmd-length is zero modbus abort command error mbp bus interface error bad mbp response opcode timeout waiting for mbp mbp out of synchronization mbp invalid path page 0 not paragraph aligned bad external uart hardware bad external uart interrupt bad receive comm state bad transmit comm state bad comm state trn_asc bad comm state trn_rtu bad comm state rcv_rtu bad comm state rcv_asc bad modbus state tmr0_evt

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

109

CPU Modules

Front Panel

Switches

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

300

301

8001

8002

8003

Code

627

628

631

503

52D

402

Error bad modbus state trn-int bad modbus state rcv-int bad interrupt ram address test error

P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR ram data test error

EXEC not loaded

EXEC Checksum

Kernal prom checksum error flash prog / erase error unexpected executive return

Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU. The left switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-

232) ports.

The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU11302. mem prt off not used

ASCII

RTU mem

1RWH The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is set to RTU or ASCII mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected, as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.

110

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.

ASCII Communication Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Communication Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Communication Port Parameters

Baud 19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

2,000

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

Device Address

1,800

7 / 8

1 / 2

Enable/Disable Odd/Even

1 ... 247

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

111

CPU Modules

Rear Panel

Switches

Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.

1RWH The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.

The following figure shows SW1 and SW2.

SW 1 (TOP)

SW 2 (BOTTOM)

The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

112

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

CPU Modules

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

1RWH Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA2620 or

990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a

Quantum CPU or NOM module.

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25pin connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD 1

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

113

CPU Modules

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable

(laptop) computers.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

NC: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

114

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

140CPU11303 CPU Module

Overview

CPU Module

The following provides information on the 140CPU11303 Controller module –

CPU 512 k, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 368 K (requires IEC Exec.)

The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.

LED Area

Battery

Memory Protect and

Comm parameter

Slide Switches

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

Chan A

Modbus

Plus

Chan A

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Date

Installed

Batt.

Spare mem prt off not used

ASCII

RTU mem

Modbus

Plus

Network

Node

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

115

CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU11303 CONTROLLER module.

Specifications

984 Ladder Logic

Reference Capacity

Discrete

16 k words max

8192 In and 8192 Out max

Local I/O (Main Backplane)

Maximum I/O Words

Maximum Number of I/O Racks

Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop

Maximum Number of Remote Drops

Distributed I/O

Maximum Number of Networks per

System

Maximum Words per Network (For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of two words input of overhead.)

Maximum Words per Node

Watchdog Timer

Logic Solve Time

Battery

Service Life

Shelf Life

Battery Load Current @ Power-off

Typical

Maximum

Communication

Modbus (RS-232)

Modbus Plus (RS-485)

64 In and 64 Out*

2 (Requires expander)

64 In / 64 Out*

3**

500 In and 500 Out

30 In and 32 Out

250 ms (S/W adjustable)

0.3 ms / k to 1.4 ms / k

3 V Lithium

1200 mAh

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

210

1 serial port (9-pin D-shell)

1 network port (9-pin D-shell)

116

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Specifications

General

Diagnostics

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

TOD Clock

Maximum Number of NOM, NOE, and

MMS modules (any combination)

Power Up Runtime

RAM RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

User Logic Check User Logic Check

Processor

790 mA

3.95 W

+/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C

* This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register

I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available.

The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured - one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of the 140NOM21x00 Option Processor.

117

CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the CPU11303 LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Modbus

Modbus +

Bat Low

Error A

Mem Prt

The following table shows the CPU11303 LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Ready

Run

Green

Modbus

Modbus +

Mem Prt

Bat Low

Error A

Green

Amber

Red

Indication when On

The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics.

The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following table for Run LED error codes).

Communications are active on the Modbus port.

Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Memory is write protected (the memory protect switch is on).

The battery needs replacing.

Indicates a communications error on the Modbus Plus network.

118

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex). The following table shows the blinking run LED error codes.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Continuous

623

624

625

626

61F

620

621

622

617

618

619

61E

609

614

615

616

605

606

607

608

72C

72F

730

604

82E

769

72A

72B

Code

0000

80B

80C

Error requested kernel mode ram error during sizing run output active failed

MB command handler stack error bus grant received not master asic on cpu master config write bad quantum bus DPM write failure plc asic loopback test plc asic BAD_DATA

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

119

CPU Modules

Front Panel

Switches

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

300

301

8001

8002

8003

Code

627

628

631

503

52D

402

Error bad modbus state trn-int bad modbus state rcv-int bad interrupt ram address test error

P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR ram data test error

EXEC not loaded

EXEC Checksum

Kernal prom checksum error flash prog / erase error unexpected executive return

232) ports.

The following figure shows the three options that are available. mem prt off not used

ASCII

RTU mem

120

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed. The following table shows the ASCII communication port parameters.

ASCII Communication Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Communication Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Communication Port Parameters

Baud 19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

2,000

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

1,800

Enable/Disable Odd/Even

7 / 8

1 / 2

1 ... 247

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

121

CPU Modules

Rear Panel

Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table that follow) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.

1RWH The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

The following figure shows SW1 and SW2 switches.

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

122

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

CPU Modules

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

1RWH Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or

990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a

Quantum CPU or NOM module.

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25pin connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

6 DSR

RTS

CTS

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD 1

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

123

CPU Modules

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port connections for nine-pin portable computer connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

N/C: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

124

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

140CPU21304 CPU Module

Overview

CPU Module

The following provides information on the 140CPU21304 Controller module –

CPU 768 K, MATH, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 606 K.

The following figure shows the CPU Module and its parts.

LED Area

Battery

Memory Protect and

Comm parameter

Slide Switches

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

Chan A

&38

CONTROLLER

Modbus

Plus

Chan A

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Part #043513804

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door) Part #043502480

Date

Installed

Batt.

Spare mem prt off not used

ASCII

RTU mem

Modbus

Plus

Network

Node

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

125

CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU21304 controller module.

Specifications

User Logic/Reference

Capacity

984 Ladder Logic Discrete Register Extended

Register

32 k words

48 k words

64 k

57 k

28 k

80 k

0 k

57,766 4XX registers max

Only if:

0XXX = 16 and

1XXX = 16 and

3XXX =16

64 k - any mix Discrete

Local I/O (Main Backplane)

Maximum I/O Words 64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of I/O Racks 2 (Requires expander)

Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop

Maximum Number of Remote

Drops

Distributed I/O

64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of Networks per System

Maximum Words per Network

(For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

Maximum Words per Node

Watchdog Timer

Logic Solve Time

Battery

3**

500 In and 500 Out

30 In and 32 Out

250 ms (software adjustable)

0.3 ms / k to 1.4 ms / k

3 V Lithium

Service Life

Shelf Life

1200 mAh

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

Battery Load Current @ Power-off

Typical

Maximum

110

Communication

Modbus (RS-232) 1 serial port (9-pin D-shell)

126

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Specifications

Modbus Plus (RS-485)

General

Diagnostics

1 network port (9-pin D-shell)

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

TOD Clock

Maximum Number of NOM,

NOE, and MMS modules (any combination)

Power Up Runtime

RAM RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

User Logic Check User Logic Check

Processor

900 mA

4.5 W

+/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of

Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured - one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Processor.

127

CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Modbus

Modbus +

Bat Low

Error A

Mem Prt

The following table shows the CPU LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Ready

Run

Green

Modbus

Modbus +

Mem Prt

Bat Low

Error A

Green

Amber

Red

Indication when On

The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics.

The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following table for Run LED error codes).

Communications are active on the Modbus port.

Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Memory is write-protected (the memory protect switch is on).

The battery needs replacing.

Indicates a communications error on the Modbus Plus network.

128

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The Blinking Run LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex).

The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU21304.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Continuous

61F

620

621

622

623

624

617

618

619

61E

609

614

615

616

605

606

607

608

72C

72F

730

604

82E

769

72A

72B

Code

0000

80B

80C

Error requested kernel mode ram error during sizing run output active failed

MB command handler stack error bus grant received not master asic on cpu master config write bad quantum bus DPM write failure plc asic loopback test plc asic BAD_DATA

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

129

CPU Modules

Front Panel

Switches

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

52D

402

300

301

8001

8002

8003

Code

625

626

627

628

631

503

Error bad comm state rcv_asc bad modbus state tmr0_evt bad modbus state trn-int bad modbus state rcv-int bad interrupt ram address test error

P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR ram data test error

EXEC not loaded

EXEC Checksum

Kernal prom checksum error flash prog / erase error unexpected executive return

232) ports.

The following figure shows the three options that are available.

ASCII mem prt off RTU not used mem

1RWH The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is set to RTU or ASCII mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicationunicate with the controller to which it is connected, as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.

130

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed

ASCII Communication Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Communication Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Communication Port Parameters

Baud 19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

2,000

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

1,800

Enable/Disable Odd/Even

7 / 8

1 / 2

1 ... 247

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

131

CPU Modules

Rear Panel

Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table below) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.

1RWH The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

The following figure shows SW1 and SW2.

SW1 (TENS)

SW2 (ONES)

The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

SW1 and SW2 Adress Settings

Node Address

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW1

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

132

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

CPU Modules

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

1RWH Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it isrecommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or

990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a

Quantum CPU or NOM module.

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25pin connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD 1

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

133

CPU Modules

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The follwing figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable computers.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC NC

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

NC: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

134

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

140CPU42402 CPU Module

Overview

CPU Module

The following provides information on the140CPU42402 Controller module –

CPU 2 M, MATH, 2xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program 570 K.

The following figure shows the CPU module and its components.

LED Area

Battery

Memory Protect and

Comm parameter

Slide Switches

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

Chan A

Modbus Plus

Connector

Chan B*

Modbus

Plus

Chan A

Modbus

Plus

Chan B

&38

486 CONTROLLER

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Part #043513804

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door) Part #043506673

Date

Installed

Batt.

Spare mem prt off not used

ASCII

RTU mem

Modbus

Plus

Modbus

Plus

Network

Node

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

135

CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU42402 CONTROLLER module.

Specifications

User Logic/Reference

Capacity

984 Ladder

Logic

64 k words

Discrete

64 k

57,766 4XX registers max

Only if:

0XXX = 16 and

1XXX = 16 and

3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity

Discrete

Local I/O (Main Backplane)

Maximum I/O Words

Maximum Number of I/O

Racks

Distributed I/O

Maximum Number of

Networks per System

64 k - any mix

64 In and 64 Out*

2 (Requires expander)

Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of Remote

Drops

3**

Register

57 k

Maximum Words per Network

(For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out

Maximum Words per Node

Watchdog Timer

30 In and 32 Out

250 ms (S/W adjustable)

Logic Solve Time

Battery

Service Life

Shelf Life

0.1 ms / k to 0.5 ms / k

3 V Lithium

1200 mAh

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

Battery Load Current @ Power-off

Typical

Maximum

210

Extended

Register

96 k

136

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Specifications

Communication

Modbus (RS-232)

Modbus Plus (RS-485)

General

Diagnostics

1 serial port (9-pin D-shell)

2 (redundant) network ports (9-pin D-shell)

Power Up Runtime

RAM RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

Bus Current Required

Power dissipation

User Logic Check

Processor

1.8 A

9 W

TOD Clock +/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60 °C

Maximum Number of NOM,

NOE, and MMS modules (any combination)

User Logic Check

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of

Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured-one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Modules.

137

CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Modbus

Modbus +

Bat Low

Error A

Error B

Mem Prt

The following table shows the CPU LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs

Ready

Color

Green

Run Green

Modbus

Modbus +

Mem Prt

Bat Low

Error A

Error B

Green

Amber

Red

Indication when On

The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics.

The CPU has been started and is solving logic (see the following table for Run LED error codes).

Communications are active on the Modbus port.

Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Memory is write protected (the memory protect switch is on).

The battery needs replacing.

Indicates a communications error on the redundant Modbus Plus port A (140CPU42402 only).

Indicates a communications error on the redundant Modbus Plus port B (140CPU42402 only).

138

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the CPU42402.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Continuous

623

624

625

626

627

61F

620

621

622

617

618

619

61E

609

614

615

616

605

606

607

608

72C

72F

730

604

82E

769

72A

72B

Code

0000

80B

80C

Error requested kernel mode ram error during sizing run output active failed

MB command handler stack error bus grant received not master asic on cpu master config write bad quantum bus DPM write failure plc asic loopback test plc asic BAD_DATA

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

CPU Modules

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

139

CPU Modules

Front Panel

Switches

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code

628

631

503

52D

402

300

301

8001

8002

8003

Error bad modbus state rcv-int bad interrupt ram address test error

P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR ram data test error

EXEC not loaded

EXEC Checksum

Kernal prom checksum error flash prog / erase error unexpected executive return

The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU42402 module.

ASCII mem prt off RTU not used mem

140

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

ASCII Comm Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Comm Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Comm Port Parameters

Baud

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

2,000

1,800

Enable/Disable Odd/Even

7 / 8

1 / 2

1 ... 247

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

141

CPU Modules

Rear Panel

Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.

1RWH The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

The following figure shows SW1 and SW2.

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

142

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

CPU Modules

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

1RWH Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or

990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a

Quantum CPU or NOM module.

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25pin connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD 1

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

143

CPU Modules

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable computers

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

DTR

GRND

DSR

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

RTS

CTS

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

NC: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

144

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

140CPU43412 CPU Module

Overview

CPU Module

The following provides information on the 140CPU43412 Controller module –

CPU 2M, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program – 896 k.

The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.

LED Area

Battery

Key Switch

Modbus

Connector

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

&38

486 CONTROLLER

Slide

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Part #043513804

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Part #31000226

Batt.

Date

Installed

Dey sw

ASCII

RTU mem Switch

Modbus

Comm 1

Modbus

Comm 2

Modbus

Plus

Network

Node

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

145

CPU Modules

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU43412 CONTROLLER module.

Specifications

User Logic/Reference Capacity 984 Ladder

Logic

Discrete Register

64 k words 64 k

57,766 4XX registers max

Only if:

0XXX = 16

1XXX = 16 and

3XXX = 16

57 k

Reference Capacity

Discrete

Local I/O (Main Backplane)

Maximum I/O Words

64 k - any mix

Maximum Number of I/O Racks

Remote I/O

64 In and 64 Out*

2 (Requires expander)

Maximum I/O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31

Extended

Register

96 k

Distributed I/O

Maximum Number of Networks per

System

3**

Maximum Words per Network (for every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out

Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out

Maximum Number of Option Module

Interfaces

Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus

Plus, Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules) using the option module interface technique

(see

p. 33 ).

Note : Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full functionality, including Quantum DIO support.

Watchdog Timer

Logic Solve Time

250 ms (S/W adjustable)

0.1 ms / k to 0.5 ms / k

Battery

Service Life

3 V Lithium

1200 mAh

Shelf Life

Battery Load Current at Power-off

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

146

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Specifications

Typical

Maximum

Communication

Modbus (RS-232)

Modbus Plus (RS-485)

General

Diagnostics

210

2 serial port (9-pin D-shell)

1 network port (9-pin D-shell)

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

TOD Clock

Operating Temperature

Power Up Runtime

RAM RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

User Logic Check User Logic Check

Processor

1.8 A

+/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C

0 ... 60° C

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of register

I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available.

The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured – one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of two 140NOM21x00 Option Modules.

147

CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Bat1 Low

Modbus

Modbus + Error A

Mem Prt

The following table shows the LED descriptions.

LEDS

Ready

Run

Bat Low

Modbus

Modbus +

Error A

Mem Prt

Color

Green

Red

Green

Red

Amber

Indication when On

The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics.

The CPU has been started and is solving logic.

The battery needs replacing or is not present.

Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2.

Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port.

Memory is write-protected (the memory protect switch is on).

148

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU43412.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Continuous

623

624

625

626

627

61F

620

621

622

617

618

619

61E

609

614

615

616

605

606

607

608

72C

72F

730

604

82E

769

72A

72B

Code

0000

80B

80C

Error requested kernel mode ram error during sizing run output active failed

MB command handler stack error bus grant received not master asic on cpu master config write bad quantum bus DPM write failure plc asic loopback test plc asic BAD_DATA

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

149

CPU Modules

Front Panel

Switches

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code

628

631

503

52D

402

300

301

8001

8002

8003

Error bad modbus state rcv-int bad interrupt ram address test error

P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR ram data test error

EXEC not loaded

EXEC Checksum

Kernal prom checksum error flash prog / erase error unexpected executive return

The following figure shows the three options that are available for the 140CPU43412 module.

ASCII mem prt off not used

RTU mem

150

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

ASCII Comm Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Comm Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Comm Port Parameters

Baud

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

2,000

1,800

Enable/Disable

Odd/Even

7 / 8

1 / 2

1 ... 247

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

151

CPU Modules

Rear Panel

Switches

Two rotary switches (see the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.

1RWH The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

The following figure shows SW1 and SW2.

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

152

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Key Switch

CPU Modules

The key switch is used to protect memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation. The following figure shows the key switch.

Stop

Mem

Prt

Start

Stop

Mem

Prt

Start

1RWH The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.

The following table shows the key switch information.

Key Switch Description

Key switch

Position

Stop

Controller Status

Controller is stopped and disables

Programmer changes.

Memory

Protected

From

Programmer

Changes

Will Accept

Programmer

Stop or Start

Key switch

Transition

Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and

Programmer changes are disabled. User cannot write to unlocated variables.

Y N

From Start or

Memory Protect:

Stops controller, if running, and disables

Programmer changes

From Stop or

Start: Prevents

Programmer changes, controller run status is not changed

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

153

CPU Modules

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

Key Switch Description

Key switch

Position

Start

Controller Status

Controller may be either stopped or running. Programmer may make changes and start/stop the controller

Memory

Protected

From

Programmer

Changes

Will Accept

Programmer

Stop or Start

Key switch

Transition

Y From Stop:

Enables

Programmer changes, starts controller.

From Memory

Protect: Enables programmer changes, starts controller if stopped.

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that support

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

1RWH Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or

990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a

Quantum CPU or NOM module.

Modbus Port

Modem Support

Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability. Modbus Port 2 RTS/CTS connections function properly for normal non-modem communications but do not support modems.

154

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections

CPU Modules

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD 1

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable computers.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

RTS

CTS

NC NC

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

NC: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

155

CPU Modules

140CPU43412A CPU Module

Overview

CPU Module

The following provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU43412A Controller Module.

This module is functionally identical to the non-"A" version, however, the following z z z should be considered: z If you are using the module in a Hot Standby topology, then you must use either two non-"A" models or two "A" models.

The "A" version requires a new flash executive.

The "A" version and non-"A" flash executives are not interchangeable.

Schneider Automation software (Concept, ProWORX, and Modsoft) supports the

"A" version. Any existing or new 140CPU43412 program configuration will load into a 140CPU43412A without any modifications.

The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.

LED Area

Battery

Key Switch

Modbus

Connector

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

140

CPU 434 12A

486 CONTROLLER

Slide

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Part #043513804

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door) Part #31002249

Date

Batt.

Installed

Dey

ASCII

RTU mem Switch

Modbus

Comm 1

Modbusm

Comm 2

Modbus

Plus

Network

Node

156

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

CPU Modules

The following table shows the specifications for the CPU43412A Controller module.

Specifications

User Logic/Reference

Capacity

984

Ladder

Logic

Discrete Register Extended

Register

IEC

Application

96 k 800 k 64 k words

64 k 57 k

57,766 4XX registers max

Only if:

0XXX = 16 and

1XXX = 16 and

3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity

Discrete 64 k - any mix

Local I/O

Maximum I/O Words 64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of I/O Racks 2 (Requires Expander)

Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop

Maximum Number of Remote

Drops

Distributed I/O

64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of Networks per System

Maximum Words per Network

(for every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

Maximum Words per Node

3**

500 In and 500 Out

30 In and 32 Out

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O configured, one word must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured--one word must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of two140NOM21X00 Option Modules.

Maximum Number of Network

Module Interfaces

Watchdog Timer

Logic Solve Time

250 ms (software adjustable)

0.1 ms / k to 0.5 ms / k

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

157

CPU Modules

Specifications

Battery

Type

Service Life

Shelf Life

3 V Lithium

1200 mAh

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

Battery Load Current at Power-off

Typical

Maximum

210

Communication

Modbus (RS-232)

Modbus Plus (RS-485)

Programming Software

Capability

2 serial port (9-pin D-shell)

1 network port (9-pin D-shell)

Modsoft, version 2.6 minimum

Concept, version 2.1 with B2.1 patch

Concept 2.2 with SR2

ProWORX NxT, version 2.0 minimum

ProWORX Plus, version 1.05 minimum

ProWORX 32, version 1.0 minimum

General

Diagnostics

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

TOD Clock

Operating Temperature

Power Up

RAM

RAM Address

Executive

Checksum

User Logic Check

Processor

Runtime

RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

User Logic Check

1.25 A

6.25 W

+/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C

0 ... 60° C

158

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Bat low

Modbus

Modbus + Error A

Mem Prt

The following table provides a description of the LED indicators for the

140CPU43412A module.

LEDS

Ready

Run

Bat Low

Modbus

Modbus +

Error A

Mem Prt

Color

Green

Red

Green

Red

Amber

Indication when On

The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics.

The CPU has been started and is solving logic.

The battery needs replacing or is not present.

Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2.

Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port.

Memory is write-protected (the memory protect switch is on).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

159

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU43412A.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Continuous

623

624

625

626

627

61F

620

621

622

617

618

619

61E

609

614

615

616

605

606

607

608

72C

72F

730

604

82E

769

72A

72B

Code

0000

80B

80C

Error requested kernel mode ram error during sizing run output active failed

MB command handler stack error bus grant received not master asic on cpu master config write bad quantum bus DPM write failure plc asic loopback test plc asic BAD_DATA

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

160

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code

628

631

503

52D

402

300

301

8001

8002

8003

Error bad modbus state rcv-int bad interrupt ram address test error

P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR ram data test error

EXEC not loaded

EXEC Checksum

Kernal prom checksum error flash prog / erase error unexpected executive return

1RWH Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility.

Front Panel Slide

Switch

The slide switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus

(RS232) ports. Three options are available:

Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port.

Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port.

Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software.

The figure shows the three options that are available on the front panel slide switch.

ASCII

RTU mem

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

161

CPU Modules

The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.

ASCII Comm Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

The following table shows the RTU comm port parameters. The comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Comm Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.

Valid Comm Port Parameters

Baud 19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

2,000

1,800

Enable/Disable

Odd/Even

7 / 8

1 / 2

1 ... 247

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

162

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Key Switch

CPU Modules

The key switch protects memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation. The following figure shows the key switch.

Mem

Prt

Stop Start

Mem

Prt

Stop Start

1RWH The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.

The CPU43412A has 1435KByte of Flash EPROM memory, which can be used to save the program and the initial values of variables. On power up, if you have a program in flash memory, you can choose the desired operating mode using the

PLC MEM switch on the processor front panel. The 140CPU43412A has a key switch with Run, Mem Prt, and Stop positions.

Stop position

Mem Prt position

Start position

The application in Flash is not transferred to internal RAM: warm restart of the application.

The application in Flash is automatically transferred to internal

RAM when the PLC processor is powered up: cold restart of the application.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

163

CPU Modules

Rear Panel

Address Switch

The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings for the Address Switch located on the rear panel.

SW1 (TENS)

SW2 (ONES)

SW1 sets the upper digit (tens) of the address. SW2 sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

164

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Key Switch

Description

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

CPU Modules

The following table shows the key switch information.

Key Switch Description

Key switch

Position

Controller Status Memory

Protected

From

Programmer

Changes

Stop Controller is stopped and disables

Programmer changes.

Mem Prt

Start

Controller may be either stopped or running and

Programmer changes are disabled. User cannot write to unlocated variables.

Controller may be either stopped or running.

Programmer may make changes and start/stop the controller.

Will Accept

Programmer

Stop or Start

Key switch

Transition

From Start or Memory

Protect: Stops controller, if running, and disables

Programmer changes

From Stop or Start:

Prevents

Programmer changes, controller run status is not changed

From Stop: Enables

Programmer changes, starts controller.

From Memory

Protect: Enables programmer changes, starts controller if stopped.

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232 connector that support

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

1RWH

Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or

990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a

Quantum CPU or NOM module.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

165

CPU Modules

Modbus Port

Modem Support

Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability. Modbus Port 2 RTS/CTS connections function properly for normal non-modem communications but do not support modems.

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections

Figure

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DTR

GRND

RTS

CTS

DSR

DTR

GRND

DSR DSR

RTS

CTS

DSR

RTS

CTS

GRND

DTR

RTS

CTS

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for portable (laptop) computers.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC NC

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

NC: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

166

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

140CPU53414 CPU Module

Overview

CPU Module

The following provides information on the 140CPU53414 Controller module –

CPU 4M, 1xModbus Plus, Max IEC Program – 2.5 M.

The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.

LED Area

Battery

Key Switch

Modbus

Connector

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

&38

586 CONTROLLER

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Part #043513804

Slide

Switch

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door) Part #31000226

Date

Installed

Batt.

Spare mem prt off not used

ASCII

RTU mem

Modbus

Plus

Network

Node

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

167

CPU Modules

Specifications

168

The following table shows the specification for the 140CPU53414 CONTROLLER module.

Specifications

User Logic/Reference Capacity 984 Ladder

Logic

64 k words

Discrete

64 k

57,766 4XX registers max

Only if:

0XXX = 16 and

1XXX = 16 and

3XXX = 16

Register

57 k

Extended

Register

96 k

Reference Capacity

Discrete

Local I/O (Main Backplane)

Maximum I/O Words

64 k - any mix

Maximum Number of I/O Racks

Remote I/O

64 In and 64 Out*

2 (Requires Expander)

Maximum I/O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31

Distributed I/O

Maximum Number of Networks per

System

3**

Maximum Words per Network. (For every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out

Maximum Words per Node

Maximum Number of Option

Module Interfaces

30 In and 32 Out

Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus Plus,

Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules) using the option module interface technique.

Note: Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full functionality, including Quantum DIO support.

Watchdog Timer

Logic Solve Time

Battery

Service Life

250 ms (S/W adjustable)

0.1 ms/k to 0.5 ms/k

3 V Lithium

1200 mAh

Shelf Life

Battery Load Current @ Power-off

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

Typical 14

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Specifications

Maximum

Communication

Modbus (RS-232)

Modbus Plus (RS-485)

General

Diagnostics

420

2 serial port (9-pin D-shell)

1 network port (9-pin D-shell)

Bus Current Required

Power dissipation

TOD Clock

Operating Temperature

Power Up Runtime

RAM RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

User Logic Check User Logic Check

Processor

1.8 A

9 W

+/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C

0 ... 45° C

*This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I/Os. For each word of

Register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured – one word of Register I/O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of two 140NOM21x00 Option Modules.

169

CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Bat Low

Modbus

Modbus + Error A

Mem Prt

The following table shows the LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDS Color

Ready

Run

Green

Bat Low

Modbus

Modbus +

Error A

Mem Prt

Red

Green

Red

Amber

Indication when On

The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics.

The CPU has been started and is solving logic.

The battery needs replacing or is not present.

Communications are active on Modbus port 1 or 2.

Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port.

Memory is write-protected (the memory protect switch is on).

170

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414 module.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Continuous

623

624

625

626

627

61F

620

621

622

617

618

619

61E

609

614

615

616

605

606

607

608

72C

72F

730

604

82E

769

72A

72B

Code

0000

80B

80C

Error requested kernel mode ram error during sizing run output active failed

MB command handler stack error bus grant received not master asic on cpu master config write bad quantum bus DPM write failure plc asic loopback test plc asic BAD_DATA

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

171

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code

628

631

503

52D

402

300

301

8001

8002

8003

Error bad modbus state rcv-int bad interrupt ram address test error

P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR ram data test error

EXEC not loaded

EXEC Checksum

Kernal prom checksum error flash prog / erase error unexpected executive return

Front Panel Slide

Switch

The slide switch, located on the front panel of the CPU, is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) ports. Three positions are available:

Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port.

Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port.

Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software.

The slide switch:

ASCII

RTU mem

172

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.

ASCII Communication Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Communication Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Communication Port Parameters

Baud 19,200

9,600

7,200

Parity

4,800

3,600

2,400

2,000

1,800

Enable/Disable

Odd/Even

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

7 / 8

1 / 2

1 ... 247

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

173

CPU Modules

Key Switch

Description

The key switch, located on the front of the CPU, is used to protect memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation. The following figure shows the key switch.

Stop

Mem

Prt

Start

Mem

Prt

Start

1RWH The key switch positions shown on the switch (above, left) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.

The following table provides descriptions of the key switch information.

Key Switch Description

Key

Switch

Position

Stop

Controller Status

Controller is stopped and disables

Programmer changes.

Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and

Programmer changes are disabled. The user cannot write to unlocated variables.

Memory

Protected

From

Programmer

Changes

Will Accept

Programmer

Stop or Start

Key Switch Transition

Y N

From Start or Memory

Protect: Stops controller, if running, and disables

Programmer changes

From Stop or Start:

Prevents Programmer changes, controller run status is not changed

Start Controller may be either stopped or running.

Programmer may make changes and start/stop the controller

N Y From Stop: Enables

Programmer changes, starts controller.

From Memory Protect:

Enables programmer changes, starts controller if stopped.

174

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Rear Panel

Switches

CPU Modules

Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses.

1RWH The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

The following figure shows SW1 and SW2.

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

Node Address

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW1

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH

If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

Modbus Port

Modem Support

Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability. Modbus Port 2 RTS/CTS connections function properly for normal non-modem communications but do not support modems.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

175

CPU Modules

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a 9-pin RS-232C connector that supports

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.

1RWH Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or

990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a

Quantum CPU or NOM module.

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

DTR 4

GRND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS

Quantum

9-Pin Male

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD

RTS

CTS

DSR

GRND

DTR

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

176

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable

(laptop) computers.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

NC: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

177

CPU Modules

140CPU53414A CPU Module

Overview

CPU Module

This unit provides information on the specifications, LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU53414A Controller Module.

The "A" version requires a new flash executive.

The "A" version and non-"A" flash executives are not interchangeable.

Schneider Automation software (Concept, ProWORX, and Modsoft) supports the

"A" version. Any existing or new 140CPU53414 program configuration will load into a 140CPU53414A without any modifications.

The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components.

LED

Area

Battery

Key Switch

Modbus

Connector

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

140

CPU 534 14A

586 CONTROLLER

Slide

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Part #043513804

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door) Part #31002249

Date

Batt.

Installed

Switch

Modbus

Comm 1

Modbus

Comm 2

Modbus

Plus

ASCII

RTU mem

Network

Node

178

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

CPU Modules

The following table shows the specifications for the CPU53414A Controller module.

Specifications

User Logic/Reference Capacity 984

Ladder

Logic

Discrete Register Extended

Register

IEC

Application

Memory

96 k 2.7M

64 k words

64 k 57 k

57,766 4XX registers max

Only if:

0XXX = 16 and

1XXX = 16 and

3XXX = 16

Reference Capacity

Discrete 64 k - any mix

Local I/O )

Maximum I/O Words 64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of I/O Racks 2 (Requires Expander)

Remote I/O

Maximum I/O Words per Drop

Maximum Number of Remote

Drops

Distributed I/O

64 In and 64 Out*

Maximum Number of Networks per System

3**

Maximum Words per Network (for every DIO drop, there is a minimum of words input of overhead.)

500 In and 500 Out

Maximum Words per Node

Maximun Number of Network

Option Module Interfaces

30 In and 32 Out

*This information can be a mix if Discrete or Register I/O. For each word of register I/O configured, one word of I/O words must be subtracted from the total available. The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I/O configured---one word Register I/

O must be subtracted from the total available.

**Requires the use of two 140NOM21X00 Option Modules.

Supports up to six network modules (i.e., Modbus Plus,

Ethernet and Multi-Axis Motion option modules) using the option module interface technique (see

p. 33

Note : Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full functionality, Including Quantum DIO support.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

179

CPU Modules

Specifications

Watchdog timer

Logic Solve Time

250 ms (software adjustable)

0.1 ms/k to 0.5 ms/k

Battery

Type

Service Life

Shelf Life

3 V Lithium

1200 mAh

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

Battery Load Current at Power-off

Typical

Maximum

420

Communication

Modbus (RS-232)

Modbus Plus (RS-485)

Programming Software

Capability

2 serial port (9-pin D-shell)

1 network port (9-pin D-shell)

Modsoft, version 2.6

Concept, version 2.1 with B2.1 patch exec

Concept 2.2 with SR2

ProWorx NxT, version 2.0

ProWorx Plus, version 1.05

General

Diagnostics

Bus Current Required

Power dissipation

TOD Clock

Operating Temperature

Power Up

RAM

RAM Address

Executive

Checksum

User Logic Check

Processor

Runtime

RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

User Logic Check

1.25 A

6.25 W

+/- 8.0 seconds/day 0 ... 60° C

0 ... 50° C

180

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Bat Low

Modbus

Modbus + Error A

Mem Prt

The following table provides a description of the LED indicators for the

140CPU53414A module.

LED Descriptions

LEDS Color

Ready

Run

Green

Bat Low

Modbus

Modbus +

Error A

Mem Prt

Red

Green

Red

Amber

Indication when On

The CPU has passed power-up diagnostics.

The CPU has been started and is solving logic.

The battery needs replacing or is not present.

Communications are active on Modbus port 1 or 2.

Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port.

Memory is write-protected (the memory protect switch is on).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

181

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414A.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Continuous

623

624

625

626

627

61F

620

621

622

617

618

619

61E

609

614

615

616

605

606

607

608

72C

72F

730

604

82E

769

72A

72B

Code

0000

80B

80C

Error requested kernel mode ram error during sizing run output active failed

MB command handler stack error bus grant received not master asic on cpu master config write bad quantum bus DPM write failure plc asic loopback test plc asic BAD_DATA

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

182

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code

628

631

503

52D

402

300

301

8001

8002

8003

Error bad modbus state rcv-int bad interrupt ram address test error

P.O.S.T BAD MPU ERROR ram data test error

EXEC not loaded

EXEC Checksum

Kernal prom checksum error flash prog / erase error unexpected executive return

1RWH Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility.

Front Panel Slide

Switch

The slide switch, located on the front of the CPU, is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS232) ports. Three options are available.

Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port.

Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port.

Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software.

Slide switch::

ASCII

RTU mem

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

183

CPU Modules

The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters.

ASCII Comm Port Parameters

Baud 2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

The following table shows the RTU comm port parameters. The comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Comm Port Parameters

Baud 9,600

Parity

Data Bits

Even

Stop Bits

Device Address

Rear panel rotary switch setting

The following table shows the valid comm port parameters.

Valid Comm Port Parameters

Baud 19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

2,000

1,800

Enable/Disable

Odd/Even

7 / 8

1 / 2

1 ... 247

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

184

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU Modules

Key Switch The following figure shows the key switch.

Mem

Prt

Mem

Prt

Stop Start

1RWH The key switch positions shown next to the switch (above, left) are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right.

The CPU53414A has 1435KByte of Flash EPROM memory, which can be used to save the program and the initial values of variables. On power up, if you have a program in flash memory, you can choose the desired operating mode using the

PLC MEM switch on the processor front panel. The 140CPU53414A has a key switch with Run, Mem Prt, and Stop positions.

Stop position The application in Flash is not transferred to internal RAM: warm restart of the application.

Mem Prt position The application in Flash is not transferred to internal RAM: warm restart of the application.

Start position The application in Flash is automatically transferred to internal RAM when the PLC processor is powered up: cold restart of the application.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

185

CPU Modules

Key Switch

Description

The following table provides a description of the key switch information.

Key Switch Description

Key

Switch

Position

Stop

Controller Status

Controller is stopped and disables

Programmer changes.

Memory

Protected

From

Programmer

Changes

Will Accept

Programmer

Stop or Start

Key Switch Transition

From Start or Memory

Protect: Stops controller, if running, and disables

Programmer changes

From Stop or Start:

Prevents Programmer changes, controller run status is not changed

Mem Prt Controller may be either stopped or running and

Programmer changes are disabled. The user cannot write to unlocated variables.

Start Controller may be either stopped or running. Programmer may make changes and start/stop the controller

N Y From Stop: Enables

Programmer changes, starts controller.

From Memory Protect:

Enables programmer changes, starts controller if stopped.

186

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Rear Panel

Switches

CPU Modules

The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings.

SW1 (TOP)

SW2 (BOTTOM)

SW1 sets the upper digit (tens) of the address. SW2 sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232 connector that support

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin and 25-pin connections.

1RWH Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables, it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable (Part # 990NAA26320 or

990NAA26350) be used. This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a

Quantum CPU or NOM module.

Modbus Port

Modem Support

Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability. Modbus Port 2 RTS/CTS connections function properly for normal non-modem communications but do not support modems.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

187

CPU Modules

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD 1

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIEL

DTR

GRND

DTR

GRND

RTS

CTS

DTR

GRND

DSR 6 6 DSR DSR 6

6 DSR

RTS

CTS

RTS

CTS

GRND 7

DTR

RTS

CTS

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin portable computers.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

NC NC

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

NC: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

188

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Field Bus Modules

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Chapter?

This chapter contains information on various Quantum Field Bus Modules.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module

140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module

140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules

140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

189

Quantum Field Bus Modules

140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module

Overview The following information describes the 140CRP81100 Field Bus Communication

Module, which provides interface to Profibus-DP networks for the Quantum

Automation Series systems.

Related

Documentation

For a detailed discussion of the planning, installation and use of a Quantum Profibus system, refer to the Modicon TSX Quantum Profibus-DP Under Modsoft User

Manual (840 USE 468 00), Profibus-DP Under Concept Manual (840 USE 487 00), and the Profibus-DP Configutator for CRP 811 (840 USE 469 00).

Communicatons

Module

View of the 140CRP81100 communications module and the Profibus tap:

Module Model

Number

LED Status Display

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Part #043513804

RS-232C port

PCMCIA Card

(467NHP911)

PROFIBUS RS-485 Port

Profibus Tap (490NAE911)

190

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Status

Quantum Field Bus Modules

The following figure shows the LED Status display.

Active

Ready Fault

Backplane

PROFIBUS

DP S/R

Load

The following table provides descriptions of the Status LEDs.

LEDs

Active

Ready

Fault

Backplane

PROFIBUS

DP S/R

Load

Color

Green

Red

Green

Function

Flashing

Description

Indicates bus communication is present

The flash ram load operation is active

Module is operational

Indicates fault. Refer to LED fault codes in manual 840USE46800.

Erroneous configuration data or

PROFIBUS fault

Green Fast flashing frequency Sending/receiving DP bus data

Medium flashing frequency Slaves are configuring

Slow flashing frequency

Flashing with fault code

Yellow Flashing

Waiting for configuration data

Erroneous configuration data

Flashing with fault code

Configuration data load operation active

Load operation fault

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

191

Quantum Field Bus Modules

&$87,21

5HVHWWLQJ)DXOW/('

To reset the fault LED the CRP811 must be power cycled or hot swapped.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

:$51,1*

+RW6ZDSSLQJ5HVWULFWLRQ

Modules may be hot swapped when the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not hot swap modules in a Class 1, Division 2 environment.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\RU

HTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

PROFIBUS RS-

485 Port d-Sub pinouts

Below are the pinouts for the PROFIBUS RS-485 port.

Pin

Legend to pinouts for the RS-485 port:

Signal

Shield

RxD/TxD-P

DGND

RxD/TxD-N

Function

Shield, Protective Ground

Receive/Transmit-Data-P (+)

5 V common

+5 V

Receive/transmit-data-N(-)

192

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

RS-232C Port Below are pinouts for the RS-232C port

Legend to pinouts for the RS-232C port:

Pin

Signal

RXD

TXD

GND

RTS

CTS

Function

Received Data

Transmitted Data

Signal Ground

Request to Send

Clear to Send

Quantum Field Bus Modules

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

193

Quantum Field Bus Modules

Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the 140CRP81100

Communication Module:

Specifications

Programming software

Bus current required

Power dissipation

Data Interface

RS-232C

Modsoft version 2.32 or greater

Concept version 2.2 or greater

1.2 A

6.5 W

9 pin D-shell non-isolated, Shielded cable, 3 m max; 19.2 Kbps default.

Profibus, up to 12 Mbps

Local backplane only

RS-485

Installation

Bus Specifications

Bus nodes

Bus lenths, transmission rates (for 12 Mbps cable)

Transmission media

Connection interface

Node type

Bus access procedure

Transmission procedure

Frame length

Data unit length

Data security

Node addresses max. 32 max. 1.2 km at 9.6 Kbps max 1.2 km at 19.2 Kbps max. 1.2 km at 93.75 Kbps max 1.0 km at 187.5 Kbps max 0.5 km at 500 Kbps max 0.2 km at 1.5 Mbps max 0.1 km at 3 Mbps max 0.1 km at 6 Mbps max 0.1 km at 12 Mbps shielded twisted pair

EIA RS-485

Master class 1

Master/slave to dP bus slaves half-duplex

Max. 255 bytes

Max. 246 bytes

Hamming distance, HD = 4

1 ... 126

194

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Field Bus Modules

140EIA92100 Quantum AS-i Master Module

Overview

Related

Documentation

The 140EIA92100 field bus communications module provides communications interface to AS-i networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems.

For more detailed information see Modicon Quantum AS-i Master Module manual, part number 840USE11700, or start the newmod.hlp from your Concept CD. To locate it, go to the root of your Concept Installation directory. Example of path:

Drive_X:\Concept\*.hlp

1RWH The newmod help system on your Concept CD contains a hyperlink labeled

"Back to Main Content." This link will not return you to Concept 2.5 Help.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

195

Quantum Field Bus Modules

Communications

Module

The following diagram provides a view of the 140EIA92100 communications module.

1 LED Display

2 AS-i (Red): ON shows the module is not powered. Flashing shows automatic addressing enabled.

3 SLV/BUS (Green): ON when LEDs 0-31 are in bus display mode.

4 I/O Status (Green): ON when LEDs 0-31 are in slave display mode.

5 Mode (Push Button): Press and hold this button to change from slave mode to bus mode.

6 Address (Push Button): Press this button to scroll through the 32 slaves. Hold to reverse direction of the scroll.

7 AS-i Channel Cable Connector: Connects module to AS-i cable and AS-i power supply.

196

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Field Bus Modules

LED Display and

Descriptions

Diagram of the LED display:

Active

The following table provides LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LED Color

Active

Green

Red

0-31

Green

Description

Bus communication is present.

Fault on the AS-i bus.

Steady: module fault

Flashing: bad bus configuration or slave address

Communication exists between master and slaves.

Slave indicators.

LED Bus Mode z z

Each indicator lamp 1-31 corresponds to a slave address on the bus.

On: Slave is present.

Flashing: Slave is mapped but not detected, or detected but not mapped. It may also be projected and detected, but not activated (bad profile or I/O code).

z Off: Slave is neither mapped nor detected.

Example:

Off

Flashing

SLV/BUS

I/O STATUS

Select with mode pushbutton

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

197

198

Quantum Field Bus Modules

LED Slave I/O

Mode

Slave mode (SLV) figure:

Display of the address of the selected slave:

On: number of the selected slave

A short press on the address button will change the selected slave.

Slave 3 selected

0 8 7 24

1 9 0 25

2 10 18 26

11 19 27

4 12 20 28

5 13 21 29

6 14 22 30

7 15 23 31

SLV/BUS

I/O STATUS

Long press on the address push button

Display of the state of the I/O bits of the selected slave:

0-3: displays the state of the input bits

4-7: displays the state of the output bits

On: bit = 1

Off: bit = 0 or not significant

Input bits

{

Output bits

{

8 16 24

9 17 25

10 18 26

11 19 27

12 20 28

13 21 29

14 22 30

15 23 31

SLV/BUS

I/O STATUS

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Field Bus Modules

LED Diagnostics State of Indicator Lamps:

B Active F

X X

(1)

(2)

Meaning

Module switched off.

Corrective Action

Switch the device on.

Operating in Protected

Mode (normal). Displaying

Outputs.

Operating in Protected

Mode (normal). Displaying

Inputs.

Fault on AS-i bus (selfprogramming possible).

⎯

Replace the faulty slave with a new identical slave.

Fault on AS-i bus (selfprogramming not possible).

Connect the terminal.

AS-i power supply fault or no slave on the AS-i bus.

Module self-tests in progress.

1. Check AS-i power supply.

2. Check the continuity of the

AS-i bus cable.

⎯

Indicator lamp is on.

Indicator lamp is off.

(1) Faulty slave ID is flashing.

(2) No slave ID numbers are flashing.

Indicator lamp is flashing.

Indicator lamp is in indeterminate state.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

199

Quantum Field Bus Modules

AS-i Cable

Connection

The following figure shows the AS-i cable connection:

Brown wire

AS-i cable

Connector

AS-i

−

(Blue)

AS-i+

(Brown)

Blue wire

Specifications The following table provides specifications for the 140EIA92100 AS-i module:

Specifications

Master profile

Bus length

I/O

# slaves

Power supply

Scan time

Transmission

Polarity reversal

Bus current required

Power dissipation

Installation

Programming software

100m max, no repeaters

124IN/124OUT

31 max

30Vdc @ 120mA max

156 msec x (n+2) if n < 31

156 msec x (n+1) if n = 31

167 kbits/sec

Non-destructive

250mA max

2.5W max

Local, RIO, DIO

Concept v2.5

ProWORX Nxt v2.1

Modsoft v2.61

200

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Field Bus Modules

140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules

Overview This section includes information for the NOA6XXXX InterBus communications modules which provide interface to InterBus networks for the Quantum Automation

Series systems.

Related

Documentation

For more detailed information on the installation and use of Quantum InterBus modules, see the Modicon TSX Quantum 140NOA61110 User Manual

(840 USE 419 00; the Modicon TSX Quantum 140NOA61100 User Manual

(840 USE 418 00); and the TSX Quantum 140NOA62200 User Manual

(840 USE 497 00).

InterBus

Communications

Module

The following figure shows the NOA6XXXX InterBus Communications module.

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

LED Display

12$;;;;;

CONTROLLER

Removable Door Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Seven Segment

Display

Reset Push Button

RS-232C Port

InterBus Port

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

201

Quantum Field Bus Modules

Specifications The following table shows the InterBus specifications.

Specifications

Data Interface

InterBus RS-485, isolated (500 V test voltage)

RS-232C maximum cable length As per DIN 66 020, non-isolated 20 m shielded

Data Transfer Frequency

Connection Styles

500 kbaud

Interbus

RS-232C (Use cable part number 990NAA26320 or

990NAA26350)

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

Installation

700 mA

Max. 3.7 W, typically 2.5 W

Local backplane only

202

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Field Bus Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions for NOA611X0

The following figure shows the NOA611X0 LED indicators.

IB-S Run

Active F

Master

RBUS

LBUS

Slave

DEA202

Memory

Start Up

BS Off

The following table shows the NOA611X0 LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

R Green

Active

IB-S Run

BS Off

Master

RBUS

LBUS

Slave

DEA202

Memory

Start Up

Red

Green

Red

Green

Yellow

Red

Function

Ready. The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for service.

Bus communication is active.

Fault. A fault occurred on the module.

The InterBus is functioning normally and carrying data.

One or more bus segments are shut down.

Processor fault. Fault on the InterBus processor or the communications processor has failed.

Remote bus fault. The remote bus has been diagnosed as defective.

Peripheral bus fault. The peripheral bus has been diagnosed as defective.

An InterBus node has reported a (module) fault.

Initialization fault with the DEA 202.

Memory fault.

The InterBus master is not operational.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

203

Quantum Field Bus Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions for NOA62200

The following figure shows the NOA62200 LED indicators.

140

NOA 622 00

INTERBUS Master

R Active

IBS-RUN

Slave

The following table shows the NOA62200 LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs

Color

Green

Status

Meaning

Ready. The switch-on routine was completed successfully. The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for operations. RAM and checksum are ok.

Flashing

Off

Green On

No firmware; or firmware is being loaded.

Module error.

Active The communication with the TSX Quantum CPU is active.

Fault. An error has occurred on the INTERBUS.

IB-S Run

Slave

Red

Green

Red

On The INTERBUS is functioning, normal data transfer.

Flashing cyclically.

The INTERBUS is ready.

No cyclic flashing.

No INTERBUS configuration (error message).

On An INTERBUS node is indicating a module error.

204

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Field Bus Modules

Seven Segment

Display

The seven segment display is only applicable to the NOA61110 module.

Display

– | | –

– –

RBUS LED on

LBUS LED on

RBUS & LBUS

LEDs on

Slave LED on

Meaning

Interbus is not able to run.

Interbus is able to run but stopped.

Interbus is running.

Number of the defective remote bus segments.

Number of the defective peripheral bus.

Bus segment fault, interbus comm stopped. Faulted bus segment number (or next segment) displayed.

Bus segment number containing a faulted module.

Front Panel

Connections and

Controls

The InterBus module is equipped with an InterBus port and a Modbus Plus port, both are female 9-pin D connectors (see below for pinouts), and a reset push button.

InterBus Port Connect the remote bus cable to the female connector port labeled interbus. The following figure shows the InterBus port connection.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

The following table shows the key to the remote bus.

Pin

Signal

GND

GND (NOA622 only)

VCC (NOA622 only)

Function

Data Out (+)

Data In (+)

Comm

F/O Interface

Data Out (-)

Data In (-)

VCC (NOA622 only)

RBST (NOA622 only)

Auxiliary Supply for F/O Interface

RBST Coupling

Black circle = Pin occupied. White circle = N/C

205

Quantum Field Bus Modules

RS-232C Port Use a Modbus data cable, Part Number 990NAA26320 (2.7 m) or Part Number

990NAA26350 (15.5 m). The following figure shows the RS-232C port connection.

Reset Push

Button

Required

Loadables

The following table shows the key to the RS-232C port.

Pin

Signal

D2 (RXD)

D1 (TXD)

E2 (GND)

S2 (RTS)

8 M2 (CTS)

Black circle = Pin occupied. White circle = N/C

Function

Received Data

Transmitted Data

Signal Ground

Request to Send

Clear to Send

The reset push button performs a hardware reset of the module which must be done each time new firmware has been downloaded. This button allows you to reset the module without removing it from the backplane.

Loadables are accessible from Groupe Schneider’s World Wide Web site at http:// www.schneiderautomation.com. Click on the appropriate software under the

"Control Software" section on the home page.

1RWH 140CPU11302 does not support the 140NOA61110 or the 140NOA62200 module.

206

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Field Bus Modules

Comparison of

NOA61100,

61110, and 62200

Modules

The following table provides a comparison of the NOA61100, 61110, and 62200 modules.

Characteristics

Physical Addressing

Logical Addressing

PCP Channel

NOA61100

NOA61110

NOA62200

Y Startup Check of

Configuration

Support of Remote Bus

Branch

Possible via user- program triggering one of the active bits 10 ... 15

Support for Hot Standby N

Number of NOAs in

Local Drop

Interbus Compatibility

Maximum Slaves

Configuration Tool

Generation 3

512

Phoenix Contact CMD

V1.21 or V1.30

2 (140CPU11303)

6 (140CPUX341XA)

Generation 3

512

Generation 4

251

Phoenix Contact

CMD V1.21 or

V1.30

Sycon

TLX L FBC 10M

V2.725

Software Versions

Modsoft Rev. (min.)

Concept Rev. (min.)

ProWORX (min.)

2.4

2.0

2.4

2.1

2.0

N/A

2.5 SR2

N/A

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

207

Quantum Field Bus Modules

140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules

Overview The NOL modules provide connectivity between a Modicon Quantum controller and a control network based on Echelon’s LonWorks technology. Once the NOL module has been installed in a Quantum backplane and configured, it can be bound to an existing LonWorks network, and installed as a standard node.

1RWH The NOL module requires a valid LonWorks configuration file (.XIF) loaded into it to define the LonWorks network variables to which it will be bound.

1RWH You must have a LonWorks compliant network management tool, such as

Metra Vision, to install an NOL module on a LonWorks network.

Related

Documentation

For more detailed information, see the Quantum Automation Series Network Option

Module for LonWorks (840 USE 109 00).

LonWorks

Network Option

Modules

The following figure shows the NOL911X0 LonWorks Network Option Module.

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

LED Display

12/

CONTROLLER

Removable Door

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Neuron ID

RS- 232 Serial

Port

Service Pin

Reset Button

Auxiliary LonWorks

Comm Port

Primary LonWorks

Comm Port

Domain

Subset 1

Subset 2

Node ID

Executive

Vers

208

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Quantum Field Bus Modules

The following table shows the specifications for the NOL911X0 module.

Specifications

Data Transfer Frequency 78 Kbps (140 NOL 911 10)

Connection Styles

Bus Current Required

Quantum Controllers

Remote I/O

Screw terminals, telephone jack

400 mA

V2.0 at a minimum

LED Indicators,

Descriptions, and Status

The condition of the NOL module is indicated by the status (off, on, or blinking) of the LED indicators. The following figure shows the LED indicators.

Ready

Active

MSG In

MSG Out

Wink

Srvc

The following table shows the LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Function

Active

Ready

MSG In

Bus communication is present.

Module has passed internal diagnostics, and is configured.

MSG Out

Flashes every 10 ms when an update message for a bound network variable is received by the NOL module from the LonWorks network.

Flashes every 10 ms when an update message for a bound network variable is transmitted by the NOL module to the LonWorks network.

Wink

Srvc

Flashes briefly when the NOL module receives a wink message from the

LonWorks network. Also used to display internal error codes defined in the

Wink LED Error Codes table.

Indicates status of LonWorks network service.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

209

Quantum Field Bus Modules

The following table shows the LED Indicator Status.

LED Indicator Status

LED Color Condition of NOL Module

Powered Up

Not Configured

Not Programmed

Powered Up

Configured

Not Programmed

Normal Operation

Configured

Programmed

Active Green Off Off On

Error

Condition

Ready

MSG In

MSG Out

Wink

Srvc

Green

Yellow

Blink

Off

Blink

Blink on command

Off

N/A

Blink

N/A z z z

If not lit, either the LON module requires configuration and mapping or is not communicating with the CPU by way of the DX Loadable.

If a LON module is inserted into the backplane and the Ready LED does not illuminate, the Wink LED should be observed for an error code.

See the following Wink LED error codes.

Wink LED Error

Codes

The Wink LED is used to display error conditions. The following table shows the number of times the LED blinks for each type of error.

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Error Condition

Module is in the bootloader

Error in writing to flash memory

Error in initializing the Lon Works network

Error in the module configuration

Front Panel Push

Buttons

Two push buttons are located on the front of the NOL module. The service pin push button initiates the LonWorks network installation. When depressed, it causes the

Service LED to illuminate, and forces the Neuron Chip in the module to output its unique 48-bit ID and Program ID.

The reset push button performs a hardware reset of the module, and must be done each time new firmware has been downloaded.

1RWH

The Reset push-button is recessed and requires a paper clip or similar tool to activate.

210

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Front Panel

Connectors

RS-232

Configuration

Port

Quantum Field Bus Modules

There are three connectors located on the front of the NOL module. These are the

RS-232 configuration port; the primary LonWorks communication port; and the auxiliary LonWorks configuration port.

z z z z

This 9 pin, D-shell, female, RS-232 compatible serial port’s attributes are:

Configured at a fixed rate of 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

Used to download configuration and new firmware to the module.

Supports XMODEM protocol with an ASCII terminal based command processor.

Can be directly connected to a PC serial communications port.

The following figure shows the 9-pin configuration port.

The following table shows the key to the RS-232C port.

Pin

Signal

RXD

TXD

GND

Black circle = Pin occupied. White circle = N/C

Function

Received Data

Transmitted Data

Signal Ground

Modbus cables 990NAA26320 and 990NAA26350 are suitable for connection between the PC serial port and NOL module RS-232 port.

Primary

LonWorks

Communication

Port

This is the primary interface for wiring into a LonWorks network. The connector is a two-position 5.08 mm screw terminal.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

211

Quantum Field Bus Modules

Auxiliary

LonWorks

Communication

Port

This is the auxiliary interface for wiring into a LonWorks network. The connector is an eight position RJ-45 (phone jack) socket. The figure below shows the Pin 1 connector.

Pin 1

NOL Module

Media Types

1RWH

The Auxiliary LonWorks Communications Port is not intended to be connected to any public telecommunications network.

Both the Primary and Secondary ports provide standard interfaces to LonWorks networks and are wired in parallel for flexibility. The connections are not polarity sensitive.

z z z

The NOL module supports three twisted pair media types with different network topologies or data transfer speeds.

140NOL91100

140NOL91110

140NOL91120

The following table shows the transceiver types supported by each module are as follows:

NOL Model Number Transceiver Type

140NOL91100*

140NOL91110

140NOL91120*

TP/FTT-10

TP/XF-78

TP/XF-1250

Configuration Data Transfer

Rate

Free topology, twisted pair 78,000 BPS

Linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated

78,000 BPS

Linear topology, twisted pair, transformer isolated

1.25 MBPS

*Not actively sold after 10/00.

:$51,1*

,QFRPSDWLELOLW\

NOL modules are not compatible in Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) racks.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\RU

HTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

212

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Distributed I/O (DIO) for the

Quantum Modules

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

z z z z

This chapter provides information on the distributed I/O (DIO) modules. This information includes specifications, LED indicators and descriptions, rear panel switches, and wiring diagrams for the following modules:

140CRA21110

140CRA21210

140CRA21120

140CRA21220

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules

140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules

Page

214

219

213

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

DIO

140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules

Overview

DIO Module

This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Modbus Plus

Distributed I/O AC powered single (CRA21110) and dual (CRA21210) channel modules.

The following figure shows the parts of the distributed I/O (DIO) module.

LED Area

Modbus

Plus

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Part #043505673

0RGEXV

3OXV

Network

Node Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

Not used

AC L

AC N

214

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

DIO

The following specifications are for the Modbus Plus CRA21110 and CRA21210 AC powered single and dual channel DIO modules.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Frequency

Input Voltage Total Harmonic

Distortion

Input Current

Inrush Current

VA Rating

Input Power Interruption

85 ... 276 Vac

47 ... 63 Hz

Less than 10% of the fundamental rms value

0.4 A @ 115 Vac. 0.2 A @ 230 Vac

10 A @ 115 Vac. 20 A @ 230 Vac

50 VA

1/2 cycle at full load and minimum rated line voltage / frequency. No less than 1 second between interruptions.

1.5 A (Part #043502515 or equivalent)

Standalone or not powered (see p. 691 ).

Fusing (external)

Operating Mode

Output to Bus

Voltage

Current

Minimum Load

Protection

Communication

Modbus Plus

General

Specifications

5.1 Vdc

3 A

0 A

Over Current, Over Voltage

1 port (single cable); 2 ports (dual cable)

Diagnostics

Field Wiring Connector

Internal Power Dissipation

I/O Type:

Modules/Drop:

Words:

Quantum

Depends on bus current loading and word count

30 In / 32 Out. (Two additional input words are reserved for drop status.)

Power Up Runtime

RAM Data/Address

Executive Checksum

7 point terminal strip (Part # 043506326)

2.0 V + 3.0 V x I

BUS

= Watts (where IBUS is in Amperes)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

215

DIO

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140CRA21110 and 21210 wiring diagram.

NOT USED

AC L

AC N

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

216

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

DIO

LED Indicators and Descriptons

The following figure shows the LED panel.

Ready Fault

Pwr ok

Modbus +

Error A

Error B

The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDS Color Indication when On

Ready

Fault

Green The module has passed power-up diagnostics.

Red A communications error exists between the DIO module and one or more

I/O modules, or an output module is not being written to, over the Modbus

Plus network.

Pwr ok Green Bus power is present.

Modbus + Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Error A

Error B

Red

Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel A (dual cable only).

Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel B (dual cable only).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

217

DIO

Rear Panel

Switches

Two rotary switches (refer to the following illustration and table) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the unit.

SW1 (Top)

SW2 (Bottom)

The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches.

SW1 and SW2 Switches

Node Address

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW1

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 32 is selected, the RIO module displays a flashing Error A and Error B LED to indicate an error condition. Only addresses 1-

32 are valid.

218

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

DIO

140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO) Modules

Overview

DIO Module

This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Modbus Plus

Distributed I/O DC powered single (CRA21120) and dual (21220) channel modules.

The following figure shows the parts of the Distributed I/O (DIO) module.

LED Area

Modbus

Plus

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Part #043504640

0RGEXV

3OXV

Network

Node Field Wiring

Connector

Field Wiring

Connector Cover

Not used

ACL

ACN

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

219

DIO

Specifications The following specifications are for the Modbus Plus CRA21120 and CRA21220 DC powered single and dual channel DIO modules.

Specifications

Input Requirements

Input Voltage

Input Current

Inrush Current

Input Power Interruption

Fusing (external)

Operating Mode

Output to Bus

Voltage

Current

Minimum Load

Protection

Communication

Modbus Plus

General

Specifications

20 ... 30 Vdc

1.6 A

30 A

1.0 ms max

2.5 A (Part #043503948 or equivalent)

Standalone or not powered (see p. 691 ).

5.1 Vdc

3 A

0 A

Over Current, Over Voltage

1 port (single cable). 2 ports (dual cable)

Diagnostics

Field Wiring Connector

Internal Power Dissipation

I/O Type

Words

Quantum

Modules/Drop Depends on bus current loading and word count

30 In / 32 Out. (Two additional input words are reserved for drop status)

Power Up Runtime

RAM Data/Address

Executive Checksum

7 point terminal strip (Part #043503328)

2.0 V + 3.0 V x I

BUS

= Watts (where I

BUS

is in Amperes)

220

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Wiring Diagram

DIO

The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140CRA21110 and 21210 wiring diagram.

NOT USED

–24VDC (Common)

+24VDC

AC L

AC N

1RWH See S for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

221

DIO

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED panel.

Ready Fault

Pwr ok

Modbus +

Error A

Error B

The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDS Color Indication when On

Ready

Fault

Green The module has passed power-up diagnostics.

Red A communications error exists between the DIO module and one or more

I/O modules or an output module is not being written to over the Modbus

Plus network.

Pwr ok Green Bus power is present.

Modbus + Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port.

Error A

Error B

Red

Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel A (dual cable only).

Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel B (dual cable only).

222

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Rear Panel

Switches

DIO

Two rotary switches (refer to the illustration and table that follow) are located on the rear panel of the CPU. They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the unit.

SW1 (the top switch) sets the upper digit (tens) of the address; SW2 (the bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the address. The illustration shows the correct setting for an example address of 11.

SW1 (Top)

SW2 (Bottom)

The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches.

SW1 and SW2 Switches

Node Address

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW1

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 32 is selected, the RIO module displays a flashing Error A and Error B LED to indicate an error condition. Only addresses 1-

32 are valid.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

223

DIO

224

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Remote I/O

Communication Modules

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

Quantum networking modules provide open, standards-based networking and fieldbus connectivity using Modbus, Modbus Plus, Ethernet, InterBus, SY/MAX and

LonWorks networks. Specifications for these modules are included below.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

140CRP93X00 Remote I/O (RIO) Head Single and Dual Channel Module

140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module

Page

226

230

225

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Networking

140CRP93X00 Remote I/O (RIO) Head Single and Dual Channel Module

Overview The Remote I/O Head Single and Dual Channel modules are installed in the same backplane as the system controlling CPU modules. The RIO head is used to transfer data bi-directionally between the CPU and RIO drop modules installed in separate backplanes. A coaxial cable network is used to interconnect the RIO head module and one or more RIO drop modules.

RIO Head Module The following figure shows the Remote I/O (RIO) module’s parts. The specific module illustrated is the 140CRP93200.

LED Area

Version Label

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable Door

Part #043513804

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Part #043504680

Remote I/O

DROP N0.

RIO Coax

Connector

226

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Networking

The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Head Single and

Dual Channel modules.

Specifications

Drop Type

Drops

Words/Drop

ASCII

Quantum, 200 Series, 500 Series, 800 Series, or SY/MAX

(any mix)

31 max

64 In / 64 Out

Coax Termination

Coax Shield

Data Transfer Rate

Dynamic Range

2 ports/drop, 32 ports (16 drops) max

Requires the use of AS-P892-000, AS-J892-101/102, or

AS-J290-0X0 at the RIO drops.

Internal 75

Tied to chassis ground

1.544 mb

35 dB

500 Vdc coaxial cable center conductor to ground Isolation

External Connections

One Channel (CRP93100) One "F" type female connector with a right angle adapter

Two Channels (CRP93200) Two "F" type female connectors with a right angle adapter

General

Diagnostics Power Up

Dual Port Memory Check

LAN Controller Check

1 Maximum Number of CRPs

Supported by the Controller

Bus Current Required

(Typical)

Single Channel: 600 mA

Dual Channel: 750 mA

Power Dissipation (Typical) Single Channel: 3 W

Dual Channel: 3.8 W

Power Up and Runtime

Executive Checksum

RAM Address/Data

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

227

Networking

&$87,21

&RQQHFWLYLW\&RPSOLDQFH

To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC), the RIO head module must be connected using quad shielded cable (see the

Remote I/O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide, 890USE10000, V2.0).

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators for the RIO Head module.

Ready

Com Act

Error A

Error B

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the RIO Head module.

LED Descriptions

LEDS Color

Ready

Com Act

Error A

Green

Green

Red

Error B Red

Indication When On

The module has passed powerup diagnostics.

The module is communicating on the RIO network.

There is a loss of communication on Channel A with one or more of the drops.

There is a loss of communication on Channel B with one or more of the drops (dual cable only).

228

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Networking

LED Error Codes The Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Head module table show the number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Head module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

Slow (steady)

6729

6616

6617

6619

681A

681C

6847

6849

684A

684B

684C

6503

6402

6300

6301

8001

8002

8003

682A

682B

682C

6840

6841

6842

Code

0000

6820

6822

6823

6843

6844

6845

6846

Error

Requested Kernel Mode hcb frame pattern error head cntrl blk diag error mod personality diag error fatal start I/O error bad read I/O pers request bad execute diag request

ASCII input xfer state

ASCII output xfer state

I/O input comm. state

I/O output comm. state

ASCII abort comm. state

ASCII pause comm. state

ASCII input comm. state

ASCII output comm. state building 10 byte packet building 12 byte packet building 16 byte packet illegal I/O drop number

984 interface bus ack stuck high coax cable initialization error coax cable dma xfer error coax cable dumped data error coax cable DRQ line hung coax cable DRQ hung ram address test error ram data test error prom checksum error (Exec not loaded) prom checksum error

Kernal prom checksum error

Flash prog / erase error

Unexpected executive return

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

229

Networking

140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module

Overview The Remote I/O Drop Single and Dual Channel modules are used to transfer data bi-directionally over a coaxial cable network between I/O modules installed in the same (RIO drop) backplane and the RIO head installed in the CPU backplane.

RIO Drop Module The following figure shows the components of the Remote I/O (RIO) drop module.

The specific module shown is the CRA93200.

LED Area

Version Label

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Part #043504680

Removable Door (Part #043513804)

Remote I/O

DROP N0.

RIO Coax

Connector

230

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Networking

The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I/O Drop Single and

Dual Channel modules.

Specifications

I/O Type

Words/Drop

Coax Termination

Coax Shield

Data Transfer Rate

Dynamic Range

Isolation

External Connections

One Channel (CRA93100)

Two Channels (CRA93200)

Quantum

64 In / 64 Out

Internal 75

Capacitor to ground

1.544 mb

35 dB

500 Vdc coaxial cable center conductor to ground

One "F" type female connector with a right angle adapter

Two "F" type female connectors with a right angle adapter

General

Holdup Time

Diagnostics

Bus Current Required (Typical)

Power Dissipation (Typical)

Software configurable

Note: In the event of a communication loss with the remote processor, this is the time that output modules will retain their last operating state. Input module data will be held in the system controlling CPU. After this time, output modules will assume their predefined time-out states, and inputs will be zeroed by the CPU.

Power Up Power Up and Runtime

Dual Port Memory Check Executive Checksum

LAN Controller Check

Single Channel: 600 mA

RAM Address/Data

Dual Channel: 750 mA

Single Channel: 3 W

Dual Channel: 3.8 W

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

231

Networking

&$87,21

&RQQHFWLRQ&RPSOLDQFH

To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC (89/336/EEC), the RIO Head module must be connected using quad shielded cable (see the

Remote I/O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide, 890USE10100, V2.0).

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

LED Indicators and Description

The following figure shows the LED indicators for the Drop module.

Ready Fault

Com Act

Error A

Error B

The following table shows the RIO Drop module LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDS Color

Ready

Com Act

Green

Fault

Error A

Error B

Red

Indication when On

The module has passed power-up diagnostics.

The module is communicating on the RIO network.

Unable to communicate with one or more I/O modules.

Communication error on Channel A.

Communication error on Channel B (dual cable only).

232

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Networking

LED Error Codes Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Drop module table show the number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Drop module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks

6607H

6608H

6609H

660AH

660BH

660CH

660DH

6501H

6401H

6301H

Code

6701H

6601H

6602H

6603H

6604H

6605H

6606H

Description of Error asic test failure power down interrupt

82588 lan chip test error receive abort timeout transmission loop timeout transmission dma error cable a initialization error cable a dma xfer error cable b dma xfer error cable a dumped data error cable a DRQ line hung cable b DRQ line hung cable a or b DRQ hung power-up lan controller error ram address test error ram data test error prom checksum error

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

233

Networking

Rear Panel

Switches

Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the RIO Drop Modules and are used for setting RIO drop addresses (refer to the following illustration and table).

SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens); SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit

(ones). The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of

11.

SW1 (Tens)

SW2 (Ones)

The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW1

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

0 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 32 is selected, the module displays a flashing ERROR A and ERROR B LED indicating an error condition. Only addresses 2 - 32 are valid.

234

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Modbus Plus

Network Option Modules

140NOM21X00 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules

Overview

Modbus Plus

Module

The following information describes the single and dual channel twisted-pair cable

NOM21X00 modules, which provide interface to Modbus Plus networks.

The following figure shows the components of the Modbus Plus 140NOM21X00 modules.

LED Area

120;

CONTROLLER

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Part #043504417

Comm Parameter

Slide Switch

Modbus

Connector

Modbus Plus

Connector

Chan A

Modbus Plus

Connector

Chan B

Modbus

Comm 1

Modbus

Comm 2

Modbus

Plus

Network

Node

ASCII

RTU mem

235

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOMs

Specifications The Modbus Plus Head Single and Dual Channel modules provide extended communication capabilities for the Quantum system within a Modbus Plus configuration. The following table shows the specifications show the Modbus Plus single and dual channel modules.

Specifications

Communication Ports

NOM21100

NOM21200

Both Modules

Diagnostics

1 Modbus Plus network (RS-485) port (9-pin connector)

2 Modbus Plus network (RS-485) ports (9-pin connectors) for dual connectivity on a single Modbus Plus network. These ports handle identical versions of all inbound and outbound transactions and keep track of the data paths used for these transactions.

1 Modbus (RS-232) serial port (9-pin connector)

A bridge mode capability in the module permits a panel device connected to this port to access nodes on the Modbus Plus network or to access the local PLC directly without having to go out onto the network.

Power Up

RAM

Runtime

RAM

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

Processor

4 W

RAM Address

Executive Checksum

Power Dissipation

(Typical)

Bus Current Required

NOM21100

NOM21200

780 mA

236

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOMs

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Modbus

Modbus + Error A

Error B

The following table shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED Descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Ready

Run

Green

Modbus

Modbus+

Error A

Error B

Green

Red

Indication when On

The module has passed power-up diagnostics.

Indicates that the unit is in kernel mode–should always be OFF during normal operations.

Indicates communication is active on the single RS-232 serial port.

Indicates communication is active on the Modbus Plus port.

There is an error condition on Cable A of a dual cable Modbus Plus network (140NOM21200 only).

There is an error condition on Cable B of a dual cable Modbus Plus network (140NOM21200 only).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

237

Modbus Plus NOMs

LED Error Codes The blinking Run LED error codes for the NOM module shows the number of times the Run LED on the NOM module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code

Steady

014H

815

49H

4BH

4CH

4DH

4EH

52H

53H

56H

59H

5AH

5BH

616h

617h

618h

627H

628H

629H

62aH

62bH

62cH

62dH

619h

61AH

621H

622H

623H

624H

625H

626H

Error normal power down event ram sequence error illegal data command received by bypass code diagnostics test pattern invalid in the icb block diagnostics test pattern invalid in the page 0 icb address not the same as found in hcb bad code selected for mstrout_sel proc config table exec_id is different than the sys table exec_id got a pupinit hook for neither S985 nor S975 addr did not get bus ack form 984 interface within 400 ms unexpected modbus port state in send command to 680 proc system table missing bad DPM critical byte write bad or unexpected interrupt loopback error on modbus port 1 parity error set port greater than 21 controller ram size is less than 8k modbus cmd-buffer overflow modbus cmd-length is zero modbus abort command error bad modbus state trn-int bad modbus state rcv-int bad comm state trn_asc transmit underflow error bad comm state trn_tru bad comm state rcv_asc bad comm state rcv_rtu bad transmit comm state bad receive comm state bad modbus state tmr0_evt

238

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOMs

LED Error Codes

Number of Blinks Code

62eH

631H

632H

633H

634H

635H

636H

637H

638H

639H

63AH

681h

68ah

68bh

691h

692h

6AIh

6A2h

6A3h

6A4h

682h

683h

684h

685h

686h

687h

688h

689h

6A5h

513h

412h

311h

Error bad uart interrupt

UPI timeout error bad UPI response opcode

UPI bus diagnostic error mbp bus interference error bad mbp response opcode timeout waiting for mbp mbp out of synchronization mbp invalid path peer did not respond with complement of the opcode peer unable to come out of transitions at power-up bad master state bad slave state unknown routing failure to send bad port number in set () proc bad port number in reset () proc bad port number in getport () proc bad port number in bitpos () proc bad port number in enable_transmit_interrupt () proc bad port number in enable_receive_interrupt () proc bad port number in disable_transmit_interrupt () proc bad port number in privilege flag is not reset in the session timeout proc bad port number in chkmst_hdw () proc unknown controller type in reset busy flag unknown function code in generate_poll_cmd () proc unknown function code in generate_logout_msg () proc slave link timeout on port other than port #9 illegal bypass command received by bypass code ram address test error ram data test error prom checksum error

239

Modbus Plus NOMs

Rear Panel

Switches

Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules. They are used together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit.

1RWH The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

Rotary SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens), and rotary SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the Modbus Plus node address. The illustration below shows the setting for an example address of 11.

SW1 (Top)

SW2 (Bottom)

1RWH

If "0," or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

The following table shows the address settings for the SW1 and SW2 switches.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

1 ... 4

240

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Front Panel

Switches

Modbus Plus NOMs

Two, three-position slide switches are located on the front of the unit. The switch on the left is not used. The three-position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) port provided with the Modbus

Plus option module. Three options are available, as shown in the following illustration.

ASCII

Switch not used

RTU mem

1RWH

The NOM hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is set to RTU or ASCII mode. When networking controllers, a panel device connected to the NOM Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is conected, as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network.

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port. The following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

ASCII Comm Port Parameters

Baud

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

2,400

Even

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Comm Port Parameters

Baud

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

9,600

Even

Rear panel rotary switch setting

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

241

Modbus Plus NOMs

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software; the following parameters are valid.

Valid Comm Port Parameters

Baud

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

Device Address

19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

2,000

1,800

7 / 8

1 / 2

Enable/Disable Odd/Even

Rear panel rotary switch setting

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

Modbus

Connector

Pinouts

The NOM modules are equipped with a nine-pin RS-232C connector that supports

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin (left) and 25-pin (right) connections.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

CD 1

DTR 4

GROUND 5

DSR

RTS

CTS 8

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

4 DTR

5 GROUND

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9 NC

IBM-XT

25-Pin Female

SHIELD 1

RTS

CTS

DSR 6

GROUND 7

DTR

Quantum

9-Pin Male

1 SHIELD

DSR

RTS

CTS

DTR

GROUND

242

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOMs

Modbus Ports

Pinout

Connections for

Portable

Computers

The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine-pin portable

(laptop) computers.

IBM-AT

9-Pin Female

Quantum

9-Pin Male

SHIELD

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

DTR

GRND

DSR

RTS

CTS

The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures.

TX: Transmitted Data

RX: Received Data

RTS: Request to Send

DSR: Data Set Ready

DTR: Data Terminal Ready

CTS: Clear to Send

NC: No Connection

CD: Carrier Detect

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

243

Modbus Plus NOMs

244

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Modbus Plus

Networking on Fiber Module

140NOM25200 Quantum Networking Modbus Plus on Fiber Module

Overview

Related

Documentation

The following information pertains to the Modbus Plus on Fiber module,

140NOM25200. The Modbus Plus on Fiber module provides connectivity to Modbus

Plus nodes by fiber cable.

There are many benefits that result from the use of fiber optics. Some of these include: z Longer distances between nodes (up to 3 km), thereby, increasing the total length of the network.

z Fiber optic medium is not susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic interference, RF interference, and lightning.

z Intrinsically safe links that are required in many hazardous industrial environments.

z Total electrical isolation between terminal points on the link.

For more detailed information on fiber optic network repeaters, see the Fiber

Repeater User Guide (GM-FIBR-OPT).

245

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOM

Modbus Plus on

Fiber Module

The following figure shows the parts of the Modbus Plus 140NOM25200 module.

LED Area

Modbus Connector

Comm Parameter

Slide Switch

Port 2 TX and RX

Connectors

Port 1 TX and RX

Connectors

TX1

Fiber

Port 1

RX1

TX2

Fiber

Port 2

RX2

0RGEXV

3RUW

ASCII

RTU mem

120

CONTROLLER

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable Door

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Part #043504417)

0RGEXV

3OXV

TX2

Fiber

Port 2

RX2

ASCII

RTU mem

RX1

Fiber

Port 1

TX1

246

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOM

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Modbus

Modbus+

Fport 1

Fport 2

FRNGoff

The following table shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Ready

Run

Green

Modbus

Modbus+

Fport1

Fport2

FRNGoff

Green

Red

Indication when On

The module has passed powerup diagnostics.

Indicates that the unit is in kernel mode – should always be OFF during normal operations. Note : The table for the NOM 21X 00 shows the number of times the RUN LED on the Modbus Plus on

Fiber Module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each (all codes are in hex).

Indicates communication is active on the single RS-232 serial port.

Indicates communication is active on the Modbus Plus port.

Indicates an optical signal has been received on fiber optic Port 1.

Indicates an optical signal has been received on fiber optic Port 2.

Indicates the first break in a self healing ring.

Specifications

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

The following table shows the specifications for the NOM25200 module.

Specifications

General Communication Ports

Optical Ports

Modbus Port

Transmission/Data Rate

Optical Interface

Pulse Width Distortions and Jitter

2 (consisting of an optical receiver and transmitter)

1 RJ45 (phone jack-type) connector

1 Mbit/second for Modbus Plus with Bi-Phase S encoded data

ST-Type connectors

5 ns or better

247

Modbus Plus NOM

Specifications

Wavelength

Power Loss Budget (includes 3 dB of system margins).

820 nm

50/125 micron fiber - 6.5 dB

62.5/125 micron fiber - 11 dB

100/140 micron fiber - 16.5 dB

Maximum Distance for point-topoint connection

2 km over 50 micron fiber

3 km over 62.5 micron fiber

3 km over 100 micron fiber

10 km over 62.5 micron fiber Maximum System Length in Self

Healing Ring Configuration

Optical Transmitter Specifications

Optical Power (Measured with 1 m test fiber)

-12.8 ... -19.8 dBm average power in 50/125 micron fiber cable

-9.0 ... -16 dBm average power in 62.5/125 micron fiber cable

-3,5 ... -10.5 dBm average power in 100/140 micron fiber cable

20 ns or better

-43 dBm

Rise/Fall Time

Silence (OFF leakage)

Optical Receiver Specifications

Receiver Sensitivity

Dynamic Range

Detected Silence

Miscellaneous Specifications

Diagnostics

-30 dBm average power

-20 dB

-36 dBm

Power Dissipation

Bus Current Required

External Power

Power Up

RAM

Runtime

RAM

RAM Address RAM Address

Executive Checksum Executive Checksum

Processor

4 W

750 mA max

Not required for this module

248

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Front Panel

Switch

Modbus Plus NOM

A three-position slide switch is located on the front of the unit. This switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus (RS-232) port. The three options that are available, as shown in the figure below, include setting the slide switch in the top position (ASCII), middle position (RTU), or bottom position (Valid mem comm port parameters).

ASCII

RTU mem

Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port. The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters, which are set and cannot be changed.

ASCII Comm Port Parameters

Baud

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

2,400

Even

Rear panel rotary switch setting

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

249

Modbus Plus NOM

Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit (RTU) functionality to the port; the following RTU comm parameters are set and cannot be changed.

RTU Comm Port Parameters

Baud

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Device Address

9,600

Even

Rear panel rotary switch setting

Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software. The following parameters are valid.

Valid Mem Comm Port Parameters

Baud

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Parity

Device Address

19,200

9,600

7,200

4,800

3,600

2,400

2,000

1,800

7 / 8

1 / 2

Enable/Disable Odd/Even

Rear panel rotary switch setting

1,200

600

300

150

134.5

110

250

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Rear Panel

Switches

Modbus Plus NOM

Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules. They are used together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit.

1RWH The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64.

Rotary SW1 (top switch) sets the upper digit (tens), and rotary SW2 (bottom switch) sets the lower digit (ones) of the Modbus Plus node address. The following illustration shows the setting for an example address of 11.

SW1 (Tens)

SW2 (Ones)

The following figure shows the node address settings for the SW1 and SW2 switches.

SW1 and SW2 Address Settings

Node Address SW1

1 ... 9

10 ... 19

20 ... 29

30 ... 39

40 ... 49

50 ... 59

60 ... 64

SW2

1 ... 9

0 ... 9

1 ... 4

1RWH If "0" or an address greater than 64 is selected, the Modbus + LED will be

"on" steady, to indicate the selection of an invalid address.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

251

Modbus Plus NOM

Modbus

Connector

The NOM25200 module is equipped with an RS-232 port (see below) located on the front of the module. This port uses an eight-position RJ45 (phone jack-type) connector. The following figure shows the NOM25200 Pin 1 connector.

Pin 1

1RWH A D-shell adapter is available from Modicon for NOM 252 00-to-computer connections: a (110 XCA 20 300) 9-pin adapter for PC-AT type computers (see the illustration pinout table below).

The following figures show the 9-pin adapter front view (left) and side view (right).

252

Pin 1

Pin 9

110XCA20300

Front View

50.8mm

(2 in)

Side View

The following figure shows the 9-pin RJ45 connector schematic.

Connectors Pinouts

RJ45

Connector

TXD 3

RXD 4

DSR 2

GND 5

CTS 7

RTS 6

Chassis 8

Ground

9-pin D-shell

1 DCD

2 RXD

3 TXD

4 DTR

5 GDN

6 DRS

7 RTS

8 CTS

9 RI

Case of the

Connector

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

RJ45 Cable

Types

Modbus Plus NOM

This following figure shows the RJ45 connector, Modicon Part #110XCA2820X cable. The table provides part numbers and cable lengths.

RJ45

Connector

RJ45

Connector

Modicon Part # 110 XCA 282 0X

Cable Part Numbers

110XCA28201

110XCA28202

110XCA28203

Cable Lengths

3 ft. (0.91 m)

10 ft. (3 m)

20 ft. (6 m)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

253

Modbus Plus NOM

Fiber Optic Cable

Connections

The NOM25200 module is connected in the Quantum system by a fiber optic cable

(see the following figure). The cable has two strands. Each module transmits a signal in one direction. For this reason, each strand must be connected to the transmit port on one module and the receive port on the other.

One strand of the fiber optic cable is labelled every 10 inches with the manufacturer’s name and the cable specifications. This is the only way to distinguish the two strands.

Module A Module B

From Previous

NOM Receive

Transmit

Fiber

Port2

Receive

Transmit

Fiber

Port2

Receive

To Next

NOM Receive

From Previous

NOM Transmit

To Next

NOM Transmit

Receive

Fiber

Port1

Transmit

Receive

Fiber

Port1

Transmit

254

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOM

Connecting the

Fiber Optic Cable

The following steps show how to connect the fiber optic cable.

Step

Action

Remove the protective plastic coverings from the cable ports and the tips of the cable. Snap one of the fiber cable clasps (shipped with the module) over the cable so that the wider end of the tool is closest to the cable end.

Protective Coverings Cable Fiber Cable Clasp

2 Turn the connection ring so that one of the arrows on the side of the ring lines up with the ridge inside.

Cable Connection Ring

CableTip

Ridge

Arrow

3 a. Slide the tool up to the connection ring. b. Gripping the cable with the plastic cable clasp, slide the cable end onto the lower cable port. The arrow and the ridge on the connection ring should lineup with the slot on the left of the cable port.

c. Use the clasp to push the cable over the tab on top of the port. d. Turn the cable to the right, so that the tab locks securely e. Remove the clasp. f. Repeat this process with the remaining strand of cable.

Cable Port

Tab

Cable Connection Ring

Fiber Cable Clasp

3 m Cable

(Part # 990XCA65609)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

255

Modbus Plus NOM

Fiber Optic

Configurations

Point-to-Point

Configuration z z z z

The following represent four typical configurations that show the wide range of the network architecture:

Point-to-Point connection

Bus configuration

Tree and Star configurations

Self Healing Ring configuration

Point-to-point configuration (see the following figure) allows communication over the distance of up to 3 km through harsh industrial environments. The following figure shows the point-to-point configuration.

P/S

Node # 1

CPU I/O NOM NOM

Node # 2

CPU I/O P/S

Fiber Optic Cables

Bus

Configuration

This type of configuration is used when it is required to connect a number of fiber nodes and can be used to increase the distance of a standard Modbus Plus network by changing to a fiber medium. This kind of network allows the connection of up to

32 Quantum NOM252 nodes over the distance of 5 km.

The following illustrations show the NOM25200 module in a mixed fiber optic/twisted pairs bus configuration network and a pure fiber optic bus configuration network.

&$87,21

(TXLSPHQW)DLOXUH

The loss of a single node in this configuration disables the rest of the network. It is suggested that the Self Healing Ring configuration be used to avoid this problem.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

256

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOM

The following figure shows the mixed fiber optic/copper network.

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O P/S

1RGH

CPU NOM I/O I/O

/HJHQG

MB+ Cable

Fiber Optic

Cable

MB+ Tap with

Terminator

MB+ Tap

(Terminator not required)

490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

To Node # n

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

The following figure shows the pure fiber optic network.

Fiber Optic Cable

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

To Node # n

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

To Node # n

Fiber Optic Cable

1RWH The distance between nodes on fiber is limited by the maximum allowable power loss from end-to-end (3 km over 62.5 mm fiber). Power loss includes the fiber optic cable attenuation, connector losses at the Fiber Optic Receiver and

Transmitter ports, and the system margin of 3 dB.

The end NOM25200 in this configuration will have the FRNGoff LED active and will display the Cable B Framing error in the MBPSTAT (in ladder logic).

257

Modbus Plus NOM

Tree

Configuration

The use of a tree configuration can provide flexibility in the layout of Modbus Plus and NOM 25200 networks. The following illustration shows an example of a tree configuration. Additional repeaters can be connected in order to extend communication between electrical links.

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O

/HJHQG

MB+ Cable

Fiber Optic

Cable

MB+ Tap with

Terminator

MB+ Tap

490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeaters

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O

P/S CPU

1RGH

NOM I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O

258

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOM

Self Healing Ring

Configuration

This configuration can be achieved by connecting the unused fiber optic ports of the first and last NOM25200 directly or through the fiber optic repeater, if a mixed fiber optic/twisted pairs network is used. This type of connection has all the advantages of the previously described configurations, along with built-in redundancy. A broken connection between any two Quantum modules in the ring will automatically reconfigure the network to the Bus Configuration and continue the communication.

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

/HJHQG

MB+ Cable

Fiber Optic

Cable

MB+ Tap with

Terminator

MB+ Tap

490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

259

Modbus Plus NOM

Hot Standby

Systems

The following figure shows the self healing ring configuration for hot standby systems example.

PC with SA85 Card

490NR25400 Fiber Optic Repeater for Modbus Plus

/HJHQG

MB+ Cable

Fiber Optic Cable

RIO Cable

MB+ Tap with

Terminator

MB+ Tap

Remote I/O

1RGH

3ULPDU\6\VWHP

P/S CPU CRP NOM CHS P/S

6WDQGE\6\VWHP

P/S CPU CRP NOM CHS P/S

1RGH

P/S CPU NOM I/O I/O

Coaxial RIO Link

To Other

RIO Drops

P/S CPU I/O I/O I/O

490NR95400 Fiber Optic Repeaters (for RIO)

7\SLFDO+RW6WDQGE\6\VWHPZLWK5HPRWH,25,2

Remote I/O Drop

260

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus Plus NOM

Network Status

Recommended

Materials for

Fiber Optic Links

Modicon does not manufacture fiber optic products such as cables, connectors, or special tools. However, we have experience with third party suppliers of materials and can give some guidelines on what will work with our products.

Connectors

The information about the condition of the network is presented in the form of

Network Status. This information indicates the loss of connection (the first break in the self healing ring) and is similar to the way existing 140NOM21200 reports the loss of redundant cable.

The break of the fiber cable will be detected by the module not receiving the signal from the side where the cable is broken and will be reported as a Cable B Framing error by MBPSTAT. This condition will also activate the FRNGoff LED on the front of the module.

The following table shows the connector types

Connector Type

ST Bayonet (Epoxy)

ST Bayonet (Hot Melt)

ST Bayonet (Epoxy)

Part Number

3M 6105

Operating Temperature

-40 ... +80° C

3M 6100 -40 ... +60° C

AMP 501380-5 Series -30 ... +70° C

ST Bayonet (Epoxy)

Light_Crimp ST Style

AMP 503415-1 Series

AMP 503453-1 Series

Mechanical Line Splice (one size fits all) 3M 2529 Fiberlok1 II

-20 ... +75° C

-20 ... + 60° C

-40 ... +80° C

1RWH All connectors must have a short boot for strain relief.

Termination Kits The following table shows the termination kits.

Kit Type

Bayonet ST (Epoxy)

Part Number Description

AMP 503746-1 For all epoxy type ST style

Light_Crimp XTC AMP 50330-2 For all Light_Crimp

Mechanical Line Splice 3M 2530 Fiber Splice Prep Kit, complete with cleaving tool

3M Hot Melt 3M 05-00185

3M 05-00187

110 V Termination Kit

220 V Termination Kit

Optical Star

Passive

Couplers

The AMP Model 95010-4 is a pig-tail option and must be used with an enclosure

(use AMP Model 502402-4, a 19 in rack-mount enclosure, 1.7 in high).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

261

Modbus Plus NOM

Other Tools The following table shows other tools that may be needed for fiber optic links.

Product

3M (Photodyne) Optical Source

Driver

3M (Photodyne) Optical Light

Source

3M (Photodyne) Power Meter

3M Optical Light Source, 660 nm, visible

3M FC/ST Patch Cord

3M Bare Fiber Adapter, STcompatible

Part Number

9XT

1700-0850-T

17XTA-2041

7XE-0660-J

Description/Use

Hand-held optical source driver

(requires a light source)

850 nm Light Source, ST Connectors for 9XT

Hand-held Fiber Optic Power Meter

Use with 9XT to troubleshoot raw fiber, requires FC/ST patch cord

BANAV-FS-0001 Connects FC connector on 7XE to ST

8194 Permits use of above source and meter to test raw fiber (two required)

Cables It is recommended that you use 62.5/125

μ m cable (such as AMP 503016-1, AMP

502986-1, or equivalent) with a maximum attenuation of 3.5 dB/km in most of the configurations.

1RWH Modicon recommends using the 990XCA65609 cable.

When passive star couplers are used, 100/140 micron cable (such as

AMP503016-3, AMP502986-3, or equivalent) with a maximum attenuation of 5.0 dB/km is recommended because higher optical power can be pumped in 100 μ m cable and as a result, greater distance (up to 1 km) between units can be achieved.

1RWH All cables must have a maximum cable diameter of not more than 3 mm at the terminal side.

262

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Connections

Modbus Plus NOM

The following information discusses connecting the NOM25200 on fiber cable, adding a new mode to the network, and repairing the break in the cable.

1RWH When a new network is assembled, it is recommended that you connect all cables before powering up the system. Connect fiber optic cables as described previously in this section.

Adding a New

Node to the

Network

If a new node is added to an existing network in order to extend the network (at the end of any configuration), then a new node may be connected first by fiber cable and then hot-swapped to the backplane to avoid errors to the existing network.

If a new mode is added to the middle of the network, the fiber optic cables need to be disconnected from one side of the existing NOM252 module and connected to port 1 or 2 of a new node. Additional fiber optic cable then needs to be connected to the second port of the new NOM252 and to the next NOM252 in the network, the new NOM252 then has to be hot-swapped to the backplane.

:$51,1*

+RW6ZDSSLQJ5HVWULFWLRQ

Modules may be hot swapped when the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not hot swap modules in a Class 1, Division 2 environment.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\RU

HTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

263

Modbus Plus NOM

Repairing the

Break in the

Cable

Because the NOM25200 will stop transmitting in the direction from which it is not receiving the signal, the replacement of a broken fiber optic cable and the reconnection of it will not re-establish communication over that segment. The hot swap of only one NOM252 at the repaired connections is required to complete the connection.

1RWH The break of any fiber connectors or fiber optic cables is the equivalent to the break of the trunk cable in a Modbus Plus network on copper.

For the self healing ring configuration, the repair of the first break in the fiber optic network has to be scheduled to the time when one of the units on either side of the repaired break can be hot-swapped without creating the problem by disconnecting the node.

1RWH

Self healing configurations are not considered redundant networks. High system availability can be achieved with redundant networks.

Calculating

Number of

Modules in a

Fiber Network

Calculate the number of NOM25200 modules in a fiber network using the following method:

Step

Action

The total allowable pulse width distortions and jitter are limited to 20% of the bit period and is 200 nsec for the full fiber optic network.

The jitter contributed by the NOM252 is 5 nsec max.

Jitter contributed by fiber optic repeaters (if used) is 40 nsec.

The formula to determine the number (N) of chained repeaters is:

N =

200nsec – X L nsec

5nsec

– 40nsec

+ 1 where "L" is the total cable length (km), and "X" is the jitter (added by the fiber optic cable) in nsec/km:

X = 3 ns/km for 50/125 μ m

5 ns/km for 62.5/125

μ m

7.5 ns/km for 100/140 μ m

264

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Ethernet Modules

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

This chapter provides information on the NOE2X1 TCP/IP, NOE3X1 SY/MAX,

NOE5X100 MMS, and NOE771xx Ethernet modules.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module

140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY/MAX Modules

140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules

140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

265

Ethernet Modules

140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Module

Overview The Quantum NOE2X1TCP/IP is described in this section. This includes specifications for the NOE21100 and NOE25100 modules.

Ethernet TCP/IP

Module

The following figure shows the Ethernet TCP/IP NOE2X100 module.

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

LED Display Removable Door

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door

Global Address Label

Global

Address

Fiber Optic

10 base FL

Global

Address

Fiber

Optic

10 base

Transmit Cable

Connector

Receive Cable

Connector

Specifications

266

The Ethernet TCP/IP modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface to Ethernet networks for the Quantum Automation Series system.

Specifications

Communication Ports

Ethernet ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP/IP protocol:

NOE 211 00 1, 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port. NOE 251 00 1, 10BASE-FL

Ethernet network (ST-style) port

Data Transfer Frequency

Power Dissipation

Bus Current Required

Compatibility

10 mb

5 W

1 A

Programming Software

Quantum Controllers

Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum

All, V2.0 at a minimum

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the NOE2X100 LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Link

Active

Fault

Coll

Ethernet Modules

Kernel Appl

The following table describes the meaning of each NOE2X100 LED indicator.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color Indication when On

Active Green Module is communicating with backplane.

Ready Green Module has passed internal diagnostic tests.

Run

Link

Green

Flashes during normal operation.

Ethernet link to hub is ok.

Kernel Amber If steady, module is operating in kernel mode. If flashing, module is waiting for download.

Fault

Coll

Red

An error has been detected, a download has failed or a reset is in process.

If steady, cable is not connected. If flashing, Ethernet collisions are occurring.

Appl Amber Entry exists in crash log.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

267

Ethernet Modules

Installing the

NOE Module

Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules come fully configured. However, before installing your module, you should make sure the default configuration is appropriate for your network.

If the module will be communicating on an open network, consult your network administrator to obtain a unique IP network address. You must enter this address in the Modsoft Ethernet TCP/IP configuration extension screen before installing the module.

If the module will be communicating on a local network, make sure the default IP network address is not already in use on that network. To determine the default IP network address, locate the global address label on the front panel of the module.

Convert the rightmost eight digits from hexadecimal to decimal. The result should be a decimal number in the form, 84.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each group of xxx is a number from 0 to 255. This is the default IP network address.

Installation

Example:

Discovering the

Default IP

Network Address

The following example shows the steps for discovering the default IP network address.

Step

Action

Locate the global address label on the front panel of the module.

,(((*/2%$/$''5(66

0000540B72A8

Note the rightmost eight digits.

5 4 0 B 7 2 A 8

84.11.114.168

Convert them from hexadecimal to decimal. Each pair of hexadecimal numbers will result in a decimal number between 0 and 255. This is the default IP address.

If you use the default IP network address and if your network uses Ethernet II framing and if you do not need to specify the default gateway or a subnet mask, then you may install the module without changing the default configuration.

268

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Ethernet Modules

&$87,21

6\VWHP(UURU

Do not connect this module to your network until you have ensured that its IP address will be unique on the network.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

&$87,21

+DUGZDUH5HVWULFWLRQV

The cable for an Ethernet module must be routed through an Ethernet hub for the network to function properly. Do not connect the module directly to another device.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

269

Ethernet Modules

140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY/MAX Modules

Overview

Related

Documentation

Ethernet SY/

MAX Module

This section includes information for the NOE31100 and 35100 SY/MAX Ethernet modules. The Quantum SY/MAX Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to SY/MAX devices via Ethernet.

For more detailed information, see Quantum-SY/MAX-Ethernet Module User Guide

(840 USE 111 00).

The following figure shows the NOE3X100 SY/MAX Ethernet modules.

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

LED Display

12(

CONTROLLER

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

Global Address Label

Transmit Cable

Connector

Receive Cable

Connector

Global

Address

Fiber Optic

10 base FL

Port 1

1RWH

The NOE31100 is equipped with one RJ-45 connector instead of the fiber optic connectors (as shown above on the NOE35100).

270

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Ethernet Modules

The following table shows the specifications for the SY/MAX Ethernet modules

NOE31100 and 35100.

Specifications

Communication Ports

NOE31100

NOE35100

Cable Type

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet

1 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port

2 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports

RG58a/u or RG58C/U coaxial (Belden 9907/82907 or equivalent)

2, 3, 4, or 6 twisted pairs with a solid copper core 10Base-T (twisted pair)

Wire Size

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet

10Base-T (twisted pair)

Topology

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet

10Base-T (twisted pair)

Connector

20 AWG

22, 24, 26 AWG

Bus

Star

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet

10Base-T (twisted pair)

BNC (UG-274)

Modular RJ-45 (4 pins of 8 are used by 10Base-T)

Backplane Compatibility (Requires

Quantum CPU)

3, 4, 6, 10, and 16 position backplanes

Compatible SY/MAX 802.3 Devices and Software

Model 450

Model 650

SFI160

SFW390-VAX

Streamline Version 1.3

Bus Current Required 1 A

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

271

Ethernet Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the NOE3X100 LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Link

Active

Fault

Collision

SY/MAX

Addressing

272

Kernel Appl

The following table describes the meaning of each NOE3X100 indicator.

LED Descriptions

LEDs

Active

Ready

Color

Green

Run

Link

Kernel

Fault

Collision

Green

Amber

Red

Appl Amber

Indication when On

Module is communicating with backplane.

Module has passed internal diagnostic tests.

Flashes during normal operation.

Ethernet connection is made.

On during download.

An error condition has occurred.

If steady, an error condition exists. If flashing, packet collisions are occurring on the network during data transmission.

A fatal error has occurred.

Be sure that the module is assigned a unique SY/MAX drop number during configuration.

:$51,1*

3HUVRQDOLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

Failure to assign a unique SY/MAX drop number during configuration can cause severe personal injury or equipment damage.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\RU

HTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Ethernet Modules

140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules

Overview

Ethernet MMS

Module

The section includes information for the NOE5X100 MMS Ethernet modules,

NOE51100 and NOE55100. The Quantum MMS Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to MMS devices via Ethernet.

The following figure shows the NOE5X100 MMS Ethernet modules.

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

LED Display

Removable Door

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Global Address Label

Transmit Cable

Connector

Receive Cable

Connector

Global

Address

Fiber

Optic

Port 1

1RWH The NOE51100 is equipped with one RJ45 connector instead of the fiber optic connectors (as shown above on the NOE55100).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

273

Ethernet Modules

Specifications The following table shows the MMS Ethernet specifications.

Specifications

Communication Ports

NOE51100

NOE55100

Cable Type

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet

10Base-T (twisted pair)

1 10BASE-T Ethernet network (RJ-45) port

2 10BASE-FL Ethernet network (ST-style) ports

2, 3, 4, or 6 twisted pairs with a solid copper core

RG58a/u or RG58C/U coaxial (Belden 9907/82907 or equivalent)

Wire Size

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet

10Base-T (twisted pair)

Topology

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet

10Base-T (twisted pair)

Connector

10Base-2 or ThinWire Ethernet

10Base-T (twisted pair)

Backplane Compatibility (Requires

Quantum CPU)

Data Transfer Frequency

Bus Current Required

20 AWG

22, 24, 26 AWG

Bus

Star

BNC (UG-274)

Modular RJ-45 (4 pins of 8 are used by 10Base-T)

3, 4, 6, 10, and 16 position backplanes

10 mb

1 A

274

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following table shows the NOE5X100 LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Link

Active

Fault

Collision

Ethernet Modules

Kernel Appl

The following table describes the meaning of each NOE5X100 indicator.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Active

Ready

Green

Run

Link

Kernel

Fault

Green

Amber

Red

Collision Red

Appl Amber

Indication when On

Module is communicating with backplane.

Module has passed internal diagnostic tests.

Flashes during normal operation.

Ethernet connection is made.

On during download.

An error condition has occurred.

If steady, an error condition exists. If flashing, packet collisions are occurring on the network during data transmission.

A fatal error has occurred.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

275

Ethernet Modules

140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules

Overview The following provides information on the Quantum ethernet modules

140NOE77100, 140NOE77101, 140NOE77110, and 140NOE77111.

Related

Documentation

Refer to Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide (840 USE 116 00) for more detailed information on the installation and use of Quantum ethernet modules.

Ethernet Module The following figure shows the NOE77100 Ethernet module. The other NOE771xx

Ethernet modules are the same in appearance except for the model number.

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

LED Display

12(

(WKHUQHW

5HDG\

5XQ

$FWLYH

)DXOW

&ROO

/LQN

7[$FW

5[$FW

0%)GXSOH[

.HUQHO$SSO

Removable Door

IP Address

Writable Area

Global Address Label

100 Base Fx

MT-RJ Cable Connector

10/100 Base-T

RJ-45 Cable Connector

%DVH

)[

276

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Ethernet Modules

The main specifications for the Quantum 140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules are described in the following table

Specifications

Communication Ports

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

Fuse

Programming Software

Type and version

One auto-sensing 10/100Base-T shielded twisted pair (RJ-45 connector) port and one 100Base-FX

(MT-RJ connector) port. Both ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP/IP protocol. Only one port can be used at a time.

750 mA

3.8 W

None

Concept, Ver. 2.2 or higher (NOE77100/10)

Concept, Ver 2.5 or higher (NOE77101/11)

Modsoft, Ver. 2.6 or higher (NOE77100/10)

ProWORX NxT, Ver 2.1 or higher (NOE77100/10)

ProWORX NxT, Ver 2.2 or higher (NOE77101/11)

Firmware

CPU Type and version

NOE Upgradeable

Operating Conditions

Temperature

Humidity

Altitude

Vibration

Quantum Executive, Ver. 2.0, or higher

Field Upgradeable via FTP or Programming Panel.

0 to +60° C

0 to 95% Rh non-condensing @ 60° C

15,000 ft (4500 m)

10-57 Hz @ 0.0075 mm d.a

57-150 Hz @ 1 g

Storage Conditions

Temperature

Humidity

Free Fall

Shock

-40 to +85°C

0 to 95% Rh non condensing @ 60°C

1 m unpackaged

3 shocks / axis, 15 g, 11 ms

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

277

Ethernet Modules

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the NOE771xx LED indicators.

Ready

Run

Link

Tx Act

Rx Act

10MB

Active

Fault

Coll

100MB

Kernel

Fduplex

Appl

The following table describes the meaning of each NOE771xx LED indicator.

LED Descriptions

LED Color Description

Active Green Indicates the backplane is configured.

Ready Green Indicates module is healthy.

Fault

Run

Red During a crash while going through a reset.

If Duplicate IP address is detected.

If no link is available.

While going through BOOTP sequence.

Green Flashes to indicate diagnostic code, as described in "Run LED Status"

(following table).

Coll.

Link

TxAct

RxAct

Red

Green

Flashes when Ethernet collisions occur.

On when Ethernet link is active.

Flashes to indicate Ethernet transmission.

Flashes to indicate Ethernet reception.

Kernel Amber On when in Kernel Mode.

Flashing while in download mode.

10MB Green On when the module is connected to a 10 Megabit network.

100MB Green On when the module is connected to a 100 Megabit network.

Fduplex Green On when Ethernet is operating in the full duplex mode.

Appl Green On when crash log entry exists.

278

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Run LED Status

Ethernet Modules

The following table lists each available state of the Run LED indicator and provides diagnostic information for that state

Indicator State Status

On (steady) Normal operation: The NOE module is ready for network communication.

Number of flashes in sequence one Not used two three four five

Not used

No Link: the network cable is not connected or is defective.

Duplicate IP address: The module will stay off-line.

No IP address: The module is attempting to obtain an IP address from a

BOOTP server.

six seven eight

Using default IP address

No valid executive NOE present

Invalid IP configuration. Likely cause: Default gateway is not on the same subnet mask as the NOE>

Key Features The key features of the 140 NOE 771 (-00, -01, -10, -11) models are listed below:

HTTP Server

FTP Server

Flash File System

BOOTP Client

BOOTP Server

SNMP V2 Agent

MODBUS Messaging

I/O Scanner

Hot Standby

Global Data - Publish / Subscribe

Bandwidth Monitoring

Faulty Device Replacement (DHCP Server)

Enhanced Web Diagnostics

Schneider Private MIB

FactoryCast Application

User Programmable Web Pages

-00

-01

In Version 2.0 X

-10

-11

In Version 2.0

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

279

Ethernet Modules

MODBUS I/O

Scanner

The functionality of the NOE771xx module is further enhanced by the addition of a

MODBUS I/O Scanner that can be configured with either the Modsoft, Concept, or

ProWorx programming panel. This allows the user a means to transfer data between network nodes without using the MSTR instruction.

z z

The NOE771 MODBUS I/O Scanner can be configured by either of the following two methods:

Peer Cop (Available on NOE77100 only)

Ethernet I/O Scanner

1RWH

It is recommended that the enhanced MODBUS I/O Scanner be used for all new installations. Peer Cop functionality is provided only as an easy migration path for an existing installation. The enhanced MODBUS I/O Scanner provides greater functionality than the

Peer Cop based I/O scanner.

Peer Cop Based

I/O Scanner

The following table lists the characteristics of the Peer Cop based MODBUS I/O

Scanner, which is available only on the NOE77100.

Parameter

Max. No. of Devices

Max. No. of Input Words

Max. No. of Output Words

Value

500

HealthTimeout Value

Input TimeOutState

Global Setting (20 Msec to 2 Secs in 20 mSec increments)

Global Setting (Zero or Hold)

IP Address Derived from MODBUS Address (must be on NOE’s Subnet)

Remote Register Reference Not configurable - 400001 is used

280

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Enhanced

Modbus I/O

Scanner

Ethernet Modules

The following table lists the characteristics of the Enhanced based MODBUS I/O

Scanner, which is available on the NOE77100, NOE77101, and NOE77111.

Parameter

Max. No. of Devices

Max. No. of Input Words

Max. No. of Output Words

Value

128: NOE77100, NOE77101 and NOE77111.

4000

HealthTimeout Value

Input TimeOutState

Individual Setting (1 Msec to 2 Secs in 1 mSec increments)

Individually Settable

IP Address Individually Settable

Remote Register Reference Configurable

Min. Update Rate Settable

Refer to the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide (840 USE 116 00) to learn how to configure the MODBUS I/O Scanner.

The following information describes the functionality of the MODBUS/TCP Server.

MODBUS/TCP

Server

Introduction –

Client

Introduction –

Server

All NOE771xx Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules provide the user with the capability of transferring data to and from nodes on a TCP/IP network through the use of a communication instruction. All PLCs that support networking communication capabilities over Ethernet can use the MSTR Ladder Logic instruction to read or write controller information or can also use IEC communication blocks.

All NOE771xx Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules provide the user with the ability to access data from the controller using the standard MODBUS/TCP protocol. Any device: PC, HMI package, another PLC, or any MODBUS/TCP compliant device can access data from the PLC. The MODBUS/TCP Server also allows programming panels to log into the controller over Ethernet.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

281

Ethernet Modules

Limitations

Performance

The NOE771xx supports up to 64 simultaneous MODBUS/TCP Server connections.

The NOE771xx allows only one Programming Panel to be logged in at a time to guarantee consistency of changes to the controller configuration.

The following MODBUS/TCP commands are supported by the NOE: z z z z z z

Read Data

Write Data

Read/Write Data

Get Remote Statistics

Clear Remote Statistics

MODBUS 125 Commands (used by programming panels to download a new

Exec to the NOE)

The following table shows the performance characteristics of the NOE771xx’s

MODBUS/TCP Server.

Parameter

Typical Response Time (ms)

Number of MODBUS connections (Client and Server)

Number of simultaneous login channels

Value

0.6

64 (-01, -11)

16 (Client -00)

32 (Server -10)

1RWH NOE771xx MODBUS/TCP performance measurements are made with

Quantum 140CPU53414 PLC.

FTP and HTTP

Server

FTP Server

The following information describes services provided by the FTP and HTTP servers.

The NOE771xx’s File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address. Any FTP client can log on to the module, if the client uses the correct user name and password.

The FTP Server provides the following services: z z z

Update the NOE’s firmware by downloading a new Exec

Provides error log visibility by uploading error log files

Upload/download BOOTP Server and SNMP configuration files

The default user name is USER, and the default password is USERUSER. Both the user name and password are case sensitive. Refer to the Quantum NOE 771 xx

Ethernet Modules User Guide for instructions about how to change the password, and how to add or delete user names to the FTP Server.

There should be only one FTP client per module.

282

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

HTTP Server

Ethernet Modules

The NOE771xx’s HyperText Transport Protocol (HTTP) Server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address. It can be used with version 4.0 or greater of either the Internet Explorer or Netscape browser.

The NOE771xx’s HyperText Transport Protocol (HTTP) Server allows you to view z z z z the following information:

Module’s Ethernet statistics

Controller and I/O information

BOOTP/DHCP/FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) Server information

Global Data (Publish / Subscribe)

The HTTP Server’s HTML pages allow you to configure the module’s BOOTP/

DHCP/FDR Server and SNMP Agent.

The HTTP Server is protected with a default name and password. The default name and password are both USER, and both are case sensitive. They can both be changed via the Configuration page on the NOE 771 0x’s Web Embedded Pages

(see the Installing the Module chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet

Modules User Guide ).

For the NOE7711x modules, they can be changed via the FactoryCast Configurator.

The NOE771xx supports a maximum of 32 HTTP simultaneous connections.

1RWH Browsers may open multiple connections so 32 HTTP connections does not indicate 32 simultaneous users.

1RWH The NOE7710x module does not support user downloaded Web pages. You will need to purchase the 140NOE7711x module to support that requirement.

Address Servers The following information describes the services provided by the Address Servers: z z

BOOTP Server

DHCP Server

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

283

Ethernet Modules

BOOTP Server

Your NOE

BOOTP Server

1RWH The BOOTP Server is available on the 140NOE771 -00 and -10 models.

The BOOTstrap Protocol (BOOTP) software, compliant with RFC 951, is used to assign IP addresses to nodes on an Ethernet network. Devices (hosts) on the network issue BOOTP requests during their initialization sequence, and a BOOTP

Server that receives the request will extract the required IP address information from its database and place it in BOOTP response messages to the requesting devices.

The devices will use the assigned IP addresses, received from the BOOTP Server, for all communication occurring on the network.

Your NOE x0 module comes supplied with a BOOTP Server. This feature allows you to provide IP addresses to all the I/O devices being serviced by the NOE771x0.

Providing a BOOTP Server that is built into your NOE771x0 module eliminates the need for you to have a dedicated PC on your I/O network acting as a BOOTP Server.

1RWH

The NOE771x0’s BOOTP Server cannot be used to provide its own IP address.

You can configure your NOE771x0’s BOOTP Server from the module’s HTTP Web page. Using this feature allows you to add, remove, and edit devices to the BOOTP

Server’s database, which is maintained on the modules non-volatile memory.

284

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

DHCP Server

Ethernet Modules

1RWH The DHCP Server is available on the 140NOE771x1 models.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a superset of the BOOTP Protocol.

Your 140NOE771x1 has a DHCP Server. The DHCP Server is compliant with RFC

1531. The DHCP Server can be used to provide the IP configuration to devices using BOOTP or devices using DHCP.

The DHCP Server has entries that use the MAC address to serve the IP configuration and entries in the Server that use the role name to serve the IP configuration. See the Address Server Configuration/Faulty Device Replacement chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for details on configuring your NOE’s address Server.

If you are migrating a BOOTP configuration from a 140NOE771x0 module to the new 140 NOE 771 x1 module, see the Address Server Configuration/Faulty Device

Replacement chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for details on automatic upgrade of your configuration for the new DHCP Server.

1RWH OPERATING ON A CORPORATE NETWORK

Before placing the NOE on a corporate network, Schneider Automation recommends that you discuss the installation with your MIS department. It is likely that your company’s corporate network has at least one DHCP Server running already. If the NOE’s DHCP Server is running on the same network, it may disturb the network.

To avoid any possible problem related to the NOE’s DHCP Server on the corporate network, you must ensure that the DHCP Server is not running in the NOE by not having address entries in the configuration. If there are no configured devices in the address Server configuration page, then the NOE will not start the DHCP

Server.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

285

Ethernet Modules

Global Data Global Data service is a real time Publisher/Subscriber mechanism providing the most efficient data exchange for PLC application coordination.

Devices supporting Global Data are arranged in a distribution group for the purpose of application variable exchange and synchronization. Each Global Data device can publish up to one network (application) variable and subscribe up to 64 network

(application) variables.

The Quantum NOE’s embedded Web Global Data Configuration Page provides a configuration screen to determine which and how many application variables are exchanged with this service. After configuration, the exchanges between all stations belonging to the same distribution group are done automatically.

The Global Data service uses the 4x register space for Global Data exchanges.

Key Features of

Global Data z z z z z z z

The main features for Global Data are:

One Publisher and many Subscribers

A device can publish one network variable of up to 512 registers

A device can subscribe to several network variables of up to 2048 4x registers

A device subscribes to the complete network variable

One distribution group per network IP address

Application defined publication rate

Up to 64 Global Data network variables (numbered from 1 to 64) can be part of z the data distribution group

An NOE has only one multicast address; consequently, it can only publish and z subscribe inside the group

A device can participate in several distribution groups by using multiple NOEs in the rack

Global Data has an advantage over Client/Server services when more than one

Subscriber is receiving the same data since only one transaction is necessary for all

Subscribers to receive the data. z z

This advantage offers two benefits:

Reduce overall network traffic

Ensure tighter synchronization of multiple subscribers

Bandwith

Monitoring

Bandwidth Monitoring allows you to monitor the NOE’s CPU allocation for each of the following services: Global Data, I/O Scanning, and Messaging. The Bandwidth

Monitoring service retrieves workload data and returns one of two pieces of information: whether the module has free resources or whether the module is z z working at capacity. Knowing the resource allocation helps you:

Decide about allocating your resources

Determine the number of NOEs needed in a system

286

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Available

Services

Ethernet Modules z z z

The services accessed and monitored are:

Global Data

I/O Scanner

Modbus Messaging

If you use Bandwidth Monitoring, you do not need to develop a new set of access functions. The actual NOE CPU load is computed each second.

Bandwidth

Monitoring Load

Rates

The Bandwidth Monitoring service checks once a second and computes four (4) values in private data: z z z z

Percentage of NOE’s CPU allocated to

Global Data

Percentage of NOE’s CPU allocated to the I/O Scanner

Messaging

Percentage of NOE’s CPU allocated to other services and idle

Results are returned as percentages. CPU time spent in other services is shown as

"Other" or "Free." Bandwidth Monitoring uses the same functions as used by SNMP.

The three service rates, Global Data, I/O Scanner, and Messaging, are computed using the following formula:

(Current load * 100) / Maximum Load

Table of Maximum Load Rates

Diagnostic Service Workload Data Returned

Global Data

I/O Scanner

Messaging

Number of published variables per second

Number of transactions per second

Number of messages treated per second

Maximum load for NOE 771 x1

800

4200

410

The current load is computed dynamically.

1RWH The loads are dependent on controller scan time. Each application has an expected scan time. Therefore, when evaluating the loads, you should ensure that the controller scan time is set to the expected scan time for the application being modelled.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

287

Ethernet Modules

Enhanced Web

Diagnostics

1RWH These services are available on the 140NOE771x1 modules.

The embedded Web server provides Web pages that you may use to diagnose

Transparent Factory / Real Time services.

Those diagnostic services are listed below:

Global Data diagnostics z Status of all Global Data services z Status of all subscribed and published variables z Publication / Subscription rate

I/O Scanning diagnostics z z

Status of all I/O Scanning services

Status of individual scanned devices z Actual I/O scanning rate

Messaging diagnostics z Diagnostic information for Port 502 messaging

Bandwidth Monitoring z Throughput measurement of NOE by service

1RWH

All these pages are protected by the general HTTP password.

288

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Modules for the Quantum

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

z z z z z z

This chapter provides information on the following intelligent/special purpose modules:

Five Channel High Speed Counter Module

Two Channel High Speed Counter Module

ASCII Interface Module

High Speed Interrupt Module

Single Axis Motion Modules

Hot Standby Module

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module

I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200

140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module

140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module

140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module

140MSB/MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules

140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable

140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module

Page

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

289

Intelligent/Special Purpose

140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module

Overview This section provides specifications and descriptions of the high speed counter modules EHC10500, Five Channel Discrete High Speed Counter. The High Speed

Counter module is a discrete counter for proximity and magnetic pickups.

Related

Documentation

For more detailed information on the planning, installation and use of this module, refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140EHC10500 Module User Guide

(840 USE 443 00).

EHC10500

Counter Module

The following figure shows the EHC10500 Five Channel Discrete High Speed

Counter module.

LED Area

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Field Wiring

Terminal Strip

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside the door)

Removable Door

290

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the specifications for the EHC10500 high speed counter.

Specifications

Number of Channels

LEDs

Required Addressing

5 counter inputs, 8 digital inputs, and 8 digital outputs

Active

R (Green) -

1 ... 8 (Green - left column) -

Module is ready

Discrete Inputs

(IN1 ... IN8)

C1 ... C5 (Green - middle column) - Discrete Counter Inputs

(C1 ... C5)

1 ... 8 (Green - right column) Discrete Outputs

(OUT1 ... OUT8)

24 Vdc is present P (Green) -

13 Words In

13 Words Out

Discrete Counter Inputs

Count Frequency

Input Thresholds

Input Current

Duty Cycle

Data Formats

Operation Modes

Max Continuous Input

Voltage

Discrete Inputs

VREF Supply + 24 Vdc

100 kHz max @ 5Vdc

35 kHz max @ 24Vdc

+3.1 ... +5V

+15 ... +30V

7 mA

1 : 1

16 Bit Counter: 65,535 Decimal

32 Bit Counter: 2,147,483,647 Decimal

Discrete incremental counter

30 Vdc

Off

0 ... 1.15V@5 Vdc

-3 ... +5V@24 Vdc

On State (Vdc)

-3.0 ... 5.0.

5 mA

Off State (Vdc)

15.0 ... 30.0

Input Current (typical)

Discrete Outputs

FET Switch ON

FET Switch OFF

Max Load Current (each output)

Output Off State Leakage

20 ... 30 Vdc

0 Vdc (ground reference)

210 mA max

0.1 mA max @ 30 Vdc

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

291

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Specifications

Output On State Voltage

Drop

Miscellaneous

Isolation (Channel to Bus)

Fault Detection

Power Dissipation

Bus Current Required

External 24 Vdc Power

Supply

External Fusing

Compatibility

1.25 Vdc @ 0.5 A

500 Vac rms for 1 minute

Loss of output field power, output short circuit

≤ 6 W

250 mA

19.2 ... 30 Vdc, 24 Vdc nominal, 60 mA required plus the load current for each output

User discretion

Programming Software: Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum

Quantum Controllers: All, V2.0 at a minimum

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC10500 high speed counter.

R Active

292

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC10500 high speed counter.

LED Descriptions

LEDs

Active

Color Indication when On

Green Bus communication is present

Red Lights upon any defined hardware, firmware, and process error.

Green Indicates firmware initialization is complete and the module is ready for service.

1 ... 8 (left column) Green Digital inputs IN1 ... IN8

C1 ... C5 Green Counter inputs xxC1 ... xxC5 (xx=5/24)

1 ... 8 (right column) Green Digital outputs OUT1 ... OUT8

P Green 24 Vdc is present

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Wiring Diagram The following figure show the EHC10500 wiring diagram.

N/C

2 1

N/C

4 3

N/C

6 5

N/C

8 7

N/C

M11

M12

M13

M14

M15

IN2

IN4

IN6

IN8

Common

OUT2

OUT4

OUT6

OUT8

External Power Supply

40 39

5 Vdc C1

5 Vdc C2

5 Vdc C3

5 Vdc C4

5 Vdc C5

24 Vdc C1

24 Vdc C2

24 Vdc C3

24 Vdc C4

24 Vdc C5

IN1

IN3

IN5

IN7

Common

OUT1

OUT3

OUT5

OUT7

Return

+ –

5 Vdc Counter

Input Signals

(C1...C5)

+ –

5 Vdc

To M11

24 Vdc Counter

Input Signals

(C1...C5)

+ –

24 Vdc

To M11

–

24 Vdc

Input Signals

(IN1...IN8)

24 Vdc

Output Signals

(OUT1...OUT8)

24 Vdc

1RWH

N / C = Not Connected.

Terminals 29 and 30 are common and are jumpered together.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

293

Intelligent/Special Purpose

I/O Configuration for 140EHC20200

Overview This section describes configuration of the 140EHC20200 high speed counter module which operates in pulse or quadrature mode and accepts single ended or differentiated inputs.

I/O Map Register

Assignment

The 140EHC20200 high speed counter requires six contiguous output (4X) and six contiguous input (3X) registers in the I/O map.

The 4X registers perform the same configuration tasks as the Modzoom screenassigned parameters. Also, the preset and the enable inputs connected to the field wiring terminal block perform the same functions as those software command z z control bits. When both methods are used to:

Preset a counter—the last preset executed has precedence.

Enable/disable a counter—it will only be enabled when both the hardware enable input and software enable control bit are in the enable state.

For simple applications, the zoom screens rather than the I/O mapped registers can be used to configure the module. Zoom screens are used only while the PLC is stopped. The selected parameters take effect when the PLC is set to run. For applications that require that module parameters be changed while the system is running, user logic can modify the I/O map-assigned registers to override the previously selected zoom parameters.

When using either zoom screens or I/O map registers, the maximum values specified in the Load Values Command section are the largest values that can be used by the module.

The I/O Mapped registers discussed in this section are

4x output registers that: z z z z

Preset and enable/disable input counters.

Load setpoint and maximum values to define output turn on points.

Set mode of operation, count, or rate sample.

Enable output switches and configures their mode of operation.

3X input registers that: z z z

Hold count or rate sample data.

Display field power status.

Echo 4X command data after the command is executed by the module.

294

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

EHC20200

Operations

Command 1

CONFIGURES the Module

Intelligent/Special Purpose z z z z

Four operations can be performed:

Command 1 CONFIGURES the Module

Command 2 LOADS VALUES

Command 3 READ INPUT COUNTER

Command 4 READS RATE SAMPLE or LAST INPUT COUNT BEFORE

PRESET

Each operation uses one or more of both types of registers assigned to the module.

In addition to the command definition byte, the first 4X register for all commands contain control bits to preset and enable/disable counters of either channel.

Command 1 uses three 4X registers and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure.

4X+1

4X+2

3X+1

3X+2

3X+3

3X+4

3X+5 z z

This command does the following: z z

Sets up the module for pulse or quadrature input.

Sets up the module for count or rate-sample mode. Counters cannot be separately configured.

Defines counter register length—16 or 32 bit.

Enables output assertion including module communication loss state. Output assertion is available if configured for two 16 bit, or one 32 bit counter. No output z assertion is available if two 32 bit counters are defined, or in rate-sample mode.

Defines output assertion point.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

295

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Command 2

LOAD VALUES

Command 3

READ INPUT

COUNTER

There are four formats for this command. It uses up to six 4X registers and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure.

4X+1

4X+2

4X+3

4X+4

4X+5

3X+1

3X+2

3X+3

3X+4

3X+5

Values loaded may be: z z z

Maximum count and setpoint (i.e., output turn on times).

Output assertion ON time duration (one input only).

Rate sample time interval.

Command 3 uses one 4X register and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure.

4X 3X

3X+1

3X+2

3X+3

3X+4

3X+5

296

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Command 4

READS RATE

SAMPLE or LAST

INPUT COUNT

BEFORE

PRESET

Command 4 uses one 4X register and six 3X registers as shown in the following figure.

4X 3X

3X+1

3X+2

3X+3

3X+4

3X+5

1RWH 4X register formats for the commands are described first. The 3X register contents after issuing Command 1 or 2 are listed after the 4X register description for Command 2, since the responses are the same for both. The 3X responses for

Commands 3 and 4 immediately follow those commands.

1RWH When Command 0 (4X = 00XX) or any other undefined commands are asserted in the 4X register, the 3X registers will contain the count inputs if in count mode (same as Command 3) and the rate sample values when in rate-sample mode (same as Command 4).

Command

Words Described

The following describes the command words and responses.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

297

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Command 1 -

CONFIGURE,

Output Register

Format

(4X = 01XX hex)

The following figure shows the 4x output register for command 1.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Preset Counter 1

1 = Enable Counter 1

1 = Disable Counter 1

1 = Preset Counter 2

1 = Enable Counter 2

1 = Disable Counter 2

Configure Command Bit

The following figure shows the 4x+1 output register for command 1 (4X+1).

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

0/1 = Pulse/Quadrature Input Counter 1

0/1 = Pulse/Quadrature Input Counter 2

Two 16 bit counters, Output Assertion ON

One 32 bit counter, Output Assertion ON

Two 16 bit counters, Output Assertion ON

Two 32 bit counters, Output Assertion OFF

0/1 = Rate Sample Mode OFF/ON

When = 1, automatically sets bits 11 and 12

(i.e., two 32 bit counters, no Output Assert)

0/1 = Comm Lost Output Assert OFF/ON

When = 0, if module communication with the bus is lost, outputs are disabled. When = 1, outputs continue to operate as configured.

298

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following figure shows the 4x+2 output register for command 1.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Output 2A Operating Mode

Output 2B Operating Mode

Output 1A Operating Mode

Output 1B Operating Mode

%LWV

000

001

010

011

100

101

110

111

0RGH

'HVFULSWLRQ

Disable Output

ON if Count = Setpoint

Latched ON if Count = Setpoint. Hardware RESET required to turn OFF

ON if Count = Maximum Count

Latched ON if Count = Maximum Count. Hardware RESET required to turn OFF

ON when Count = Setpoint for time specified in Command 2 register

ON when Count = Maximum Count for time specified in Command 2 register

Not Used

&$87,21

0RGXOHGLVDEOHSRVVLELOLW\

The Output ON time specified in the Command 2 registers may be used by only one of the four outputs. When more than one output is set to mode 5 or 6, the module firmware will operate the first one encountered, and disable the other outputs set to modes 5 or 6.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

299

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Command 2.

LOAD VALUES,

Output Register

Format

(4X = 02XX hex)

The LOAD VALUES 4X register format depends on the Counter/Rate Sample mode selected in Command 1, Register 4X+1, bits 11 and 12.

If configured for two 16 bit Counters, Output Assert ON, the following figures, which shows counters for registers 4X through 4X+5, are displayed.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Preset Counter 1

1 = Enable Counter 1

1 = Disable Counter 1

1 = Preset Counter 2

1 = Enable Counter 2

1 = Disable Counter 2

Load Values Command

Bit

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Maximum Count for Counter 1 (max = FFFF hex)

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

300

Setpoint for Counter 1 (max = FFFF hex)

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Maximum Count for Counter 2 (max = FFFF hex)

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Setpoint for Counter 2 (max = FFFF hex)

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Output Assert ON Time (milliseconds, max = 3FFF hex)

1RWH

Zero set into any 4X register means no change.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

If configured for one 32 bit Counter, Output Assert ON, the following figures, which show the counters for registers 4X through 4X+5, with low and high word, are displayed.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Preset Counter 1

1 = Enable Counter 1

1 = Disable Counter 1

1 = Preset Counter 2

1 = Enable Counter 2

1 = Disable Counter 2

Load Values Command

Bit

;/RZ:RUG

;+LJK:RUG

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Maximum Count for Counter 1 (max = 7FFFFFFF hex)

;/RZ:RUG

;+LJK:RUG

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Setpoint for Counter 1 (max = 7FFFFFFF hex)

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Output Assert ON Time (milliseconds, max = 3FFF hex)

1RWH Zero set into any 4X register pair for 32 bit values or any 4X register means no change.

301

Intelligent/Special Purpose

If configured for two 32 bit Counters - NO Output Assert, the following figures, which show the 4X through 4X+4 counters, with low and high word, are displayed.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Preset Counter 1

1 = Enable Counter 1

1 = Disable Counter 1

1 = Preset Counter 2

1 = Enable Counter 2

1 = Disable Counter 2

Load Values Command

Bit

;/RZ:RUG

;+LJK:RUG

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Maximum Count for Counter 1 (max = 7FFFFFFF hex)

;/RZ:RUG

;+LJK:RUG

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Maximum Count for Counter 2 (max = 7FFFFFFF hex)

1RWH Zero set into any 4X register pair for 32 bit values or any 4X register means no change.

302

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

If configured for Rate Sample Mode, the following figures, which show the 4X through 4X+2 counters, are displayed.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Preset Counter 1

1 = Enable Counter 1

1 = Disable Counter 1

1 = Preset Counter 2

1 = Enable Counter 2

1 = Disable Counter 2

Load Values Command

Bit

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Rate Sample Timer Value, Counter 1 (milliseconds, max = 3FFF hex)

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Rate Sample Timer Value, Counter 2 (milliseconds, max = 3FFF hex)

1RWH Zero set into any 4X register or any 4X register pair for 32 bit values means no change.

Command 1 and

Command 2

Response

Formats

The following figures show the 3X through 3X+5 response formats.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Configure or

Load Values

Command Byte

;WR;

echoes 4X+1 to 4X+4 register contents.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Field Power Lost

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

303

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Command 3,

READ INPUT

COUNTER,

Output Register

Format (4X =

03XX hex)

The following figure shows the 4X register for Command 3, READ INPUT

COUNTER, output register format.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Preset Counter 1

1 = Enable Counter 1

1 = Disable Counter 1

1 = Preset Counter 2

1 = Enable Counter 2

1 = Disable Counter 2

Read Counter Inputs Command Bits

Command 3

Response

Format

The following figure shows the Command 3 response format.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Read Counter Inputs

Command Byte

;DQG;

= Counter 1’s 16 or 32 bit Current Count.

;DQG; = Counter 2’s 16 or 32 bit Current Count.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Field Power Lost

Command 4,

READ RATE

SAMPLE or

READ LAST

COUNT VALUE

BEFORE MOST

RECENT

PRESET, Output

Register Format

(4X = 04XX hex)

The following figure shows the 4x counters for Command 4.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Preset Counter 1

1 = Enable Counter 1

1 = Disable Counter 1

1 = Preset Counter 2

1 = Enable Counter 2

1 = Disable Counter 2

Read Rate/Last Count

Command Bit

304

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Command 4

Response

Format

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following figures show the counters for 3X through 3X+5 for command 4.

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

I/O Map Status

Byte

;DQG; = Counter 1’s 32 bit Rate Sample / Last Count Before Preset.

;DQG;

= Counter 2’s 32 bit Rate Sample / Last Count Before Preset.

Read Rate Sample/

Last Count

Command Byte

;

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Field Power Lost

The most significant bit in the I/O Map status byte is used for the 140EHC20200

High Speed Counter Module. The following figure shows the map status byte register.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 = Internal Fuse Blown or External Output Supply Lost

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

305

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Using I/O

Mapped

Registers to

Operate the High

Speed Counter

COUNT UP Example

Field connections for this example are illustrated in the EHC202 wiring diagrams 1–

4 in this section. The maximum allowable Vref value is 30 Vdc. Input pulse on-off threshold levels for the 5 ... 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification table. The minimum differential input is 1.8 V.

The following user logic: z z z z z

Configures the module to count up from zero.

Turns an output on for one count at a setpoint value of 50.

Continues counting to 100.

Rolls over to zero and turn on a second output for one count.

Repeats the operation.

See

p. 319

for counter timing diagrams illustrating output on times.

The following table shows the I/O Map register assignments.

Module

140EHC20200

Input Ref

300001-300006

Output Ref

400001-400006

Description

EHC20200 High Speed

In this example, block moves are used to load the operating parameters into the module. This requires pre-defined tables be established. Register values are in HEX format.

Module

Configuration

The following table shows the module configurations.

400101

400102

400103

0140

0000

3100

CONFIGURE command, Disable Counter 2

Pulse input, two 16 bit counters, output assert on Rate Sample

OFF, disable outputs at bus communication loss

Output 1A on at setpoint, Output 1B on at maximum count +1

Output 2A and 2B are disabled

400104

400105

400106

0000

Not used by this command

306

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Load Values

Response for

Configuration

Command

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the load values.

400201 0243

400202

400203

400204

400205

400206

0064

0032

0000

LOAD VALUES command, disable Counter 2, preset and enable

Counter 1

Counter 1 maximum count, count after which Output 1B turns on

Counter 1 setpoint, count when Output 1A turns on

Counter 2 maximum count (not used in this example)

Counter 2 setpoint (not used in this example)

Output Assert Time (Not used in this example, one output only, if used)

Zeros in the 4X registers also mean no change. Setpoint, maximum count and assert time can only be set to zero using the Modzoom screens. When the registers in this example are echoed, zeros will appear but the actual content in the module will be unchanged from previous values. In this example, Counter 2 is disabled and its outputs and timed assert have not been selected. Registers 400204 - 6 have no meaning.

After the module executes the Configure and Load Value’s commands, they are echoed in the I/O mapped 3X registers except for the command register’s low 8 bits.

Command execution time by the module is 1 ms. Actual time between the 4X register block move and the echo response display in the 3X registers is dependent on User Logic and hardware configuration. An echo of the Configuration command registers would appear as follows:

The following table shows the echo response for the configuration command.

Register

300001

300002

300003

300004

300005

300006

Value

0100

0000

3100

0000

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

307

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Read Input

Counter

Command

3x Register

Content

The following table shows the read input registers.

READ INPUT COUNTER command 40301

40302

40303

40304

40305

40306

0300

0000

Not used by this command

When this command is issued, the content of the input pulse counter is retrieved.

The 3X register content would appear as shown in the following table.

Register

300001

300002

300003

Value

0300

XXXX

0000

300004

300005

300006

0000

0X00

Description

Command echo

Current input count

Zeros as the count will not exceed 100. For counts above 65,536, this register is a multiplier. As an example: 30002 has a value of 324 and

30003 a value of 3.The total count is (65,536 x 3) + 324 = 196,932

Counter 2 is disabled

X is the field power indicator

Reset of Latched

Outputs

If register 400103 in the Module Configuration Table has been set to 4200, Output

1A would have been latched on at setpoint and Output 1B latched on at maximum count. Wiring Diagrams 2 and 4 show how the encoder Z outputs could be used to reset the latched outputs. The minimum pulse width to reset outputs is 1 μ s.

308

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

User Logic

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The User Logic illustrated accomplishes the module’s configuration and then causes the input counter to be displayed after the first three successive scans by the PLC when it is in RUN mode.The following figure shows the module’s configuration in

RUN mode.

Load Configuration

400101

/RDG&RQILJXUDWLRQ'RQH

000010 000010

400001

BLKM

#00006

000010

000011

Load Values

400201

400001

BLKM

#00006

000012

Read Counter

400301

400001

BLKM

#00006

Check Configuration

300001

#00256

TEST

#00001

000011

Check Load Values Echo

300001

#00512

TEST

#00001

000012

&RQILJXUDWLRQ'RQH

/RDG9DOXHV'RQH

309

Intelligent/Special Purpose

COUNT DOWN

Example

RATE SAMPLE

Example for

Either Pulse or

Quadrature Input

Field connections for this example are illustrated in Wiring Diagrams1–4. The connections on terminals 15 and 16 are optional, depending on the use requirements of the outputs. Terminals 39 and 40 always require the 24 Vdc supply connections. The maximum allowable Vref value is 30 Vdc. Input pulse on-off threshold levels for the 5 ... 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification table. The minimum differential input is 1.8 V.

As with count examples, tables are set up and transferred to the module using block moves. The User Logic for Rate Sample is the same as that used for Pulse Input

Count Up/Down.

Module

Configuration

The COUNT DOWN example uses the same wiring as in the count up example, except the Input 1B+ level is changed to common (connected to Vref-) for Pulse

Inputs illustrated in Wiring Diagrams 1 and 2. For Quadrature Inputs, no wiring change is required as the count direction is decoded internally by sensing the phase shift change between inputs A and B.

The User Logic is the same as for the count example. The actual operation of the module is different in that the output associated with maximum count turns on after zero count has been reached.

The example configures the module to decrement the input count from the maximum value, turn on an output at a setpoint value of 50, and turn on a second output after the input counter had reached zero and rolled over to the maximum count; the operation is then repeated. The initial loading of the maximum count will not cause its associated output to turn on.

The following table shows the module configurations.

400101

400102

400103

400104

400105

400106

0140

1000

0000

CONFIGURE command, Disable Counter 2

Pulse input, Rate Sample ON, disable outputs at bus communication loss (Note: Bits 11 and 12 were not required.)

Not used by this command

310

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Load Values

Read Rate

Sample

Response to

Read Rate

Sample

Command

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the load values.

400201 0243 LOAD VALUES command, disable Counter 2, preset and enable Counter 1

400202 XXXX Counter 1 Rate Sample Time in milliseconds

400203 0000 Counter 2 Rate Sample Time in milliseconds (Not used in this example)

400204 0000 Not used by this command

400205 0000

400206 0000

1RWH Command echoes are the same as described in the Pulse Input Count Up/

Down examples.

The following table shows a read rate sample.

READ INPUT COUNTER command 40030

400302

400303

400304

400305

400306

0400

0000

Not used by this command

When this command is issued, the input pulse counter content is retrieved. The 3X register content is the count over the time period selected in the Load Values registers 4X + 1 and 4X + 2. The 3X response to the Read-Rate Sample command in register 40301 is as follows.

The following table shows the responses to the read rate sample command.

Register

300001

300002

300003

300004

300005

300006

Value

0400

XXXX

0000

0X00

Description

Command echo

Counter 1 Input rate low word

Counter 1 Input rate high word: this register is a multiplier. As an example: 30002 has a value of 324 and 30003 a value of 3. The total count is (65,536 x 3) + 324 = 196,932

Counter 2 is disabled

X is the field power indicator

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

311

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Rate Sample

Mode Caution

If a version 02.00 or higher module replaces a module which has a version number less than 02.00 in a Rate Sample mode application, extra software configuration may be required.

Rate Sample mode is set using Command 1, CONFIGURE (01XX), 4X+1 register, bit 13 = 1 (see the description of Command 1 in this section).

1RWH To verify the version of the module, reference the indicated label found on the top front of the module.

The following figure shows the module’s label.

High Speed CTR 2CH

500KHz 02.00

Note: Modules labeled with

PV and SV designations are newer than 02.00 marked models

In modules prior to V02.00, when Rate Sample mode was selected, input was always handled as if it were generated by a pulse encoder. For example, 60 count per revolution encoders, either pulse or quadrature types, would give a rate of 60 for a one-second revolution when the interval was set for one second.

Users are cautioned that beginning with V2.00 modules, if a quadrature type encoder is used to provide count input and Pulse/Quadrature Input Counter 1 and

2, bits 9 or 10, are set to 1, the module will detect all edges. The result is four times the rate sample value as would be accumulated with an equivalent pulse encoder input. In the example in the above paragraph, the rate sample would be equal to

240.

Encoder type selection is set using Command 1, CONFIGURE (01XX), 4X+1 register, bits 9 or 10 (see the description of Command 1 in this section).

If the Encoder Type select bits are set to 0, either type of encoder will produce the

Rate Sample, as did versions of the module that were lower than V02.00.

312

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Wiring Diagram 1 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 1.

INPUT 1A+

. . . .

VREF

INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

2 1

4 3

INPUT 1B+

Pulse

PRESET 1C-

6 5

PRESET 1C+

8 7

OUTPUT RESET 10+

–

VREF

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

N/C

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

19 N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C

OUTPUT 2A

34 33

36 35

LO FILTER SEL 2

OUTPUT SUPPLY

40 39

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

+ –

24 Vdc

1RWH

Notes on Wiring Diagram 1.

Single ended pulse input.

Constant enable.

Count up.

Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays.

Counter 2 not used.

N/C = Not Connected.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

313

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Wiring Diagram 2 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 2.

INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

INPUT

INPUT B1+ A+

A-

PRESET 1C+

OUTPUT RESET 10+

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C

OUTPUT 2A

34 33

36 35

LO FILTER SEL 2

OUTPUT SUPPLY

40 39

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

+ –

24 Vdc

1.8 V

MIN

–

VREF

–

1RWH Notes on Wiring Diagram 2

Differential pulse input.

Constant enable.

Zero pulse resets outputs 1A and 1B.

Count up.

Outputs a and B operate relays.

Counter 2 not used.

N/C = Not Connected.

314

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Wiring Diagram 3 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 3.

INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

INPUT 1A+

INPUT 1B+

PRESET 1C+

OUTPUT RESET 10+

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C 20

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

19 N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C 34

OUTPUT 2A

LO FILTER SEL 2

OUTPUT SUPPLY

38 37

40 39

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

+ –

24 Vdc

–

VREF

–

1RWH

Notes on Wiring Diagram 3

Quadrature input.

Constant enable.

Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays.

Counter 2 not used

N/C = Not Connected.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

315

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Wiring Diagram 4 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 4.

– INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

INPUT 1A+

INPUT 1B+

PRESET 1C+

OUTPUT RESET 10+

N/C

ENABLE 1-

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL

N/C

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C

OUTPUT 2A

34 33

36 35

LO FILTER SEL 2

OUTPUT SUPPLY

40 39

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETUR

+ –

24 Vdc

VREF

– z z z z z z

1RWH Notes on Diagram 4.

Differential quadrature input.

Constant enable.

Zero pulse reset Output 1A and 1B.

Output 1A and 1B operate relays.

Counter 2 not used.

N/C = Not Connected.

316

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Module Zoom

Selections

Push <Enter> to display and select applicable parameters.

The following figure shows the module zoom selections.

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Counter X mode control: Incremental

Quadrature

Number of counters, output assertion:

Comm lost output assert override:

2x16 w/ Output

2x32 w/ Output

2x32 No Output

Rate Sample Mode

Off

Note: When OFF, outputs are disabled when communication with the bus is lost. When

ON, outputs continue to operate as configured.

Counter X output mode

Output Coil X mode:

Setpoint

Latched Setpoint

Terminal Count

Latched Terminal

Timed Setpoint

Timed Terminal

Note: Only one output should be configured as timed (Setpoint or

Terminal).

Number of counters, output assertion: 2x16 Assert Outp

2x32 Assert Outp

2x32 No Assert

Rate Sample Mode

The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 2x16, Output Assert Mode:

Counter X Maximum Count:

Counter X Setpoint (alarm):

Time Output On:

* 0 DEC

0 DEC milliseconds (16383 maximum)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

317

Intelligent/Special Purpose

*Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module.

The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 1x32, Output Assert Mode:

Counter 2 Maximum Count:

Counter 2 Setpoint (alarm):

Time Output On:

* 0 DEC

0 DEC milliseconds (16383 maximum)

*Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module.

The following figure shows the number of counters in output assertion.

Number of counters, output assertion: 2x16 Assert Outp

2x32 Assert Outp

2x32 No Assert

Rate Sample Mode

The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 2x32, No Output Assert Mode:

Words 2-3: Counter 1 Maximum Count:

Words 4-5: Counter 2 Maximum Count:

* 0 DEC

*Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module.

The next line applies ONLY IF the counter is in Rate Sample Mode:

Rate Sample Timer X: 0 DEC milliseconds (65535 maximum)

1RWH Any 1XPEHURIFRXQWHUVRXWSXWDVVHUWLRQ selection pop-up menu can be used as they reflect each other.

318

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module

Overview The EHC20200 offers the following features: z Two counters that operate in pulse or quadrature mode and accept single- ended or differential inputs.

z Two FET output switches for each counter — turned on when the counter reaches programmed setpoint or maximum values, and turned off by changes in counter values, software commands, or a hard wired reset from the field.

See

p. 294 for configuring and operating the EHC20200 with Modsoft.

EHC20200 High

Speed Counter

Module

The following figure shows the EHC20200 Two Channel High Speed Counter module.

LED Area

(+&

10 80 vdc out

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Field Wiring

Terminal Strip

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside the door)

Removable Door

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

319

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the EHC20200 High Speed Counter module.

Specifications

Number of Channels

LEDs

Count Frequency

Registers Required

2 with 2 outputs each

Active

8 Input Status LEDs (Green)

4 Output Status LEDs (Green)

500 kHz max with differential inputs. 250 kHz max with single-ended inputs.

6 Words In

6 Words Out

Data Formats

16 Bit Counter

32 Bit Counter

Discrete Inputs

Operation Modes

65,535 Decimal

2,147,483,647 Decimal

Incremental

Quadrature

Max Continuous Input Voltage 30 Vdc

Input Threshold

Single Ended Mode

VREF Supply

+ 5 Vdc

+ 12 Vdc

+ 24 Vdc

On State (Vdc)

0 ... 2.0

0 ... 5.0

0 ... 11.0

Off State (Vdc)

3.5 ... 5.0

7.0 ... 12.0

13.0 ... 24.0

Differential Mode (Minimum)

Input Resistance

Discrete Outputs

Output Levels (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B)

1.8 Vdc

10 k

FET Switch ON

FET Switch OFF

Supply - 0.4 Vdc

0 Vdc (ground reference)

Max Load Current (each output) 0.5 A

Output Off State Leakage 0.4 mA max @ 30 Vdc

Output On State Voltage Drop 0.4 Vdc @ 0.5 A

Output Protection 36 V transorb for transient voltage suppression

Miscellaneous

Isolation (Channel to Bus) 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

320

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Specifications

Fault Detection

Power Dissipation

Bus Current Required

Blown fuse detect, loss of outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B field power

4.0 W + 0.4 x total module load current

650 mA

External 24 Vdc Power Supply 19.2 ... 30 Vdc, 24 Vdc nominal, 50 mA required, plus the load current for each output

Fusing Internal: 2.5 A fuse, (Part # 043503948 or equivalent)

External: User discretion

Compatibility Programming Software: Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum

Quantum Controllers: All, V2.0 at a minimum

Fuse Location The following figure shows the fuse location.

Fuse

Location

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

1RWH Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to the fuse.

321

Intelligent/Special Purpose

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC20200 High Speed

Counter module.

Active

In 1

En 1

Pre C1

Res 01

Out 1A

Out 1B

In 2

En 2

Pre C2

Res 02

Out 2A

Out 2B

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC20200 high speed counter.

In 2

En 2

Pre C2

Res 02

Out 1A

Out 1B

Out 2A

Out 2B

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Active

Green

Red

In 1

En 1

Pre C1

Res 01

Green

Indication when On

Bus communication is present

Indicates internal fuse blown or loss of output power supply

Counter 1 input

Enable Counter 1 input

Preset Counter 1 input

Reset Output 1A, 1B

Counter 2 input

Enable Counter 2 input

Preset Counter 2 input

Reset Output 2A, 2B

Counter 1A output

Counter 1B output

Counter 2A output

Counter 2B output

322

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Controlling the

Module

Hardware inputs from the field can be used to: z Increment/decrement the input counters with serial pulses from encoders or other z z square wave sources.

Set direction of count.

Reset the outputs.

Hardware inputs from the field and software commands are used together to: z z z z z z z z z z Enable the count input.

Hardware inputs from the field or software commands can be used to:

Preset the input counter to zero or maximum count.

Software commands can be used to:

Configure the counters for pulse (tachometer) or quadrature mode.

Configure for 16 or 32 bit counters, with or without output assertion.

Configure the module to operate in either count or rate-sample mode.

Option for outputs to operate or not operate if backplane bus communication is z lost (i.e., a fault condition).

Option for outputs to switch on when setpoint and/or maximum values are reached.

Define the setpoint and maximum count values.

Define ON time for outputs.

Disable outputs.

Read the input counter totalizing or rate sample values.

Retrieve the old (previous) input counter value after the counter has been preset.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

323

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Timing Diagrams and Parameters

This section includes timing diagrams and parameters for the 140EHC20200 counter modules. Timing diagrams and a timing parameter table for the

140EHC20200 counter module are shown below.

EHC20200 Timing Diagrams

Tpw 1

Count Input

Thold

Tst

Enable

Tpw 2 Tst

Preset

Tpw 1 Tst

Reset

Tdly2

Tdly1

Output Assertion

The following table shows the EHC20200 timing parameters.

Tdly1

Tdly2

Tpw1

Tpw2

Tst

Thold

Timing Parameters

Count to Output Assertion Delay (MAX)

Preset/Reset to Output Delay (MAX)

Limits

Filter

200 Hz

4.8 ms

Count/Reset Pulse Width (MIN)

Preset Pulse Width (MIN)

2.5 ms

Enable/Reset/Preset to Count Setup Time (MIN) 2.5 ms

Enable/Reset to Count Hold Time (MIN) 2.5 ms

No Filter

500 khz

μ s

40 μ s

μ s

500

μ s

Module

Functions

1RWH The timing parameter limits are measures at the module field terminal connector at the logic low threshold level.

The following functions apply to the EHC202 high speed counter module.

324

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

COUNT UP

COUNT DOWN

REMOVE

ENABLE

OUTPUTS

COUNTER

PRESET

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The input counter is reset to zero if the count direction input is UP and a preset

(hardware or software) or Load Value command is sent to the module.

When counting in the UP direction, the input counter increments to the maximum value, the next input pulse sets the counter to zero and it continues counting back up to the maximum value.

The input counter is set to maximum count if the count direction is down and a preset

(hardware or software) or Load Value command is sent to the module.

When counting in the DOWN direction, the input counter is decremented from the maximum value to zero. The next pulse resets the input counter to the Maximum value and the increment down starts again.

This function disables the input counter, causing it to stop incrementing and hold the count accumulated prior to disabling.

When configured in the count mode, outputs will turn on for defined times when setpoints or maximum values have been reached.

No output assertion in two 32 bit counter mode or rate sample.

Programmed ON time for outputs can be set for one channel, one output and one trigger point only.

In a running controller, latched outputs are turned off only by a hardware RESET input. If no reset is provided, the outputs latched on will turn off when the controller is stopped.

This is both a hardware and software function. In the event that both methods are used, the last one executed has precedence. An input counter will be automatically preset whenever a new maximum value or rate sample time is loaded.

COUNTER

ENABLE

RATE SAMPLE

VALUE

Both hardware and software enables are required for an input counter to operate.

An input counter will be automatically software enabled whenever a new maximum value is loaded or a preset (hardware or software) is sent to it.

The rate sample value is held and may be accessed during count operations. The value read is from the last configured and completed rate sample interval.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

325

Intelligent/Special Purpose

QUADRATURE

MODE

Miscellaneous

Information

When the module is configured for quadrature mode operation, the counter requires encoder pulses on inputs A and B.

In quadrature mode, all input signal edges are counted. A 60 count/revolution encoder will produce a count of 240 for one shaft rotation.

Field wire to Counter 2 inputs and outputs, when configured for one 32 bit counter with output assertion. The unused Counter 1 must have its + (plus) inputs connected to VREF+.

Input counts and parameters are not maintained in the module at power down. The rewrite of parameters at power up must be done with either user logic or Modzoomtype preset panel selections.

The 200 Hz filter for each counter can be activated by strapping the Lo Filter Sel terminal to the Return terminal. This function provides noise immunity for low frequency applications and can also be used for relay debounce.

Operation

Rate Sample

Pulse Count

The following information describes the operation of various module functions.

z z z z

To rate sample, the module must be:

Configured for pulse or quadrature mode.

Configured for Rate Sample mode.

Loaded with the Rate Sample time value.

Enabled to count, using hardwired input and software control bits.

z z z z

To count pulses, the module must be:

Configured for pulse or quadrature mode.

Configured for counter display: two 16 bit, one 32 bit, or two 32 bit counters.

Loaded with the maximum count.

Enabled to count, using hardwired input and software control bits.

Pulse Count and

Turning Outputs

On/Off z z z z z

To count pulses and turn outputs on and off, the module must be:

Configured for pulse or quadrature mode.

Configured for two 16 bit or one 32 bit counter.

Configured to assert or not assert outputs at the programmed count values when the module loses communication with the bus (fault condition).

z Configured to specify if outputs turn on at a setpoint or maximum count, turn on at those points for a specific amount of time, or remain latched. If latched, outputs can only be reset by a hard wired input.

Loaded with setpoint values, maximum count values, and output assert time.

Enabled to count using hardwired input and software control bits.

326

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Counter Rollover

Examples for

Pulse Input

([DPSOH&RXQW8S

3XOVH,QSXW

,QSXW&RXQWHU

2XWSXW$

2XWSXW%

Count is from 0 -> 10 (Maximum Count)

Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5

Output B turns on after Input Count = Maximum (Terminal) Count = 10

([DPSOH&RXQW'RZQ

3XOVH,QSXW

,QSXW&RXQWHU

2XWSXW$

2XWSXW%

Count is from 10 (Maximum Count) -> 0

Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5

Output B turns on after Input Count = 0

1RWH Outputs are not latched.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

327

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Counter Rollover

Examples for

Quadrature Input

([DPSOH&RXQW8S

,QSXW$

,QSXW%

,QSXW

&RXQWHU

2XWSXW$

2XWSXW%

Count is from 0 -> 10 (Maximum Count)

Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5. Output B turns on after Input Count = Maximum

(Terminal) Count = 10

([DPSOH&RXQW'RZQ

,QSXW$

,QSXW%

,QSXW

&RXQWHU

2XWSXW$

2XWSXW%

Count is from 10 (Maximum Count) -> 0

Output A turns on at Setpoint = 5

Output B turns on after Input Count = 0

1RWH Outputs are not latched.

328

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Wiring Diagram

Signal

Descriptions

The following table shows the wiring diagram for signal descriptions.

Parameter Description/Usage

INPUT A Single ended or differential count input or Phase A for quadrature mode.

INPUT B

Single ended (active low only) uses Input 1A+ and/or Input 2A+.

Input 1A- and/or Input 2A- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.

Direction level for non-quadrature devices or Phase B for quadrature mode.

Direction inputs for non-quadrature input devices are:

Count Up = High Voltage Level

Count Down = Low Voltage Level

For single ended Input devices, only Input 1B+ and/or Input 2B+ are used. Input

1B- and 2B- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus (+) and minus (-) inputs.

PRESET C Presets count register(s). Low level causes preset.

OUTPUT

RESET 0

For single ended Preset inputs, only Preset 1C+ and/or Preset 2B+ are used.

Preset 1C- and 2C- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus

(+) and minus (-) inputs.

Low level resets Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B to OFF if latched.

ENABLE

For single ended Reset inputs, only Reset 10+ and/or Reset 20+ are used.

Reset 10- and 20- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus

(+) and minus (-) inputs.

Low level enables counting.

VREF

For single ended Enable inputs, only Enable 1+ and/or Enable 2+ are used.

Enable 1- and 2- are not connected. Differential input encoders use both plus

(+) and minus (-) inputs.

Field input device power source connection. Also, connect any unused (+) inputs to the group VREF terminal or the one in use (30 Vdc max).

Group A = Terminal 17

Group B = Terminal 37

Group A and Group B VREF supplies can be different voltage levels.

LO FILTER

SEL

Enables the internal 200 Hz filter when connected to Return Terminal 39.

OUTPUT

POWER

SUPPLY

Internal FET switches connect the output supply wired to Terminal 40 to the

Output 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B terminals at output assert times.

External 24 Vdc power supply (+) connection. Required for the module interface and for Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B.

RETURN External 24 Vdc power supply (-) connection. Required for the module interface and for Outputs 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

329

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140EHC20200 wiring diagram.

INPUT 1A-

INPUT 1B-

PRESET 1C-

OUTPUT RESET 10-

......

INPUT 1A+

INPUT 1B+

PRESET 1C+

OUTPUT RESET 10+

N/C 10

ENABLE 1-

N/C

ENABLE 1+

N/C

OUTPUT 1A

LO FILTER SEL 1

N/C 20

INPUT 2A-

INPUT 2B-

PRESET 2C-

OUTPUT RESET 20-

N/C

OUTPUT 1B

VREF1

19 N/C

INPUT 2A+

INPUT 2B+

PRESET 2C+

OUTPUT RESET 20+

N/C

ENABLE 2-

N/C

ENABLE 2+

N/C 34

OUTPUT 2A

LO FILTER SEL 2

POWER SUPPLY

40 39

N/C

OUTPUT 2B

VREF2

RETURN

+ –

VREF

24 Vdc

Pulse

–

VREF

330

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The preceding wiring diagram shows single ended connections for:.

Terminal 1

Terminal 3

Terminal 5

Terminal 7

Terminal 11

Pulse encoder input (sinking device)

Input 1B count UP direction

Unused hardwire Preset tied high

Output Reset tied high, not required; outputs not used

Hardware enabled (software enable also required using predefined

Modzoom or 4X register

Required Vref+ connection

Counter 2 not used. These terminals must be connected VREF+.

Terminal 17

Terminal 21

Terminal 23

Terminal 25

Terminal 27

Terminal 31

Terminal 37

Terminal 39

Terminal 40

Required Output Supply Return

Required Output Supply

See

p. 294 for both differential pulse encoder input and single ended or differential

quadrature encoder input wiring diagrams.

331

Intelligent/Special Purpose

140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module

Overview

Related

Documentation

ASCII Interface

Module

The ASCII Interface Two Channel module is a Quantum communications interface z z z module used to:

Input messages and/or data from an ASCII device to the CPU.

Output messages and/or data from the CPU to an ASCII device.

Bi-directionally exchange messages and/or data between an ASCII device and the CPU.

For more detailed information on use of the ASCII interface module, refer to the

Quantum Automation Series 140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module User Guide

(840 USE 108 00).

The following figure shows the ESI06210 ASCII interface module components.

LED Area

(6,

10 80 vdc

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Removable Door

RS-232

Port 1/Port 0

Reset Button

RS-232 Port 2

Reset

Port 2

RS232C

332

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the specifications for the ASCII interface two channel module.

Specifications

Data Interface

RS-232C 2 serial ports (9-pin D-shell), non-isolated

Cabling (Maximum cable length

20 m shielded)

990NAA26320, Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232, 12 ft. (2.7 m)

990NAA26350, Modbus Programming Cable, RS-232, 50 ft. (15.5 m)

Firmware Specifications

Port Performance

Depth of Nested Messages

Buffer Size

Number of Messages

Maximum Message Length

Burst Speed: 19.2 k baud each port. Continuous Speed:

Application dependent

255 Input. 255 Output

255

127 characters plus 1 checksum

Memory

RAM

Flash-ROM

Power Dissipation

Bus Current Required

Fusing

Internal

External

Required Addressing

256 kb for data and program + 2 kb dual port ram

128 kb for program and firmware

2 W max

300 mA

None

User discretion

12 Words In

12 Words Out

Compatibility

Programming Software

Data Formats Supported

Quantum Controllers

Battery Backup Module

Modsoft V2.4 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum

Text, Decimal, Fixed Point, Nested Write Message, Set

Newline, Control Code, Flush Buffer

All, Executive V2.0 at a minimum

140XCP90000

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

333

Intelligent/Special Purpose

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the ESI06210 LED indicators.

Rx1

Tx1

Active

Error 1

Rx2

Tx2

Error 2

Status

The following table shows the ESI06210 LED descriptions.

Rx1

Tx1

Rx2

Tx2

LEDs

Active

Status

Error 1

Error 2

Color

Green

Red

Green

Yellow

Red

Indication when On

The module has passed powerup diagnostics

Bus communication is present

The module has detected a fault

Received data on RS-232C Port 1

Transmitted data on RS-232C Port 1

Received data on RS-232C Port 2

Transmitted data on RS-232C Port 2

Status

There is an error condition on Port 1

There is an error condition on Port 2

334

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

LED Blinking

Sequence

Status LED

Crash Codes

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the blinking sequence of the F, Status, Error 1, and Error

2 LEDs.

LEDs and Blinking Sequence

F Status Error 1 Error 2 Description

F Status

OFF ON

Error 1

OFF

Error 2

OFF

Description

Programming mode

OFF

N/A Blinking

(See the next table)

N/A

OFF

N/A

OFF

Serial Port 1 incurred a buffer overrun

Serial Port 2 incurred a buffer overrun

The ASCII module is in kernal mode and may have an error

The following table shows a table of Status LED crash codes.

Code (in hex) Error

Number of Blinks

(one per second)

Steady

0000

6631

6503

6402

6300

6301

630A

630B

8000

8001

8002

8003

Requested kernal mode

Bad micro controller interrupt

RAM address test error

RAM data test error

PROM checksum error (EXEC not loaded)

PROM checksum error

Flash-message checksum error

Executive watchdog timeout error

Kernal other error

Kernal PROM checksum error

Flash program error

Unexpected executive return

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

335

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Front Panel

Connectors and

Switches

The ESI has two serial ports which it uses to communicate with serial devices. The following is the pinout connections for the ASCII module serial ports.

7 Connection

No Connection

RS-232C Serial

Ports

The following table shows the pin number and description for the RS-232C serial ports.

Pin Number

Shield

Signal Name

DCD

RXD

TXD

N/A

GND

N/A

RTS

N/A

Description

Carrier Detect

Receive Data

Transmit Data

Not Connected

Signal Ground

Not Connected

Request to Send

Not Connected

Chassis Ground

The serial port interface allows the user to configure the module and to program the

ASCII messages into the module. This is only activated when the module enters into its programming mode via the front panel push button.

1RWH The serial port is capable of communicating with either a dumb terminal or a

PC using terminal emulation software (i.e., PROCOMM).

336

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Serial Port Setup When programming mode is entered, one of the RS-232 serial ports is set to a standard terminal communication’s configuration to communicate with the user on the programming terminal via a Modbus. This communication configuration consists of the following.

Baud rate:

Data bits:

Stop bits:

Parity bit:

Keyboard Mode:

XON/XOFF:

9600

None (disabled)

ON (Character echo)

The serial port configuration has been set this way so that the configuration of the port is a known configuration and may or may not be the same configuration that is used when the module is running.

Front Panel

Reset Push

Button

A recessed push button on the front of the module is used to reset the module.

5(6(7

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

337

Intelligent/Special Purpose

140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module

Overview

Related

Documentation

The High Speed Latch and Interrupt 24 Vdc 16x1 Sink/Source Input module accepts

24 Vdc inputs and is for use with 24 Vdc sink/source input devices.

For more detailed information on the use of a Quantum High Speed Interrupt module, refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140HLI34000 High Speed

Interrupt I/O Module User Guide (840 USE 112 00).

High Speed

Interrupt Module

The following figure shows the components of the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module.

LED Area

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Field Wiring

Terminal Strip

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside the door)

Part #31000207

Removable Door

338

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the specifications for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points

LEDs

Required Addressing

Operating Voltages and Currents

16 isolated points

Active 1 ... 16 (Green) - Indicates point status

1 Word In

ON (voltage)

OFF (voltage)

15 ... 30 Vdc

-3 ... +5 Vdc

ON (current)

OFF (current)

Absolute Maximum Input

Continuous

2.0 ... 8.0 mA

0 ... 0.5 mA

30 Vdc

Response

OFF - ON

ON - OFF

Input Protection

Isolation

Point to Point

Point to Bus

Fault Detection

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

External Power

Fusing

Internal

External

130 s (max)

30 Vdc reverse polarity

500 Vac rms for 1 minute

1780 Vac rms for 1 minute

None

400 mA

2.0 W + 0.30 W x the number of points on

Not required for this module

None s (max)

User discretion

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

339

Intelligent/Special Purpose

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module.

ACTIVE

The following table shows the LED descriptions for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Active

1 ... 16

Green

Indication when On

Bus communication is present.

The indicated point or channel is turned on.

1RWH

Due to the speed of the module, LED indications do not represent the state of the input signal, when the input signal is a short duration pulse.

340

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the HLI 340 00 High Speed

Interrupt module.

24 Vdc

−

–

24 Vdc

INPUT 1(+)

INPUT 2(+)

INPUT 3(+)

INPUT 4(+)

INPUT 1(-)

INPUT 2(-)

INPUT 3(-)

INPUT 4(-)

Sourcing Field Device N/C

INPUT 5(+)

INPUT 6(+)

INPUT 7(+)

INPUT 8(+)

INPUT 6(-)

INPUT 7(-)

INPUT 8(-)

N/C

INPUT 5(-)

N/C

INPUT 9(+)

INPUT 10(+)

INPUT 11(+)

INPUT 12(+)

19 N/C

INPUT 9(-)

INPUT 10(-)

INPUT 11(-)

INPUT 12(-)

N/C

INPUT 13(+)

INPUT 14(+)

INPUT 15(+)

INPUT 16(+)

N/C

INPUT 13(-)

INPUT 14(-)

INPUT 15(-)

INPUT 16(-)

N/C 40 39 N/C

Sinking Field Device

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

1RWH

Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used (the user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment). Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end.

N / C = Not Connected

341

Intelligent/Special Purpose

140MSB/MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules

Overview

Related

Documentation

MSX Motion

Modules

The Quantum single axis motion (MSX) modules are incremental encoder

(140MSB10100) or resolver and encoder (140MSB/MSC10100) feedback-only modules contained in a single-width housing. It works with servo motors that use

Cyberline drives and other types of DC and brushless drives from other manufacturers.

For detailed information on the use of MSX motion modules, refer to the Quantum

Automation Series 140MSX10100 Single Axis Motion Module Reference Guide

(840 USE 105 00).

The following figure shows the components of the MSX motion modules.

LED Area

06%

10 80 vdc out

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable Door

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside door)

Modbus

Connector

Servo Port

Connector

342

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Operational

Specifications

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the operational specifications for the servo.

Servo

Commutation Update Rate

Velocity Loop Update Rate

Velocity Loop Bandwidth

Velocity Range

Position Loop Update rate

Position Accuracy - Resolver

Position Repeatability - Resolver

Position Accuracy - Encoder

0.25 ms

0.5 ms

> 100 Hz

0 - 6000 rpm

1 ms

+/- 10 arc minutes typical, +/- 15 arc minutes max

+/- 5 arc minutes max

Encoder dependent, 0.5 arc minutes max

The following table shows the operations specifications for communication.

Communication

Protocol

Address (set by software)

Required Addressing

Baud Rate (set by software)

Modbus

1 default

6 Words In, 6 Words Out

300 - 19200 baud, 9600 default

The following table shows the operational specifications for the application program.

Application Program

Execution Rate

Storage

See note below

650 instructions

1RWH A majority of the instructions typically take 1 ms to execute. The execution time of an instruction, though, is not constant. The execution time can increase due to factors such as: if the Sync Ratio Mode is on, how often the position generator must execute to plan out new moves, how many "whenever"s are enabled, and the number of sources requesting commands to be executed (e.g., backplane, internal program, Modbus port), etc. If timing is extremely critical to an application, actual time must be determined experimentally by running the actual application program.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

343

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the operational specifications for high speed input.

High Speed Input

Position Capture Time

Isolation

Pulse Width

Minimum Time Between Successive Captures

250

μ s max

500 V to system bus

μ s

20 ms

The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete inputs.

Discrete Inputs

Number

Scan Time

Isolation

1.5 ms

500 V to system bus

The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete outputs.

Discrete Outputs

Number

Update Time

Isolation

Reset State

On State

Output Type

Protection

Fault

10 ms max

500 V to system bus

0 V, nominal

24 V, nominal

Totem pole (sink/source)

Short circuit, overvoltage

Overcurrent detected

The following table shows the operational specifications for analog input.

Analog Input

Number

Scan Time

Data

Range

Accuracy

15 ms

User configurable

+/- 10 V

+/- 100 mV, plus offset

344

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the operational specifications for analog output.

Analog Output

Number

Scan Time

Data

Range

Accuracy

20 ms

User configurable

+/- 10 V

+/- 50 mV, plus offset

The following table shows the operational specifications for the resolver feedback

(fully configured version).

Resolver Feedback (Fully Configured Version)

Conversion Method Tracking

Resolver Style

Excitation Frequency

Transmit

5 kHz

Excitation Amplitude

Excitation Current

Loss of Feedback

Automatically adjusted

120 mA

Detected within 40 ms

The following table shows the operational specifications for the incremental encoder feedback.

Incremental Encoder Feedback

Resolution 4 times line count

Signals

Signal Frequency

A, B, Mark

200 kHz, up to 500 kHz with reduced noise immunity

Encoder Output style

Loss of Feedback

Differential, 5 V

Detected within 40 ms

The following table shows the operational specifications for compatibility.

Compatibility

Programming Software

Quantum Controllers

Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum

All, V2.0 at a minimum

345

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Electrical

Specifications

The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete inputs and high speed input.

Discrete Inputs and High Speed Input

Input Impedance

Inputs On

3.5 k

15 Vdc min

Inputs Off

Isolation

5 Vdc max

500 Vac to system bus

The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete output.

Discrete Output

Drive Capability

Protection

Isolation

150 mA at user supplied. 19.2 ... 30 Vdc resistive

Current limit, thermal

500 Vac to system bus

The following table shows the electrical specifications for analog input.

Analog Input

Resolution

Input Impedance

Offset

Accuracy

10 bits

30 k

+/- 50 mV

+/- 100 mV, plus offset

The following table shows the electrical specifications for analog output.

Analog Output

Resolution

Drive Capability

Offset

Accuracy

12 bits

3 mA

+/- 50 mV

+/- 50 mV, plus offset

The following table shows the electrical specifications for the resolver interface.

Resolver Interface

Reference 5 +/- 0.05 kHz, 1.6 ... 5.5 V rms. 50 mA drive capability

Sine / Cosine Input Impedance 3 k

Resolution 16 bits to 300 rpm. 14 bits to 1350 rpm. 12 bits to 6000 rpm

Accuracy 10 arc minutes, typical, resolver dependent

346

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the electrical specifications for the motor temperature input.

Motor Temperature Input

Normal State

Fault State

Isolation

Short circuit, 2 mA sink max

Open circuit

500 Vac to system bus

The following table shows the electrical specifications for the encoder feedback interface.

Encoder Feedback Interface

Input Range

Input Impedance

Differential Signals, High

Differential Signals, Low

-0.7 ... 7 Vdc

145

, nominal

+2 V differential, min

-2 V differential, min

Maximum Encoder Frequency 200 kHz square wave (55% ... 45% with less than 15 degrees of quadrature error)

Isolation 500 Vac to system bus with external power supply

Minimum Encoder Pulse Width 1 ms

The following table shows the electrical specifications for the drive interface.

Drive Interface

Drive Fault Input

Drive Enable Relay

Current Command Voltages

Current Command Summing Accuracy

Current Commands

True high, TTL compatible relative to remote common, 10 K internal pull-up resistor

Form C contacts. 120 Vac @ 0.1 A resistive. 30

Vdc @ 0.5 A resistive

+/- 10 Vdc

0 +/- 0.1 Vdc

3 mA drive capability

The following table shows the electrical specifications for power requirements.

Power Requirements

Main Power Input

Hot Swap Surge Current

Bus Current Required

5 V +/- 5% @ 750 mA

(with no encoders or resolvers attached, output off)

5 V +/- 5% @ 1000 mA

(with maximum encoder and resolver load, outputs on)

Less than 5 A

MSB Module: 700 mA. MSC Module: 1000 mA

347

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Front Panel

Indicators and

Descriptions

There are 17 LED indicators visible on the front panel. The following figure shows the front panel LED indicators.

Active

Ready

+ Lim ok

- Lim ok

Home

In 4

In 5

In 6

In 7

Drv Flt

Drv En

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

Modbus

Moving

In Pos

Front Panel

Connectors

The following table shows the 140MSX10100 LED descriptions.

In 6

In 7

Drv Flt

Drv En

Out 1

Out 2

Out 3

Modbus

Moving

In Pos

LEDs

Active

Ready

+ Lim ok

- Lim ok

Home

In 4

In 5

Green

Red

Green

Amber

Color

Green

Indication when On

Bus communication is present.

The module has passed powerup diagnostics.

Digital Input 1 active.

Digital Input 2 active.

Digital Input 3 active.

Digital Input 4 active.

Digital Input 5 active.

Digital Input 6 active.

Digital Input 7 active.

Fault signal from drive.

Drive enabled.

Digital Output 1 active.

Digital Output 2 active.

Digital Output 3 active.

Communications are active on the Modbus port.

Motor is moving.

Motion is within the in position of the final target.

There are two connectors located on the front of the module: the Modbus Connector and the Servo Connector.

348

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus

Connectors

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The MSX modules are equipped with a 9-pin, RS-232C connector that supports

Modicon’s proprietary Modbus communication protocol. The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for 9-pin and 25-pin connections.

The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts to 9-pin connectors (AS-

W956-xxx).

0V[0RGEXV3RUW3LQRXWVWR3LQ&RQQHFWRUV$6:[[[

Signal

TXD

RXD

GND

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

MSx

No Connection

Computer

Pin Signal Function

3 RXD

TXD

GND

DSR

DTR

RTS

CTS

Shield

Serial data

Ground

Control line

The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts for 25-pin connectors (AS-

W955-xxx).

0V[0RGEXV3RUW3LQRXWVIRU3LQ&RQQHFWRUV$6:[[[

Signal

TXD

RXD

GND

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

MSx

No Connection

Computer

Pin Signal Function

RXD

TXD

GND

DSR

DTR

RTS

CTS

Shield

Serial data

Ground

Control line

Servo Connector The MSX is also equipped with a 50-pin servo connector for communication with feedback devices.

1RWH

The tables below show the 50-pin servo connector signals. Pin numbers correspond to both the MSB and MSC modules. When the signals differ from each other, they are shown separated by a slash (i.e., Pin Number 34, MSB/MSC).

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

349

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following figure shows the server connector signals (from left to right) 50 - 34. Server

Connector

Signals

50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34

The following figure shows the server connector signals (from left to right) 33 - 18.

33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18

The following figure shows the server connector signals (from left to right) 17 - 1.

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

350

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Rear Panel

Switches

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The MSX has an RS-232 serial port to connect the module to an IBM PC (or compatible) running the Modicon Motion Development Software (MMDS). A twoposition Dip switch is located on the rear panel of the module (see the following illustration). SW1 is used to specify the module’s operating mode (984 or MMDS control). SW2 is used to specify the communication characteristics of the Modbus port upon power-up.

The following figure shows the two-position Dip switch.

CLOSED OPEN

The following table shows the settings for the Dip switch settings.

Switch

SW1

SW2

Setting

*Closed

Open

Closed

*Open

Function

MMDS control

PLC control

Programmed baud

Modbus default

*Factory setting

1RWH SW1 and SW2 are open when they are switched away from the internal PCB of the module.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

351

Intelligent/Special Purpose

140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable

Backplane

Expander

Backplane

Expander

Illustration

With the 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander you can add a second backplane to a local or remote drop. A custom communications cable, 3.0 meters maximum, provides the data communication transfer.

The following figure shows the components of the backplane expander.

140

XBE 100 00

XBP EXPANDER

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable Door

Connector

352

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Specifications

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Specifications for the 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander are below.

Specifications

Number of Connected

Backplanes

Maximum Distance

Backplane Requirements

Size

Slots used

Number of Backplane Expander modules allowed

LEDs

Required Addressing

3 meters

All backplane sizes – 3, 4, 6, 10 and 16 slot.

1 per backplane

None.

The Backplane Expander will look like an unfilled slot in the PLC I/O map.

Power Requirements

Power Consumption

Bus Current Required

Connector

Compatibility

Primary Backplane

Secondary Backplane

2.5 watts

500 mA

37 pin D-type

Programming Software

Executive Firmware

No restrictions

All types of Quantum I/O modules can be used in the secondary backplane, unless otherwise noted in the I/O documentation.

Modsoft V 2.6 or Concept V 2.2 at a minimum

140CPUX130X - Version 2.2

140CPUX341X - Version 1.03

140CPUx341xA - Any version

140CPU42402 - Version 2.15

140CRA93X0X - Version 1.2

Words per Drop The following tables shows Words per drop.

Maximum words per drop

Local I/O

Remote I/O

64 in /64 out

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

353

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Cable

Specifications

Specifications for the the three possible Expander Cables are below.

Part Number

140 XCA 71703

140 XCA 71706

140 XCA 71709

Length

1 meter

2 meters

3 meters

Basic

Configuration

The backplane containing the the CPU or RIO drop adapter is designated the

‘Primary’ backplane and the adjacent backplane is designated the ‘Secondary’ backplane. Each backplane requires its own power supply.

Power

Supply CPU or RIO

Adapter

Backplane Expander

140 XBE 100 00

Cable end marked ³3ULPDU\´

Power

Supply

3ULPDU\%DFNSODQH

Backplane Expander Cable

140XCA7170X

Backplane Expander

140XBE10000

354

6HFRQGDU\%DFNSODQH

1RWH Cable must be installed before powering up the backplanes.

&$87,21

3RVVLEOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVFDEOHIDLOXUH

Do not Hot Swap a Backplane Expander module into a powered backplane unless the communications cable has first been connected to the module.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

&$87,21

3RVVLEOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVIDLOXUH

The cable is polarized. Ensure that the cable end marked "Primary" is connected to the backplane that has the CPU or RIO adapter.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

:$51,1*

+RW6ZDSSLQJ5HVWULFWLRQ

Modules may be hot swapped when the area is known to be non-hazardous. Do not hot swap modules in a Class 1, Division 2 environment.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\RU

HTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

&$87,21

8VHU'HILQHG2XWSXWV

If the primary backplane power supply goes OFF and the secondary backplane power supply remains ON the behavior of the outputs on the secondary backplane is not guaranteed. Outputs could either go to off state or take their Time out state as defined by the user. If the power supply of the secondary backplane goes OFF and the primary backplane power supply remains ON , the IO Health bit of the modules located in this backplane could indicate a healthy module. It is recommended that all modules in the secondary backplanes, regardless of configuration, have their Time out state configured as USER DEFINED with

VALUE 0. Additionally using the same primary power source for primary and secondary backplanes could reduce the effect of this issue.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

355

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Backplane

Expander

Guidelines z z z z z z z z z z z

The same 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander modules are used for the primary and secondary backplanes. The end of the Backplane Expander cable marked

"Primary" always connects to the Backplane Expander module in the Primary

Backplane.

The system can use any Quantum type power supply. Each backplane can have a different type of power supply.

Loss of power in the secondary backplane will not shut down the entire drop. Only modules located in the Secondary backplane will lose power.

Backplane expander modules can be located in any slot in the backplane and do not have to be placed in corresponding slots in the primary and secondary backplanes.

I/O modules that have downloadable executive firmware, such as the ESI module, are allowed in the secondary backplane except when downloading their execs. Executive firmware cannot be downloaded to modules in the secondary backplane.

It may be necessary to update the CPU or RIO drop executive firmware. See

Executive Firmware section in the Specifications table.

The Backplane Expander will not be recognized by the programming panel software. It will look like an unfilled slot in the PLC I/O map.

The Backplane Expander will allow configuration or I/O mapping of additional modules in the local drop containing a CPU or RIO drop adapter up to the drop word limit or physical slot address limitation.

Option modules, such as NOMs, NOEs and CHSs must reside in the primary backplane.

Any Interrupt module can be located in the secondary backplane, but the interrupt mode is not supported.

The Backplane Expander module cannot be Hot Swapped into a powered backplane without first attaching the communications cable. To install the

Backplane Expander in a powered backplane, first connect the cable to the

Backplane Expander module, then mount the module into the powered backplane.

356

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intelligent/Special Purpose

140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module

Overview

Related

Documentation

Hot Standby

Module

This section describes the Hot Standby Module 140CHS11000. The Quantum Hot

Standby system is designed for use with remote I/O networks when downtime cannot be tolerated.

For more detailed information on the use of the Hot Standby module, refer to the

Quantum Automation Hot Standby System Planning and Installation Guide

(840 USE 106 00).

The following figure shows the Hot Standby Module components.

LED Display

&+6

ONTROLLER

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable door

Customer Identification

Label (Fold label and place it inside door)

Part #31000264

Keyswitch

A/B Designation Slide Switch

Program Update Button

Transmit Cable Connector

Receive Cable Connector

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

357

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Quantum Hot Standby system.

Specifications

I/O Type Quantum

Fiber Optic Communication Ports 2 (Transmit and Receive)

Compatibility

Programming Software

Quantum Controllers

Bus Current Required (Typical)

Modsoft V2.32 or Concept 2.0 at a minimum

All, V2.0 at a minimum. (Check the version label of the top front of the module for the proper revision level.)

700 mA

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators.

Ready

Com Err

Com Act

Primary

Standby

The following table shows the LED descriptions.

LEDs

Ready

Color Indication when On

Green If steady: Power is being supplied to the module and it has passed initial internal diagnostic tests. If blinking: Module is trying to recover from an interface error.

Com Act Green If steady: CHS 110 modules are communicating. If blinking: An error has been detected.

Primary Green Module is supporting primary controller.

Com Err Red Module is retrying communications or communications failure has been detected.

Standby Amber If steady: Module is supporting the standby controller, which is ready to assume the primary role if needed. If blinking: Program update is in progress.

358

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Error Codes

Front Panel

Controls

Intelligent/Special Purpose

The following table shows the number of times the Com Act LED blinks for each type of error and the codes possible for that group (all codes are in hex).

Number of Blinks

6503

6402

6301

C101

C102

C103

C200

Code

6900

6801

6802

6803

6804

6604

6605

Error error in additional transfer calculation

ICB frame pattern error head control block error bad diagnostic request greater than 128 MSL user loadables powerdown interrupt error

UART initialization error

RAM address test error

RAM data test error

PROM checksum error no hook timeout read state RAM timeout write state RAM timeout powerup error

The Hot Standby module has three controls on the front panel: a function keyswitch, a designation slide switch, and an update button.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

359

Intelligent/Special Purpose

Keyswitch and

Program Update

Button

The following figure shows the keyswitch and program update button.

Off line

Xfer

Run z z

The keyswitch has three positions: off line, xfer, and run:

Off line – Putting the key in this position takes the controller out of service.

Xfer – When the key on the standby unit is in this position, the standby is prepared to receive a full program update from the primary controller. The update is initiated by pressing the program update button, which is located on the front panel between the function keyswitch and the cable connectors. If you turn the z key on the primary unit to xfer, the system will ignore your action.

Run – The switch should be in this position except when initiating a full program update or taking the module off line.

A/B Designation

Slide Switch

The slide switch is used to designate the controller as A or B. The slide switch on one Hot Standby module in every pair must be set to A; the switch on the other must be set to B. The controller designated A will begin as the primary controller as long as it reaches the ready state before or at the same time as controller B. If the switches are set to the same position, the system will refuse to recognize the second controller at startup.The following figure shows the A/B designation slide switch.

360

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Intrinsically Safe

Analog/Digital, Input/Output

Modules

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

This chapter provides information on the Intrinsically Safe Analog Input/Output, and

Digital Input/Output Modules.

This chapter contains the following sections:

Section

15.1

15.2

15.3

Topic

Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information

Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules

Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules

Page

362

366

399

361

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

15.1 Intrinsically Safe Modules - General Information

Intrinsically Safe Modules – General Description

Introduction

Intrinsic Safety

The following information is specifically concerned with the application of intrinsic safety with regards to the installation and field wiring of the Quantum Intrinsically

Safe series of modules. It provides a general description of intrinsic safety and how it is accomplished in Quantum modules, how they should be installed, precautions that should be observed, and wiring and grounding practices that must be followed.

Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal means. Intrinsically safe circuits use energy limiting devices known as intrinsically safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical equipment located in the hazardous area.

Module Location The Quantum Intrinsically Safe family of modules are entity certified to be installed in safe areas to monitor/control intrinsically safe apparatus located In hazardous areas.

Intrinsically Safe

Barriers

All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous areas. Opto-isolators are located within the modules between the field side and the

Quantum backplane bus circuitry. The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe parameters are:

V oc

≤ 28 Vdc and I sc

≤ 100mA

Intrinsically Safe

Power Supply

DC/DC converters in Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules provide intrinsically safe power to field devices located in hazardous areas. No external field power is required where these modules are installed.

Installation of

Quantum

Intrinsically Safe

Modules

Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard

140XBPOXX00 Quantum backplane. The modules can be installed in any slot position in the backplane. (The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply module.)

362

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Hot Swapping

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Hot swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is not allowed per intrinsic safety standards.

:$51,1*

+RW6ZDS

Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\RU

HTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

Safe Area Wiring

Practices

Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field z z devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring. This can be accomplished by the following methods:

Separate blue wire ducts, raceways or conduits

Grounded metal or insulated partitions between the intrinsically safe and non- z intrinsically safe wiring

a separation of two inches (50 mm) of air space between the intrinsically safe and non-intrinsically safe wiring. With this method, the intrinsically safe and nonintrinsically safe wires must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the required separation.

Identification and Labeling

Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled. Light blue color coding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring. The terminal strip wiring connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it from all non-intrinsically safe modules.

All wire ducts, raceways, cable trays, and open wiring must be labeled "Intrinsically

Safe Wiring" with a maximum spacing of 25 ft. between labels.

Wiring Type and

Grounding

Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip. The wire gauge size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12. Each twisted pair wire shield must be connected to the ground screws on the backplane, at the module end, and left open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area. The instruction sheet packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram applicable to that type of module.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

363

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Module Figure The following diagram is a view of a typical input or output module.

LED Area

[[[[[[[

Model Number

Module Description

Color Code

Field Wiring

Terminal Strip

Part# 140XTS33200

Customer Identification Label

(Fold label and place it inside the door)

Removable Door

Agency

Approvals z z z z

CENELEC Zone 1, Gas Group IIC, IIB, and IIA

CSA Class 1, Div 1, Gas groups A, B, C, and D

FM Class 1, Div 1, Gas groups A, B, C, and D

UL Class 1, Div 1, Gas groups A, B, C and D

364

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Intrinsically Safe

Wiring Diagram

The following diagram illustrates a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module using a separate raceway to isolate its external wiring to the hazardous area. This is just one of the possible ways of field wiring the module. Other methods would include bundling and laying the intrinsically safe wires in the same wiring trough with the bundled non-intrinsically safe wires, with each bundle tied down and separated by minimum of two inches of air space through out the wiring runs.

(

)

(

STANDARD I/O

WIRING

PS C

BACKPLANE

STD

I/O

STD

I/O

STD

I/O

(

,QWULQVLFDOO\6DIH

INTRINSICALLY

SAFE WIRING

IN SEPARATE

BLUE RACEWAY

SAFE

WIRING

(

INTRINSICALLY

SAFE WIRING

LABELS

SAFE

WIRING

Questions

Regarding

Intrinsically Safe

Wiring Practices

The information concerning intrinsic safety wiring practices, is general in nature and is not intended to cover installation requirements for any specific site. Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your site should be referred to the approval agencies listed.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

365

Intrinsically Safe Modules

15.2 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Section?

This section provides information on the intrinsically safe analog modules,

140AII33000, 140AII33010, and 140AIO33000.

This section contains the following topics:

Topic

I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules

140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module

140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module

140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module

Page

366

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules

Overview

140AII33000

This section provides information on the I/O configuration of the intrinsically safe analog modules, 140AII33000, 140AII33010, and 140AIO33000.

The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AII33000 intrinsically safe analog input module.

I/O Map register

Assignment

Register assignments depend on module configuration. This module may be configured as an RTD/Resistance or a Thermocouple input module.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

367

Intrinsically Safe Modules

RTD I/O Map

Register

Assignments

When the 140AII33000 is configured as a RTD/Resistance input module, it requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows.

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 8

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 7

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 6

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 5

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 4

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 3

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 2

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Range warning on Channel 8

1 = Range warning on Channel 7

1 = Range warning on Channel 6

1 = Range warning on Channel 5

1 = Range warning on Channel 4

1 = Range warning on Channel 3

1 = Range warning on Channel 2

1 = Range warning on Channel 1

368

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Thermocouple/

Millivolt Map

Register

Assignments

Intrinsically Safe Modules

When the 140AII33000 is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt input module, it requires ten contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows.

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 8

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 7

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 6

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 5

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 4

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 3

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 2

1 = Broken Wire or out of range on channel 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Range warning on Channel 8

1 = Range warning on Channel 7

1 = Range warning on Channel 6

1 = Range warning on Channel 5

1 = Range warning on Channel 4

1 = Range warning on Channel 3

1 = Range warning on Channel 2

1 = Range warning on Channel 1

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

369

Intrinsically Safe Modules

I/O Map Status

Byte

The I/O map status byte is used by the 140AII33000 module as follows.

MSB

8 7 6 5 4 3 2

LSB

Channel 1 out of range or short circuit

Channel 2 out of range or short circuit

Channel 3 out of range or short circuit

Channel 4 out of range or short circuit

Channel 5 out of range or short circuit

Channel 6 out of range or short circuit

Channel 7 out of range or short circuit

Channel 8 out of range or short circuit

Modsoft Module

Zoom Selections

Use Modsoft’s Zoom feature to select the module input type and then configure the eight channels appropriate to the input type selected.

RTD/Resistance

TC/mV

)RU57'5HVLVWDQFH,QSXW )RU7&P9,QSXW

1.0 Deg 1.0 Deg

Resolution (Temp): Resolution (Temp):

0.1 Deg 0.1 Deg

Output Unit (Temp):

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Value Type:

Temperature

Raw Value

Output Unit (Temp):

Celsius

Fahrenheit

Cold Junction Compensator:

On Board

Channel 1

370

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

140AII33010

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Configure each channel (1 through 8) appropriate to the module input type selected.

)RU57'0RGXOH,QSXW

Channel Enable/Disable:

4-Wire /3-Wire /2-Wire:

Enable

Disable

4 Wire

3 Wire

2 Wire

RTD Type (Pt, Ni,

R, A Pt)

Pt100, -200 to 850

Pt200, -200 to 850

Pt500, -200 to 850

Pt1000, -200 to 850

Ni 100, -60 to 180

Ni 200, -60 to 180

Ni 500, -60 to 180

Ni1000, -60 to 180

R, 0 to 766.66 OHM

R, 0 to 4000 OHM

APt100, -100 to 450

APt200, -100 to 450

APt500, -100 to 450

APt1000, -100 t0 450

)RU7&P90RGXOH,QSXW

Undefined

J, gain=25

K, gain=25

Open circuit test:

Thermocouple Type:

E, gain=25

T, gain=100

S, gain=100

R, gain=100

B, gain=100

Raw output, amplifier gain:

(see Note)

1RWH

A gain of 25 produces readings with + 100mV.

A gain of 100 produces readings with + 25mV.

This channel installed:

Yes

100

Yes

The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AII33010 intrinsic safe analog input module.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

371

Intrinsically Safe Modules

I/O Map Register

Assignments

The 140AII33010 module requires nine contiguous input (3x) registers assigned as follows.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 8

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 7

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 6

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 5

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 4

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 3

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 2

1 = Broken Wire (4 ... 20 mA only) or out of range on Channel 1

I/O Map Status

Byte (Inputs)

The most significant bit in the I/O map status byte is used for this module.

MSB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1= Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA only) on one or more input channels

Modsoft Module

Zoom Selections

Use Modsoft’s Module Zoom feature to display and select the input range.

Channel x Range Selection

4 to 20mA 0 - 16,000

4 to 20mA 0 - 4095

0 to 20mA 0 - 20,000

0 to 25mA 0 - 25,000

372

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

140AIO33000

I/O Register

Assignments

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AIO33000 intrinsic safe analog output module.

The 140AIO33000 module requires eight contiguous output (4x) registers assigned as follows:

I/O Map Status

Byte

The I/O map status byte for this module is as follows.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Channel 1 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 2 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 3 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 4 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 5 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 6 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 7 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

Channel 8 loop broken wire (4 ... 20 mA)

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

373

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Modsoft Module

Zoom Selections

Use Modsoft’s Module Zoom feature to display and select the module channel ranges and time-out state. Time-out state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped.

The following figure shows the time-out state for the Modsoft module zoom feature.

Channel X Range Selection:

4 to 20 mA 0 - 16,000

4 to 20 mA 0 - 4,095

0 to 20 mA 0 - 20,000

0 to 25 mA 0 - 25,000

Channel X Time-out State:

Disabled

Last Value

User Defined

User Defined Time Out Value is in Percentage:

50.00% should be entered as 5000:

Channel X User Defined Time Out Value: 0 DEC

374

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module

Overview The Quantum 140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module will interface with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs, which are software-configurable on a module basis with either RTD/Resistance or thermocouple/millivolt inputs.

When it is configured as an RTD/Resistance Input module, it supports 100

, 200

500 Ω , and 1000 Ω platinum (American or European) and nickel sensors. The module also allows any mix and match of sensor type or resistance inputs that can be configured by the software.

When it is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt Input module, it accepts B, J, K,

E, R, S and T type thermocouples. The module also allows any mix and match of thermocouple or millivolt inputs that can be configured by the software.

RTD/Resistance

Module

Specifications

Specifications for the Quantum140AII33000 module configured as an Intrinsically

Safe RTD/Resistance input module are as follows.

RTD/Resistance Module Specifications

Number of Channels 8

LEDs Active

F (Red)

1 - 8 (Red) Indicated channel is out of range - includes broken wire and short circuit conditions.

RTD Types (Configurable)

Platinum (American and European)

– PT100, PT200, PT500, PT1000

-200° C to +850° C

Nickel – N100, N200, N500, N1000 -60° C to +180° C

Measurement Current

PT100, PT200, N100, N200

PT500, PT1000, N500, N1000

Input Impedance

Linearity

2.5 mA

0.5 mA

>10 M

+/- 0.003% of full scale (0 ... 60° C)

Resolution

Absolute Accuracy

Accuracy Error @ 25°C

Input Filter

Isolation

12 bits plus sign (0.1° C)

+/- 0.5 °C (25° C)

+/- 0.9 °C (0 .. 60° C)

Typical: +/- 0.05% of full scale Maximum: +/- 0.1% of full scale

> 100 dB @ 50/60 Hz

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

375

Intrinsically Safe Modules

RTD/Resistance Module Specifications

Channel to Channel

Channel to Bus

None

1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

Update Time (All Channels)

3-wire

2 or 4-wire

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

External Power

Fault Detection

Hot Swap

Fusing

Programming Software

1.35 sec.

750 m sec.

400 mA

2 W

Not required for this module

Out of range or broken wire conditions

Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards

Internal-not user accessible

Modsoft Ver. 2.61 or higher

Thermocouple/

Millivolt Module

Specifications

The following table shows the specifications for the Thermocouple/Millivolt module.

Thermocouple/Millivolt Module Specifications

Number of Channels 8

LEDs Active

F (Red)

1 ... 8 (Red). Indicated channel is out of range - Broken wire condition is detected.

TC Types and Ranges

Types J K E T S R B

Millivolt Ranges

Ranges (°C) -210 ... +760

-270 ... +1370

-270 ... +1000

-270 ... +400

-50 ... +1665

+130 ... +1820

-100 mV ... +100 mV*

-25 mV ... +25 mV*

*Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges

200

max for rated accuracy TC Circuit Resistance/Max

Source Resistance

Input Impedance

Input Filter

Normal Noise Rejection

>1M

60 Hz

Single low pass @ nominal 20 Hz. Plus notch filter at 50/

120 dB min @ 50 or 60 Hz

376

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Thermocouple/Millivolt Module Specifications

Cold Junction Compensation

(CJC)

Internal CJC operates 0 ... 60° C (errors are included in the accuracy specification). The connector door must be closed. Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting the TC (which monitors the external junction block temperature) to channel 1. Types J, K, and T are recommended for best accuracy.

Programming Software

Resolution

Modsoft Ver. 2.61or higher

TC Ranges

Millivolt Ranges

Choice of: 1° C (Default) 0.1° C 1° F 0.1° F

+/- 100 mV range, 3.05

V (16 bits)

+/- 25 mV range, 0.76

V (16 bits)

TC Absolute Accuracy (see Note 1)

Types J, K, E, T (see Note 2)

Types S, R, B (see Note 3)

Millivolt Absolute Accuracy

@ 25°C

+/- 2° C +/- 0.1% of reading

+/- 4° C +/- 0.1% of reading

Accuracy Drift w/ Temperature

Isolation

Channel to Channel

Channel to Bus

Update Time

Fault Detection

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

External Power

Hot Swap

Fusing

Programming Software

+/- 20

V +/- 0.1% of reading

0.15

V/°C + 0.0015% of reading/°C max.

None

1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

1 sec. (all channels)

Out of range or broken wire

400 mA

2 W

Not required for this module

Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards

Internal - not user accessible

Modsoft Ver. 2.6 or higher or Concept Ver. 2.2 or higher

Notes :

1. Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC, TC curvature, offset plus gain, for module temperature of 0 ... 60° C. User-supplied TC errors not included.

2. For type J and K, add 1.5° C inaccuracy for temperatures below -100° C.

3. Type B cannot be used below 130° C.

4. All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output. This results in a reading 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected.

377

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Field Wiring Field wiring to the module shall consist of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge shall be AWG 20 to AWG 12. In a 2-wire field configuration, the maximum field wire length is a function of the required accuracy.

Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.

RTD/Resistance

Input Wiring

When the Universal Input module is configured as a RTD/Resistance Input module, the maximum wire length (distance to a sensor) for a 3 or 4-wire configuration is 200 meters.

Thermocouple/

Millivolt Input

Wiring

Fixed Wiring

System

When the module is configured as a Thermocouple/Millivolt Input module, the sum of thermocouple source or voltage source impedance and wire resistance should not exceed 200 ohms for rated accuracy.

The Quantum140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.

Terminal Strip

Color and Keying

Assignment

The module’s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.

The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The keying assignment is given below.

Module Class

Intrinsically Safe

Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding

140AII33000 CDF ABE

378

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Agency

Approved Wiring

Diagrams

The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module configured with an RTD/Resistance connection.

&(1(/(&&(57,),&$7,21

(QWLW\3DUDPHWHUV

SHU&KDQQHO

V o

= 15.5 Vdc

I o

= 276 mA/ch

P o

L o o

= 1.07 W/ch

= 0.508 μ F/ch

= 466 μ H/ch

I Source 1 (+)

V Sense 1 (+)

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (-)

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

=21(

*URXS,,$,,%,,&

(SEE NOTE 1)

4 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

I Source 2 (+)

V Sense 2 (+)

I Source 3 (+)

V Sense 3 (+)

I Source 4 (+)

V Sense 4 (+)

I Source 5 (+)

V Sense 5 (+)

I Source 2 (-)

V Sense 2 (-)

I Source 3 (-)

V Sense 3 (-)

I Source 4 (-)

V Sense 4 (-)

I Source 5 (-)

V Sense 5 (-)

Chassis

Ground

(SEE NOTE 1)

2 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

I Source 6 (+)

V Sense 6 (+)

I Source 7 (+)

V Sense 7 (+)

I Source 8 (+)

V Sense 8 (+)

I.S. Module AII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

I Source 6 (-)

V Sense 6 (-)

I Source 7 (-)

V Sense 7 (-)

I Source 8 (-)

V Sense 8 (-)

Chassis

Ground

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

(SEE NOTE 1)

3 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

1RWH Pins marked “N/C”

(Not Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

Chassis

Ground

31001362 Rev 00 140 AII 330 00 RTD Wiring Diagram

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

379

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a Thermocouple connection.

&(1(/(&&(57,),&$7,21

(QWLW\3DUDPHWHUV

SHU&KDQQHO

Vo = 15.5 Vdc

Io = 276 mA/ch

Po = 1.07 W/ch

C0 = 0.508

F/ch

Lo = 466 μ H/ch

I Source 1 (+)

V Sense 1 (+)

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

=21(

*5283,,$,,%,,&

(See Note 1)

Thermocouple Type

J, K, E, T, R, S, B

(See Note 2)

I Source 2 (+)

V Sense 2 (+)

I Source 3 (+)

V Sense 3 (+)

I Source 4 (+)

V Sense 4 (+)

I Source 5 (+)

V Sense 5 (+)

I Source 6 (+)

V Sense 6 (+)

I Source 7 (+)

V Sense 7 (+)

I Source 8 (+)

V Sense 8 (+)

I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (-)

I Source 2 (-)

V Sense 2 (-)

I Source 3 (-)

V Sense 3 (-)

I Source 4 (-)

V Sense 4 (-)

I Source 5 (-)

V Sense 5 (-)

I Source 6 (-)

V Sense 6 (-)

I Source 7 (-)

V Sense 7 (-)

I Source 8 (-)

V Sense 8 (-)

I.S. Module AII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

Chassis

Ground

Chassis

Ground

(See Note 1)

(+) mV Source

(-)

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH Thermocouple tip may be grounded, if required.

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

31001362 Rev 00 140 AII 330 00 TC Wiring Diagram

380

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD/resistor connection.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

&6$FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

1RWH

Entity parameters per channel: V oc

= 15.5 V

I sc

= 123 mA

C a

L a

= 0.47 uf

= 1.0 mH

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

I Source 1 (+)

V Sense 1 (+)

I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (-)

1RWH Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

1RWH Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code,

Part I for installation in Canada.

1RWH Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

1RWH To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

N/C

I Source 2 (+)

V Sense 2 (+)

I Source 3 (+)

V Sense 3 (+)

N/C

I Source 4 (+)

V Sense 4 (+)

I Source 5 (+)

V Sense 5 (+)

N/C

I Source 2 (-)

V Sense 2 (-)

I Source 3 (-)

V Sense 3 (-)

N/C

I Source 4 (-)

V Sense 4 (-)

I Source 5 (-)

V Sense 5 (-)

1RWH Intrinsically Safe (I.S) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V oc

< V max

I sc

< I max

C a

> C i

+ C cable a

> L i

+ L cable

V Sense 7 (+)

N/C

I Source 8 (+)

V Sense 8 (+)

1RWH

This module is certified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction.

N/C

I Source 6 (+)

V Sense 6 (+)

I Source 7 (+)

N/C

I Source 6 (-)

V Sense 6 (-)

I Source 7 (-)

V Sense 7 (-)

N/C

I Source 8 (-)

V Sense 8 (-)

I.S. Module AII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

CHASSIS

GROUND

CHASSIS

GROUND

CHASSIS

GROUND

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV'LYLVLRQ

*URXS$%&'

(SEE NOTE 1)

4 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

(SEE NOTE 1)

2 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

(SEE NOTE 1)

3 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

31001362 Rev 00 140 AII 330 00 RTD Wiring Diagram

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

381

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

&6$FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

1RWH

Entity parameters per channel: Voc = 15.5 V

Isc= 123 mA

Ca = 0.47

μ f

La = 1.0 mH

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV'LYLVLRQ

*URXS$%&'

(SEE NOTE 1)

1RWH This module is certified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction.

I Source 1 (+)

V Sense 1 (+)

1RWH . Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

1RWH,QVWDOOLQDFFRUGDQFH

ZLWK&DQDGLDQ(OHFWULFDO

&RGH3DUW,IRULQVWDOODWLRQLQ

&DQDGD

1RWH Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

N/C

I Source 2 (+)

V Sense 2 (+)

I Source 3 (+)

V Sense 3 (+)

N/C

I Source 4 (+)

1RWH To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

V Sense 4 (+)

I Source 5 (+)

V Sense 5 (+)

1RWH

Intrinsically Safe (I.S) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

N/C

I Source 6 (+)

V Sense 6 (+)

I Source 7 (+)

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V oc

< V max

I sc

< I max

C a

> C i

+ C cable

L a

> L i

+ L cable

V Sense 7 (+)

N/C

I Source 8 (+)

V Sense 8 (+)

I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (-)

N/C

I Source 2 (-)

V Sense 2 (-)

I Source 3 (-)

V Sense 3 (-)

N/C

I Source 4 (-)

V Sense 4 (-)

I Source 5 (-)

V Sense 5 (-)

N/C

I Source 6 (-)

V Sense 6 (-)

I Source 7 (-)

V Sense 7 (-)

N/C

I Source 8 (-)

V Sense 8 (-)

I.S. Module AII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001362 Rev 00

Chassis

Ground

Chassis

Ground

Thermocouple

Type J, K, E, T, R, S, B

(SEE NOTE 2)

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH Thermocouple tip may be grounded if required.

(SEE NOTE 1)

(+) mV Source

(-)

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

140 AII 330 00 TC Wiring Diagram

382

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured as a

RTD/resistor connection.

N/C

I Source 4 (+)

V Sense 4 (+)

I Source 5 (+)

V Sense 5 (+)

1RWHV5HODWHGWR)0&HUWLILFDWLRQ

This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel.

Voc = 15.5 VDC

Isc = 276 mA/Ch

Ca = 500 nf/Ch

La = 0.3 mH/Ch

Po = 1070 mW/Ch

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV,'LY*URXS$%&'

I Source 1 (+)

V Sense 1 (+)

N/C

I Source 2 (+)

V Sense 2 (+)

I Source 3 (+)

V Sense 3 (+)

N/C

I Source 6 (+)

V Sense 6 (+)

I Source 7 (+)

V Sense 7 (+)

N/C

I Source 8 (+)

V Sense 8 (+)

I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (-)

N/C

I Source 2 (-)

V Sense 2 (-)

I Source 3 (-)

V Sense 3 (-)

N/C

I Source 4 (-)

V Sense 4 (-)

I Source 5 (-)

V Sense 5 (-)

N/C

I Source 6 (-)

V Sense 6 (-)

I Source 7 (-)

V Sense 7 (-)

N/C

I Source 8 (-)

V Sense 8 (-)

I.S. Module AII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

Chassis

Ground

Chassis

Ground

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV,'LY,*URXS$%&'

&ODVV,,'LY,*URXS()*

&ODVV,,,'LY,

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end.

4 Wire

RTD/Resistor

Connection

2 Wire

RTD/Resistor

Connection

1RWH Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

1RWH Only 140XBP0xx00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

1RWH The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically safe apparatus plus all cable parameters.

≥

Ci + Ccable; La

≥

Li + Lcable; Voc

≤

Vmax; Isc

≤

Imax

1RWH Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW.

For examples, switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, etc.

1RWH Wiring methods must be in accordance with National

Electrical Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6

“Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations

Instrumentation Part I: Intrinsic Safety.”

1RWH Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms.

1RWH All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01.

1RWH No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval.

1RWH For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

1RWH For Division 2 installation, the apparatus shall be installed in compliance with the enclosure, mounting, spacing, and segregation requirements of the ultimate application, including access only by the use of a tool and provision for Division 2 wiring methods.

Chassis

Ground

3 Wire

RTD/Resistor

Connection

31001362 Rev 01

140AII33000 RTD Wiring Diagram

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

383

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection.

1RWHV5HODWHGWR)0&HUWLILFDWLRQ

This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with IS RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel.

Voc = 15.5 VDC

Isc = 276 mA/Ch

Ca = 500 nf/Ch

La = 0.3 mH/Ch

Po = 1070 mW/Ch

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV,'LY*URXS$%&'

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV,'LY,*URXS$%&'

&ODVV,,'LY,*URXS()*

&ODVV,,,'LY,

384

I Source 1 (+)

V Sense 1 (+)

I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (-)

N/C

I Source 2 (+)

V Sense 2 (+)

I Source 3 (+)

V Sense 3 (+)

N/C

I Source 4 (+)

V Sense 4 (+)

I Source 5 (+)

V Sense 5 (+)

N/C

I Source 6 (+)

V Sense 6 (+)

I Source 7 (+)

V Sense 7 (+)

N/C

I Source 8 (+)

V Sense 8 (+)

N/C

I Source 2 (-)

V Sense 2 (-)

I Source 3 (-)

V Sense 3 (-)

N/C

I Source 4 (-)

V Sense 4 (-)

I Source 5 (-)

V Sense 5 (-)

N/C

I Source 6 (-)

V Sense 6 (-)

I Source 7 (-)

V Sense 7 (-)

N/C

I Source 8 (-)

V Sense 8 (-)

I.S. Module AII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

140AII33000 TC Wiring Diagram

31001362 Rev 01

Thermocouple

Type J, K, E, T, R, S, B

Chassis

Ground

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end. Thermocouple tips may be grounded if required.

1RWH Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

1RWH Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ Imax

(+) mV Source

(-)

Chassis

Ground

1RWH

Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW.

For examples, switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, etc.

1RWH Wiring methods must be in accordance with National

Electrical Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6

“Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations

Instrumentation Part I: Intrinsic Safety.”

1RWH

Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms.

1RWH All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01.

1RWH No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval.

1RWH For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD/resistor connection.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

8/FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (-)

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV'LYLVLRQ

*5283$%&'

(SEE NOTE 1) 1RWH Entity parameters per channel: V

I oc

= 15.5 V sc

L a a

= 123 mA

= 0.47 uf

= 466 uH

I Source 1 (+)

V Sense 1 (+)

1RWH

Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

N/C

I Source 2 (+)

1RWH If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable:

Capacitance 60 Pf/ft

Inductance 0.20 uH/ft

V Sense 2 (+)

I Source 3 (+)

V Sense 3 (+)

N/C

I Source 2 (-)

V Sense 2 (-)

I Source 3 (-)

V Sense 3 (-)

Chassis

Ground

4 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

1RWH

Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

N/C

I Source 4 (+)

N/C

I Source 4 (-)

(SEE NOTE 1)

V Sense 4 (+)

N/C

I Source 6 (+)

V Sense 4 (-)

N/C

I Source 6 (-)

2 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

1RWH To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

1RWH Intrinsically Safe (I.S) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

I Source 5 (+)

V Sense 5 (+)

V Sense 6 (+)

I Source 7 (+)

I Source 5 (-)

V Sense 5 (-)

V Sense 6 (-)

I Source 7 (-)

Chassis

Ground

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V oc

I sc

< V max

< I max

C a

L a

> C

> L i

+ C i

+ L cable cable

V Sense 7 (+)

N/C

I Source 8 (+)

V Sense 7 (-)

N/C

I Source 8 (-)

(SEE NOTE 1)

V Sense 8 (+) V Sense 8 (-)

3 Wire RTD/Resistor

Connection

I.S. Module AII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001362 Rev 00

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically

Chassis

Ground connected to the module.

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules:

140 CPU xxx xx

140 AII 330 00 RTD Wiring Diagram

140 CPS xxx xx

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

385

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

8/FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

1RWH Entity parameters per channel: V oc

= 15.5 V

I sc

= 123 mA

C a

L a

= 0.47 uf

= 466

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

I Source 1 (+)

V Sense 1 (+)

I Source 1 (-)

V Sense 1 (-)

1RWH

Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

1RWH,IWKHHOHFWULFDO

SDUDPHWHUVRIWKHFDEOHDUH

XQNQRZQWKHIROORZLQJYDOXHV must be used for Ccable and

Lcable:

Capacitance

Inductance

60 Pf/ft

0.20 uH/ft

1RWH Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

1RWH To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminal as possible.

1RWH Intrinsically Safe (I.S) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V oc

< V max

I sc

< I max

C a

> C i

+ C cable

L a

> L i

+ L cable

N/C

I Source 2 (+)

V Sense 2 (+)

I Source 3 (+)

V Sense 3 (+)

N/C

I Source 4 (+)

V Sense 4 (+)

I Source 5 (+)

V Sense 5 (+)

N/C

I Source 6 (+)

V Sense 6 (+)

I Source 7 (+)

V Sense 7 (+)

N/C

I Source 8 (+)

V Sense 8 (+)

N/C

I Source 2 (-)

V Sense 2 (-)

I Source 3 (-)

V Sense 3 (-)

N/C

I Source 4 (-)

V Sense 4 (-)

I Source 5 (-)

V Sense 5 (-)

N/C

I Source 6 (-)

V Sense 6 (-)

I Source 7 (-)

V Sense 7 (-)

N/C

I Source 8 (-)

V Sense 8 (-)

I.S. Module AII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

Chassis

Ground

Chassis

Ground

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66',9,6,21

*5283$%&'

(SEE NOTE 1)

Thermocouple

Type J, K, E, T, R, S, B

(See Note 2)

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH Thermocouple tip may be grounded if required.

(See Note 1)

(+) mV Source

(-)

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH2QO\4XDQWXP

;%3;EDFNSODQHV

VKRXOGEHXVHGIRUPRXQWLQJ

WKLVPRGXOHDORQJZLWKWKH

IROORZLQJ8/OLVWHGPRGXOHV

140 CPU xxx xx

140 CPS xxx xx

31001362 Rev 00 140 AII 330 00 TC Wiring Diagram

386

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module

Overview

Specifications

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

The Quantum 140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module interfaces with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software-configurable. The module accepts 0 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 25 mA, and 4 ... 20 mA inputs. The module allows any mix and match of current input ranges that can be configured by the software. The module provides power to intrinsically safe transmitters located in hazardous areas.

Specifications for the Quantum 140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module are as follows.

Specifications

Number of Channels 8

LEDs Active

F (Red)

1 ... 8 (Red), 1 per channel

Note : This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition or an out-ofrange condition (4 ... 20 mA only).

Current Input

Linear Measuring Range

Absolute Maximum Input

Input Impedance

Resolution

Available Voltage

4 ... 20 mA

0 ... 20 mA

0 ... 25 mA

25 mA internally limited

100

+/- 0.1% between V+ and signal terminals

4 ... 20 mA, 0 to 4,095 counts

4 ... 20 mA0 to 16,000 counts

0 ... 20 mA, 0 to 20,000 counts

0 ... 25 mA, 0 to 25,000 counts

Terminals V+, V-, :~ 14.5 Vdc at 25 mA

Terminals V+, Signal :~ 13.6 Vdc at 20 mA

Accuracy Error @ 25°C Typical: +/- 0.05% of full scale

Maximum: +/- 0.1% of full scale

+ 0.003% of full scale Linearity

Accuracy Drift w/ Temperature Typical: +/- 0.0025% of full scale /°C

Maximum: +/- 0.005% of full scale /°C

Common Mode Rejection

Input Filter

Isolation

Channel to Channel

> 100 dB @ 50/60 Hz

Single pole low pass, -3 dB cutoff @ 15 Hz, +/- 20%

None

387

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Specifications

Channel to Bus

Update Time

Fault Detection

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

External Power

Hot Swap

Fusing

Programming Software

1780 Vac @ 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

750 ms for all channels

Broken wire (4 ... 20 mA mode)

1.5 A

7.5 W

Not required

Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards

Internal-not user accessible

Modsoft Ver. 2.61 or higher

Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.

Fixed Wiring

System

The Quantum 140AII33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module is designed with a fixed wiring system, where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.

Terminal Strip

Color and Keying

Assignment

The module’s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The keying assignment is given below.

Module Class

Intrinsically Safe

Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding

140AII33010 CEF ABD

388

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Agency

Approved Wiring

Diagrams

The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module.

&(1(/(&&(57,),&$7,21

(QWLW\3DUDPHWHUV

SHU&KDQQHO

Vo = 23.8 Vdc

Io = 112 mA/ch

Po = 622 mW/ch

Co = 127 nf/ch

Lo = 2.9 mH/ch

V1 (-)

N/C

V2 (-)

N/C

V5 (-)

N/C

V6 (-)

N/C

V7 (-)

N/C

V3 (-)

N/C

V4 (-)

N/C

V8 (-)

N/C

N/C N/C

I.S. Module AII 330 10

Blue Terminal Strip

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

I.S. + 14.5 Vdc

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

=21(

*5283,,$,,%,,&

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. 3 WIRE

TRANSMITTER

V1 (+)

Signal 1

V2 (+)

Signal 2

N/C

V3 (+)

Signal 3

V4 (+)

Signal 4

N/C

V5 (+)

Signal 5

V6 (+)

Signal 6

N/C

V7 (+)

Signal 7

V8 (+)

Signal 8

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. 2 WIRE

TRANSMITTER

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH . A dropping resistor 100

Ohms is across the signal and V(-) pins of each channel. V(-) is internally connected to I.S. ground.

1RWH

Three wire transmitters should be provided power RQO\ from the module. An external power supply

VKRXOGQRW

be used.

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

31001363 Rev 00

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

140 AII 330 10 Wiring Diagram

389

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

&6$FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

1RWH(QWLW\

SDUDPHWHUVSHUFKDQ

QHO

V oc

= 23.8 V

I sc

= 112 mA

C a

= 127nf

1RWH0D[LPXPQRQ

KD]DUGRXVDUHDYROWDJH

PXVWQRWH[FHHG9

1RWH,QVWDOOLQ

DFFRUGDQFHZLWK

&DQDGLDQ(OHFWULFDO

&RGH3DUW,IRULQVWDOOD

WLRQLQ&DQDGD

1RWH,QVWDOOLQ

DFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH1(&

$16,1)3$DQG

$16,,6$53IRU

LQVWDOODWLRQLQWKH8QLWHG

6WDWHV

1RWH7RPDLQWDLQ

LQWULQVLFVDIHW\VKLHOGIRU

HDFKFDEOHPXVWEH

JURXQGHGDQGPXVW

H[WHQGDVFORVHWRWKH

WHUPLQDOVDVSRVVLEOH

1RWHLQWULQVLFDOO\

6DIH,6FDEOHVRIRQH

PRGXOHPXVWEHURXWHG

VHSDUDWHO\IURP,6

FDEOHVRIDQRWKHU

module.

1RWH,6GHYLFHVZKHQ

FRQQHFWHGWR,6WHUPL

QDOVPXVWVDWLVI\WKHIRO

ORZLQJFRQGLWLRQV

V oc

< V max

I sc

< I max

C a > Ci

+ C cable

L a > Li

+ L cable

1RWH7KLVPRGXOHLV

FHUWLILHGDVDFRPSRQHQW

IRUPRXQWLQJLQDVXLWDEOH

HQFORVXUHZKHUHWKHVXLW

DELOLW\RIWKHILQDOFRPEL

QDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWR

DFFHSWDQFHE\&6$RUDQ

LQVSHFWLRQDXWKRULW\KDY

LQJWKHMXULVGLFWLRQ

V1 (-)

(See Note 2)

N/C

V2 (-)

N/C

V5 (-)

N/C

V6 (-)

N/C

V3 (-)

N/C

V4 (-)

N/C

V7 (-)

N/C

V8 (-)

N/C

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

V1 (+)

Signal 1

V2 (+)

Signal 2

N/C

V3 (+)

Signal 3

V4 (+)

Signal 4

N/C

V5 (+)

Signal 5

V6 (+)

Signal 6

N/C

V7 (+)

Signal 7

V8 (+)

Signal 8

N/C

I.S. Module AII 330 10

Blue Terminal Strip

31001363 Rev 00

I.S. + 14.5 Vdc

Chassis

Ground

(See Note 1)

Chassis

Ground

(See Note 1)

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

=21(

*5283,,$,,%,,&

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. 3 wire transmitter

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH A dropping resistor 100

Ohms is across the signal and V(-) pins of each channel. V(-) is internally connected to I.S. ground.

1RWH

Three wire transmitters should be provided power RQO\ from the module. An external power supply VKRXOGQRW be used.

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

140 AII 330 10 Wiring Diagram

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. 2 wire transmitter

390

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHV5HODWHGWR)0&HUWLILFDWLRQ

This IS field device should meet note 6 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 5 appropriate for connection with IS Analog Current IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per channel.

Voc = 23.8 VDC

Isc = 112 mA/Ch

Ca = 127 nf/CH

La = 2.9 mH/Ch

Po = 622 mW/CH

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV,'LY*URXS$%&'

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

Class I Div I Group A, B, C, D

Class II Div I Group E, F, G

Class III Div I

N/C

V5 (-)

N/C

V6 (-)

N/C

V7 (-)

N/C

V8 (-)

N/C

V1 (-)

N/C

V2 (-)

N/C

V3 (-)

N/C

V4 (-)

N/C

V1 (+)

Signal 1

V2 (+)

Signal 2

N/C

V3 (+)

Signal 3

V4 (+)

Signal 4

N/C

V5 (+)

Signal 5

V6 (+)

Signal 6

N/C

V7 (+)

Signal 7

V8 (+)

Signal 8

N/C N/C

I.S. Module AII 330 10

Blue Terminal Strip

31001363 Rev 01

140 AII 330 10 Wiring Diagram

I.S. + 14.5 Vdc @ 25 mA

Chassis

Ground

I.S. 3 wire transmitter

1RWH

Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end.

1RWH Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

1RWH Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

1RWH

Three wire transmitters should be provided power only from the Module. External Power Supply should not be used.

Chassis

Ground

I.S. 2 wire transmitter

Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ Imax

1RWH Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW.

For examples, switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, etc.

1RWH

Wiring methods must be in accordance with National

Electrical Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6

“Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations

Instrumentation Part I: Intrinsic Safety.”

1RWH

Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms.

1RWH All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01.

1RWH No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval.

1RWH

For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

391

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

8/FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH .

1RWH Entity parameters per channel: V cc

= 24.3 V

I sc

= 112 mA

C a

= 127 nf

L a

= 1.5 mH

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66,',9,6,21,

*5283$%&'

(SEE NOTE 1)

1RWH

Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

V1 (-)

(See Note 2)

N/C

V2 (-)

V1 (+)

Signal 1

V2 (+)

Signal 2

I.S. + 14.5 Vdc

I.S. 3 wire transmitter

1RWH If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable:

Capacitance 60Pf/ft

Inductance 0.20 uH/ft

N/C

V3 (-)

N/C

V3 (+)

Signal 3

1RWH Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

1RWH To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

N/C

V4 (-)

N/C

V5 (-)

N/C

V6 (-)

V4 (+)

Signal 4

N/C

V5 (+)

Signal 5

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. 2 wire transmitter

1RWH Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

V6 (+)

Signal 6

1RWH Intrinsically Safe (I.S) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

N/C

V7 (-)

N/C

V7 (+)

1RWH A dropping resistor of 100

Ohms is across the Signal and V

(-) pins of each channel. V (-) is internally connected to I.S. ground.

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V cc

< V

I sc

< I max

C a

> C i max

+ C cable

L a

> L i

+ L cable

N/C

V8 (-)

N/C

Signal 7

V8 (+)

Signal 8

1RWH

Three Wire Transmitters should be provided power RQO\ from the module. An external power supply VKRXOGQRW be used.

N/C N/C

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

I.S. Module AII 330 10

Blue Terminal Strip

31001363 Rev 00

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules:

140 CPU xxx xx

140 CPS xxx xx

140 AII 330 10 Wiring Diagram

392

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module

Overview

Specifications

The Quantum 140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module controls and monitors current loops in intrinsically safe applications. The module provides 8 dualended output channels that are referenced over sense resistors to a single

Common. The output ranges are 4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 20 mA, and 0 ... 25 mA. This module detects broken wires on a per-channel basis indicates their location on the front panel LEDs, and transmits the status to the PLC.

Specifications for the Quantum 140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module are as follows.

Specifications

Number of Channels

LEDs

Active (Green)

F (Red)

1 ... 8 (Green) - Module output switched ON

1 ... 8 (Red) - Broken wire on indicated Channel

(4 ... 20 mArange)

Loop Resistance

Ranges

500 ohms maximum

4 ... 20 mA (0 to 4095) 4 ... 20 mA (0 to 16000)

0 ... 20 mA (0 to 20000) 0 ... 25mA (0 to 25000)

15 bits within 4 ... 20 mA Resolution

Accuracy Drift w/

Temperature

Typical: 40 PPM/°C.

Maximum: 70 PPM/°C

Accuracy Error @ 25°C +/- 0.2% of full scale

Linearity +/- 1 LSB

Isolation

Channel to Channel

Channel to Bus

Update Time

Settling Time

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

External Power

Fault Detection

None

1780 Vac RMS for 1 minute

4 ms - for all channels

1 ms to +/- 0.1% of the final value

2.5 Amp

12.5 W

Not required for this module

Open circuit in 4 ... 20 mA range

Voltmeter Monitor Specifications

Range 0.250 ... 1.250 V

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

393

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Specifications

Scaling

OUT (Volts) =

LOOP (mA) x 0.0625

Output Impedance

Wire Length

Hot Swap

Fusing

62.5 W Typical

1 m maximum

Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards

Internal - not user accessible

Programming Software Modsoft Ver. 2.61or higher

Field Wiring

Fixed Wiring

System

Field wiring to the module should consist of separate shielded, twisted pair wires.

The acceptable field wire gauge should be AWG 30 to AWG 18. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.

The Quantum140AIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.

Terminal Strip

Color and Keying

Assignment

The module’s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.

The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The keying assignment is given below.

Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding

Intrinsically Safe 140AIO33000 CEF ABD

394

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Agency

Approved Wiring

Diagrams

The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

&6$FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

1RWH Entity parameters per channel: V cc

= 29.42 V

I sc

= 93 mA

C a

= 71 nf

L a

= 2.0 mH

1RWH Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

1RWH

Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code,

Part I for installation in Canada.

1RWH Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

1RWH

To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

1RWH

Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

1RWH

I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V cc

< V max

I sc

< I max

C a

> C i +

C cable

L a

> L i +

L cable

1RWH

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

Output 1 (-)

N/C

Output 2 (-)

Monitor 1 (-)

Output 1(+)

Monitor 2 (-)

N/C

Output 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (+)

Output 2 (+)

Monitor 3 (-)

Output 3 (+)

Monitor 4 (-)

Output 4 (+)

N/C

Output 5 (-)

N/C

Output 6 (-)

N/C

Monitor 5 (-)

Output 5 (+)

Monitor 6 (-)

N/C

Output 7 (-)

Output 6 (+)

Monitor 7 (-)

N/C

Output 8 (-)

Output 7 (+)

Monitor 8 (-)

Output 8 (+)

N/C

I.S. Module AIO 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

Chassis

Ground

(See Note 3)

31001364 Rev 00

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66',9,6,21

*5283$%&'

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. Field Device

R-500 OHMS Max

(SEE NOTE 2)

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end.

1RWH More than one device can be connected as long as they have differential input and total input resistance is less than 500 ohms.

1RWH The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current.

Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter.

1RWH Unused channels will show open loop unless outputs are shorted as shown for channel 8.

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH

Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

395

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHV5HODWHGWR)0&HUWLILFDWLRQ

This IS field device should meet Note 7 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 6 appropriate for connection with IS RTD/TC IN Module with concept parameters listed below. The entity parameters listed are per channel.

Voc = 29.5 VDC

Isc = 94 mA/Ch

Ca = 68 nf/Ch

La = 4.2 mH/Ch

Po = 520 mW/Ch

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV,'LY*URXS$%&'

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66,',9,*5283$%&'

&/$66,,',9,*5283()*

&/$66,,,',9,

396

Output 1 (-) Monitor 1 (-)

Output 1 (+)

N/C

Output 2 (-) Monitor 2 (+)

Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (-)

Monitor 3 (-)

Output 3 (+)

Monitor 4 (-)

Output 4 (+)

N/C

Output 5 (-)

N/C

Monitor 5 (-)

Output 5 (+)

Monitor 6 (-)

N/C

Output 6 (-)

Output 6 (+)

N/C

Output 7 (-)

N/C

Output 8 (-)

N/C

I.S. Module

Terminal Strip

N/C

Monitor 7 (-)

Output 7 (+)

Monitor 8 (-)

Output 8 (+)

Chassis

Ground

140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

31001364 Rev 01

I.S. Field Device

R-500 OHMS Max

1RWH

Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field elnd and connected to chassis ground at the

Module end.

1RWH Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

1RWH Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

1RWH More than one device can be connected in series as long as they have differential input and total load resistance is less than 500 ohms.

1RWH Voltmeter is an optional Voltmeter shown to read voltage proportional to the current. Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter.

Unused channels will show Open Loop unless shorted as

Shown in Channel 8.

1RWH The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc and

Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and

Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of

Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus all cable parameters.

≥

Ci + Ccable; La

≥

Li + Lcable; Voc

≤

Vmax; Isc

≤

Imax

1RWH Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW. For examples switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, etc.

1RWH

Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical

Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP12.6, “Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations Instrumentation

Part I: Intrinsic Safety”.

1RWH Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250Vrms.

1RWH All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01

1RWH No revisions to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval.

1RWH For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

1RWH

For Division 2 installation, the apparatus shall be installed in compliance with the enclosure, mounting, spacing, and segregation requirements of the ultimate application, including access only by the use of a tool and provision for Division 2 wiring methods.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

8/FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION +$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66',9,6,21

*5283$%&'

1RWH Entity parameters per channel: V cc

I sc

= 29.5 V

= 93 mA

C a

= 68 nf

L a

= 2.0 mH

Output 1 (-) Monitor 1 (-)

Output 1(+)

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. Field Device

R-500 OHMS Max

(SEE NOTE 2)

N/C

1RWH Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

Output 2 (-)

N/C

Monitor 2 (-)

Output 2 (+)

1RWH

If the electrical parameter of the cable are unknown, the following values must be used for Ccable and

Lcable:

Capacitance 60 Pf/ft

Inductance 0.20 uH/ft

Output 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (-)

Monitor 3 (-)

Output 3 (+)

Monitor 4 (-)

Output 4 (+)

Chassis

Ground

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end.

1RWH Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

1RWH To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

N/C

Output 5 (-)

N/C

Output 6 (-)

N/C

Output 7 (-)

N/C

Monitor 5 (-)

Output 5 (+)

Monitor 6 (-)

Output 6 (+)

Monitor 7 (-)

(See Note 3)

1RWH

More than one device can be connected as long as they have differential input and total input resistance is less than 500 ohms.

1RWH The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current.

Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter.

1RWH

Unused channels will show open loop unless outputs are shorted as shown for channel 8.

1RWH Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

N/C

Output 8 (-)

Output 7 (+)

Monitor 8 (-)

1RWH

Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V cc

< V max

I sc

< I max

C a

> C i +

C cable

L a

> L i +

L cable

N/C

I.S. Module AIO 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001364 Rev 00

Output 8 (+)

N/C

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules:

140 CPU xxx xx

140 CPS xxx xx

140 AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

397

Intrinsically Safe Modules

&(1(/(&&(57,),&$7,21

(QWLW\3DUDPHWHUV

SHUFKDQQHO

Vo = 29.5 Vdc

Io = 94 mA/Ch

Po = 520 mW/ch

Co = 68 nf/ch

Lo = 4.2 mH/ch

The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module.

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

Output 1 (-)

N/C

Output 2 (-)

Monitor 1 (-)

Output 1(+)

Monitor 2 (-)

N/C

Output 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (-)

Output 2 (+)

Monitor 3 (-)

Output 3 (+)

Monitor 4 (-)

Output 4 (+)

N/C

Output 5 (-)

N/C

Output 6 (-)

N/C

Monitor 5 (-)

Output 5 (+)

Monitor 6 (-)

Output 6 (+)

Monitor 7 (-)

N/C

Output 7 (-)

N/C

Output 8 (-)

Output 7 (+)

Monitor 8 (-)

Output 8 (+)

N/C

I.S. Module AIO 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

Chassis

Ground

(See Note 3)

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66',9,6,21

*5283$%&'

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. Field Device

R-500 OHMS Max

(SEE NOTE 2)

1RWH

Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end.

1RWH More than one device can be connected as long as they have differential input and total input resistance is less than 500 ohms.

1RWH The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current.

Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter.

1RWH Unused channels will show open loop unless outputs are shorted as shown for channel 8.

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

31001364 Rev 00

AIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram (Analog Output)

398

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

15.3 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules

Intrinsically Safe Modules

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Section?

This section provides information on the intrinsically safe discrete modules,

140DII33000 and 140DIO33000.

This section contains the following topics:

Topic

I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules

140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module

140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module

Page

400

402

408

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

399

Intrinsically Safe Modules

I/O Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules

Overview This section provides information on the I/O configuration of the intrinsically safe discrete modules, 140DII33000 and 140DIO33000.

Intrinsically Safe

Discrete Input

Module

The following is the intrinsically safe discrete input module: z 140DII33000 (DC, intrinsic safe)

I/O Map Register

Assignment

This 8-point input module can be configured as either 8 contiguous discrete input

(1x) references or as one 3x register. The following figure shows an I/O map register.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

&$87,21

,20DSSLQJ5XOHV

When I/O mapping input modules using discrete (1x) references in remote drops, users should not split discrete words between drops. The lowest discrete reference for a drop should start on a word boundary.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

I/O Map Status

Byte

There is no I/O map status byte associated with this module.

Modsoft Module

Zoom Selections

Push <Enter> to display and select the input type. The following figure shows the input type display. input Type: BIN

BCD

400

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Intrinsically Safe

Discrete Output

Module

The following shows the 8-point discrete output module: z 140DIO33000 (DC, Intrinsic Safe

I/O Map Register

Assignment

The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous discrete output (0x) references or as one output (4x) register. The following figure shows the format for the output modules.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

I/O Map Status

Byte

Module Zoom

Selections

There is no I/O Map status byte associated with this module.

Push <Enter> to display and select the output type and timeout state for the module.

Timeout state isassumed when system control of the module is stopped.

Output Type:

BIN

BCD

Timeout State:

Last Value

User Defined

User Defined Timeout State Points 1- 8: 00000000

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

401

Intrinsically Safe Modules

140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module

Overview

Specifications

The Quantum 140DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input module provides safe power to dry contact closures e.g., push buttons, selector switches, float switches, flow switches, limit switches, etc., in a hazardous area, and receives the proportional current to indicate an on/off state. The received current is converted into digital signals that is transferred to the PLC.

The following table provides specifications for the DII33000 Intrinsically Safe

Discrete Input module.

Specifications

Number of Input Points 8

1 ... 8 (Green) – Indicates point status

Operating Voltages and Currents

No load voltage (between input + and input -)

8 Vdc

Short circuit current

Switching point

Switching hysteresis

Switching Frequency

Response

8 mA

1.2 mA ... 2.1 mA

0.2 mA

100 Hz maximum

402

Isolation

Channel to Channel

Channel to Bus

Internal Resistance

Input Protection

Fault Detection

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

External Power

Hot Swap

Fusing

Programming Software

None

1780 Vac, 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

2.5 K

Resistor limited

None

400 mA

2 W

Not required

Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards

Internal - not user accessible

Modsoft Ver. 2.61 or higher

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Fixed Wiring

System

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The DII33000module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module.

Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.

Terminal Strip

Color and Keying

Assignment

The module’s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.

The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The keying assignment is given below.

Module Class

Intrinsically Safe

Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding

140 DII 330 00 CDE ABF

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

403

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Agency

Approved Wiring

Diagrams

The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module.

&(1(/(&&(57,),&$7,21

(QWLW\3DUDPHWHUV

SHU&KDQQHO

Vo = 9.6 Vdc

Io = 80 mA/ch

Po = 192 mW/ch

Co = 450 nf/ch

Lo = 694 microH/ch

Input 1 (+)

N/C

Input 2 (+)

N/C

Input 3 (+)

N/C

Input 4 (+)

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

Input 1 (-)

N/C

Input 2 (-)

N/C

Input 3 (-)

N/C

Input 4 (-)

Chassis

Ground

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

=21(

*5283,,$,,%,,&

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. +8 Vdc

I.S. Field

Device

N/C

Input 5 (+)

N/C

Input 5 (-)

1RWH

Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH

Pins marked “N/C” are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH All “INPUT (- )S” are connected together internally.

N/C

Input 6 (+)

N/C

Input 7 (+)

N/C

Input 6 (-)

N/C

Input 7 (-)

N/C

Input 8 (+)

N/C

Input 8 (-)

N/C N/C

31001365 Rev 00

I.S. Module

DII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram

404

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

&6$FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

1RWH Entity parameters per module: V oc

I sc

= 9.6 V

= 80 mA

C a

= 450 nf

L a

= 694 mH

1RWH Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

1RWH Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code,

Part I, for installation in Canada.

1RWH Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

1RWH To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

1RWH

Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

Input 1 (+)

N/C

Input 2 (+)

N/C

Input 3 (+)

N/C

Input 4 (+)

N/C

Input 5 (+)

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

Input 1 (-)

N/C

Input 2 (-)

N/C

Input 3 (-)

N/C

Input 4 (-)

N/C

Input 5 (-)

Chassis

Ground

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66',9,6,21

*5283$%&'

(See Note 1)

I.S. +8 Vdc

I.S. Field

Device

N/C

Input 6 (+)

N/C

Input 6 (-)

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V oc

< Vmax

I sc

< Imax

C a

> C i +

C cable

L a

> L i +

L cable

1RWH

N/C

Input 7 (+)

N/C

Input 8 (+)

N/C

Input 7 (-)

N/C

Input 8 (-)

N/C N/C

I.S. Module

DII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001365 Rev 00 140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram

1RWH

Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backpalne.

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP oX oo backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

405

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Input 1 (+)

N/C

Input 2 (+)

N/C

Input 3 (+)

N/C

Input 4 (+)

The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHV5HODWHGWR)0&HUWLILFDWLRQ

This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved or connection with IS RTD/TC IN Modules with

Concept Parameters listed below. The entity parameters are per Channel.

Voc = 9.6 VDC

Isc = 80 mA/Module

Ca = 450 nf/Ch

La = 0.694 mH/Ch

Po = 192 mW/Module

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV,'LY*URXS$%&'

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66,',9,*5283$%&'

&/$66,,',9,*5283()*

&/$66,,,',9,

I.S. +8 Vdc

I.S. Field

Device

Input 1 (-)

N/C

Input 2 (-)

N/C

Input 3 (-)

N/C

Input 4 (-)

Chassis

Ground

N/C

Input 5 (+)

N/C

Input 6 (+)

N/C

Input 7 (+)

N/C

Input 8 (+)

N/C

Input 5 (-)

N/C

Input 6 (-)

N/C

Input 7 (-)

N/C

Input 8 (-)

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the

Module end.

1RWH Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

1RWH Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

1RWH The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc and

Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and

Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of

Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus all cable parameters.

Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable; La ≥ Li + Lcable; Voc ≤ Vmax; Isc ≤ Imax

1RWH

Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW. For examples switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, Etc.

1RWH Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical

Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP12.6, “Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations Instrumentation

Part I: Intrinsic Safety”.

1RWH Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250Vrms.

1RWH All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01

1RWH No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval.

1RWH For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

N/C N/C

I.S. Module

DII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001365 Rev 01

140 DII 330 00 Wiring Diagram

406

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

8/FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

1RWH Entity parameters per channel: V oc

I sc

= 9.5 V

= 80 mA

C a

= 450 nf

L a

= 0.175 mH

1RWH Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

1RWH If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values must be used for Ccable and

Lcable:

Capactance 60 Pf/ft

Inductance 0.20 uH/ft

1RWH

Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

Input 1 (+)

N/C

Input 2 (+)

N/C

Input 3 (+)

N/C

Input 4 (+)

N/C

Input 5 (+)

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

Input 1(-)

N/C

Input 2 (-)

N/C

Input 3 (-)

N/C

Input 4 (-)

N/C

Input 5 (-)

Chassis

Ground

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66',9,6,21

*5283$%&'

(SEE NOTE 1)

I.S. +8 Vdc

I.S. Field

Device

1RWH

To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

N/C

Input 6 (+)

N/C

Input 6 (-)

N/C

Input 7 (+)

N/C

Input 7 (-)

1RWH Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

N/C

Input 8 (+)

N/C

Input 8 (-)

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V oc

< V max

I sc

< I max

C a

> C i +

C cable

L a

> L i +

L cable

N/C

31001365 Rev 00

N/C

I.S. Module

DII 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

140DII33000 Wiring Diagram

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH

Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules:

140 CPU xxx xx

140 CPS xxx xx

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

407

Intrinsically Safe Modules

140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module

Overview

Specifications

The Quantum 140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output module switches intrinsically safe power to a variety of components such as solenoid valves, LEDs, etc., that are located in a hazardous area. This module is for use with sink devices only.

Specifications for the DIO33000 module are as follows.

Specifications

Number of Output Points

Output Voltage

Maximum Load Current

LEDs Active-1

1 ... 8 (Green) – Indicates point status

24 V (open)

Each Point

Per Module

45 mA

360 mA

Off State Leakage/Point

Response (Resistive Loads)

0.4 mA

OFF-ON 1 ms

Output Protection (Internal)

Isolation

Channel to Channel

Channel to Bus

Fault Detection

Bus Current Required

Power Dissipation

External Power

Hot Swap

Fusing

Programming Software

Transient voltage suppression

None

1780 Vac, 47-63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min.

None

2.2 Amp (full load)

5 W (full load)

Not required

Not allowed per intrinsic safety requirements

Internal - not user accessible

Modsoft Ver. 2.61 or higher

408

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Fixed Wiring

System

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The DIO33000 module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40-pin, fixed position, blue terminal strip, which is plugged into the module.

Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded, twisted pair wires. The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12. Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices, to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area.

Terminal Strip

Color and Keying

Assignment

The module’s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color-coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector.

The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module. The keying assignment is given below.

Module Class

Intrinsically Safe

Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding

140DIO33000 CDE ABF

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

409

Intrinsically Safe Modules

Agency

Approved Wiring

Diagrams

The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module.

&(1(/(&&(57,),&$7,21

(QWLW\3DUDPHWHUV

SHU&KDQQHO

Vo = 27.9 Vdc

Io = 121 mA/ch

Po = 840 mW/ch

Co = 84 nf/ch

Lo = 2.2 mH/ch

Output 1 (+)

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

Output 1 (-)

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

=21(

*5283,,$,,%,,&

(See Notes 1 & 2)

I.S. +8 Vdc

I.S. Field

Device

N/C

Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 2 (-)

CHASSIS

GROUND N/C

Output 3 (+)

N/C

Output 4 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (-)

N/C

Output 5 (+)

N/C

Output 6 (+)

N/C

Output 5 (-)

N/C

Output 6 (-)

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end.

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH All “Output (- )s” are connected together internally

N/C

Output 7 (+)

N/C

Output 7 (-)

N/C

Output 8 (+)

N/C

Output 8 (-)

N/C N/C

I.S. Module

DIO 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001366 Rev 00 140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

410

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

&6$FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

1RWH Entity parameters per channel: V oc

= 27.9 V

I sc

= 119 mA

C a

= 84 nf

L a

= 1.0 mH

1RWH Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

1RWH

Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code,

Part I, for installation in Canada.

1RWH Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

1RWH

To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

1RWH Intrinsically safe (I.S.) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V oc

< Vmax

I sc

< Imax

C a

> C i +

C cable

L a

> L i +

L cable

Output 1 (+)

N/C

Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (+)

N/C

Output 4 (+)

N/C

Output 5 (+)

N/C

Output 6 (+)

N/C

Output 7 (+)

N/C

Output 8 (+)

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

I.S. +24 Vdc @ NO LOAD

Output 1 (-)

N/C

Output 2 (-)

N/C

Output 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (-)

N/C

Output 5 (-)

N/C

Output 6 (-)

N/C

Output 7 (-)

N/C

Output 8 (-)

N/C N/C

I.S. Module

DIO 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001366 Rev 00

Chassis

Ground

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66',9,6,21

*5283$%&'

(See Notes 1 & 2)

I.S. Field

Device

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backpalne.

1RWH All negative output terminals - Output 1 (-) thru

Output B (-) are internally connected to I.S. ground

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP oX oo backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

411

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHV5HODWHGWR)0&HUWLILFDWLRQ

This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with IS RTD/TC IN Module with Concept Parameters LIsted below. The entity parameters are per Channel.

Voc = 27.9 VDC

Isc = 121 mA/Ch

Ca = 84 nf/Ch

La = 2.2 mH/Ch

Po = 840 mW/Ch

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&ODVV,'LY*URXS$%&'

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66,',9,*5283$%&'

&/$66,,',9,*5283()*

&/$66,,,',9,

I.S. +24 Vdc@ NO LOAD

I.S. Field

Device

Output 1 (+)

N/C

Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (+)

N/C

Output 4 (+)

N/C

Output 5 (+)

Output 1 (-)

N/C

Output 2 (-)

N/C

Output 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (-)

N/C

Output 5 (-)

Chassis

Ground

N/C

Output 6 (+)

N/C

Output 6 (-)

N/C

Output 7 (+)

N/C

Output 7 (-)

N/C

Output 8 (+)

N/C

Output 8 (-)

N/C

N/C N/C

I.S. Module

DIO 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001366 Rev 01

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections. Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the

Module end.

1RWH

Pins marked N/C are not electronically connected to the Module.

1RWH Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module.

1RWH The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc and

Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and

Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of

Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus all cable parameters.

≥

Ci + Ccable; La

≥

Li + Lcable; Voc

≤

Vmax; Isc

≤

Imax

1RWH Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1.2V, 0.1A, 20uJ, or 25 mW. For examples switches, Thermocouples, LEDs and RTDs, Etc.

1RWH Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical

Code NFPA 70, Article 504 and ANSI/ISA RP1.2.6, “Wiring Practices for Hazardous (classified) Locations Instrumentation

Part I: Intrinsic Safety.”

1RWH Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250Vrms.

1RWH All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01

1RWH

No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval.

1RWH For Schneider Electric internal use only. For control sheet, refer to 19-100986 Rev 1.

140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

412

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Intrinsically Safe Modules

The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module.

1RWHVUHODWHGWR

8/FHUWLILFDWLRQ

IRUWKLVPRGXOH

NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION

1RWH Entity parameters per channel: V oc

= 27.9 V

I sc

= 119 mA

C a

= 84 nf

L a

= 1.0 mH

Output 1 (+)

1RWH Maximum nonhazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.

N/C

Output 2 (+)

N/C

Output 3 (+)

1RWH If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown, the following values must be used for Ccable and

Lcable:

Capacitance 60 Pf/ft

Inductance 0.20 uH/ft

N/C

Output 4 (+)

N/C

1RWH

Install in accordance with the NEC (ANSI/NFPA 70) and ANSI/ISA RP 12.6 for installation in the United States.

N/C

Output 5 (+)

1RWH To maintain intrinsic safety, shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible.

N/C

Output 6 (+)

N/C

Output 7 (+)

1RWH Intrinsically Safe (I.S.) cables of one module must be routed separately from I.S.

cables of another module.

N/C

Output 8 (+)

I.S. +24 Vdc @ NO LOAD

Output 1(-)

N/C

Output 2 (-)

N/C

Output 3 (-)

N/C

Output 4 (-)

N/C

Output 5 (-)

N/C

Output 6 (-)

N/C

Output 7 (-)

N/C

Output 8 (-)

Chassis

Ground

1RWH I.S. devices when connected to I.S. terminals must satisfy the following conditions:

V cc

< V max

I sc

< I max

C a

> C i +

C cable

L a

> L i +

L cable

+$=$5'286/2&$7,21

&/$66',9,6,21

*URXS$%&'

(See Notes 1 & 2)

N/C

I.S. Module

DIO 330 00

Blue Terminal Strip

31001366 Rev 00 140 DIO 330 00 Wiring Diagram

I.S. Field

Device

1RWH Only shielded cables should be used for connections.

Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane.

1RWH All negative output terminals—Output 1 (-) thru

Output 8 (-)—are internally connected to I.S. ground

1RWH Pins marked “N/C” (Not

Connected) are not electronically connected to the module.

1RWH Only Quantum

140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules:

140 CPU xxx xx

140 CPS xxx xx

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

413

Intrinsically Safe Modules

414

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Simulator Modules

At a Glance

Introduction

What’s in this

Chapter?

This chapter provides information on discrete and analog simulator modules.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module

140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module

Page

416

417

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

415

Simulator Modules

140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module

Overview The 140XSM00200 module consists of 16 toggle switches which are used to generate up to 16 binary input signals to the 140DAI54000 and the 140DAI74000

AC input modules.

&$87,21

(OHFWULFDO6KRFN+D]DUG

When using this simulator module with the 140DAI54000 or 140DAI74000 input modules, you should be careful not to come in contact with the supplied 115 or 230 VAC located at the bottom of the simulator module.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

16 Point Discrete

Simulator

Module

The following figure shows the 140XSM00200 16 Point Discrete Simulator module.

416

6ZLWFK

3RVLWLRQ

Right

Middle

Left

)XQFWLRQ

Momentary Signal

Off

Constant Signal

Power

Connector

N L Power Connector Label

1RWH Voltage source range is 24 ... 230 Vac.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Simulator Modules

140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module

Overview The 140XSM010module is used for simulating 4 ... 20 mA field current loops used with current input Quantum modules. It provides two adjustable 4 ... 20 mA analog signals and one fixed 24 Vdc output. The simulator also measures and displays voltages from 0 ... 5 Vdc. z z z

The simulator module includes the following:

An internal 24 Vdc power supply

A 0 ... 5 Vdc meter

Two 10-turn potentiometers

The following figure shows the XSM01000 Analog Simulator module. Analog

Simulator

Module

;60

Analog simulator

Removable Door

Voltmeter

Analog out

Potentiometers

Analog in1

Analog in2

Color Coded Leads

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

417

Simulator Modules

1RWH The 140XSM01000 can be placed in any slot in the Quantum.

1RWH The 140XSM01000 is not a functional module and should be used only for testing, simulating, and calibrating current input Quantum modules.

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the XSM 010 00 analog simulator module.

Specifications

Voltage

Operating Voltage

Output Continuous

Operating Current

Voltmeter Range

10-Turn Potentiometer Output Variable Current/Voltage

Internal Fusing

Bus Current Required

100 ... 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz

24 Vdc, 400 mA max

300 mA @ 120 Vac

0 ... 5 Vdc

4 ... 20 mA

1 ... 5 Vdc

None

418

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Simulator Modules

Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140XSM01000 generic wiring diagram for the

140Axl03000 input modules, 140Ax002000 output modules, and the 140AMM09000 input/output module.

:LULQJ([DPSOH

$QDORJ6LPXODWRU

;60

$QDORJ2XWSXW

Red

Black

White

Monitor

(Typical)

–

0-5 Vdc

249

Ohms

Blue

(Load for illustration purposes)

IN 1

Yellow

Violet

$QDORJ,QSXW

Input X

(Typical)

Input Y

(Typical)

IN 2

– +

24 Vdc

Black

White

Green/Yellow

115...240 Vac

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

140XSM01000 Generic Wiring Diagram for the 140AxI03000 Input Modules,

140AxO02000 Output Modules, and the 140AMM09000 Input/Output Module

1RWH The preceding diagram shows a typical connection between the simulator, a

140ACI03000 input module, and a 140ACO02000 output module. The simulator provides a variable 4 ... 20 mA input to the analog in module. The input can then be read by a Quantum

CPU, and, if required, outputted through an analog out module. For the output module to operate properly, the main current loop must be active, and, as shown above, 24 Vdc is supplied between terminals 9 and 10 with a 249 Ohms voltage drop resistor. (For a more detailed description of these modules, refer to S )

419

Simulator Modules

420

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Quantum Battery Module

At a Glance

Overview

What’s in this

Chapter?

The following chapter provides information on the battery module, its installations and replacement considerations.

This chapter contains the following topics:

Topic

I/O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module

140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module

Page

422

423

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

421

Battery Module

I/O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module

Overview The following provides information on the Battery module, 140XCP90000 (Battery

Backup).

I/O Map Register

Assignment

There is no I/O Map register assignment associated with this module.

I/O Map Status

Byte

The two least significant bits in the I/O Map status byte are used as follows:

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Bat1 Low

Bat2 Low

Module Zoom

Selections

There are no Module Zoom selections required for this module.

422

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Battery Module

140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module

Overview

Battery Module

This section describes the battery module, its installation and replacement considerations.

The following figure shows the battery module components.

LED Area

Battery Slot 1

(with battery installed)

Battery Access Tape

(for removal/replacement)

Battery Slot 2

(with battery installed)

Battery Access Tape

(for removal/replacement)

;&3

%$77(5<%$&.83

Module Number

Module Description

Color Code

Removable Door

Customer

Identification

Label

Battery 1

Changed:

Battery2

Changed:

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

423

Battery Module

Battery Backup The 140XCP90000 provides RAM backup power for expert modules. One nonrechargeable 3.6 V lithium battery is provided and is accessible from the front of the module in Battery Slot 1 (the upper slot) for easy removal when it is necessary to change it.

1RWH Extended backup protection is provided when a second battery is installed in Battery Slot 2 (the lower slot).

Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the battery module.

Specifications

Battery Type

Maximum Load Current

Service Life

Shelf Life

Battery Part Number

C, 3 V lithium

100 mA

8000 mAh

10 years with 0.5% loss of capacity per year

990XCP99000

1RWH The formula to calculate the life cycle of one battery in the battery module is:

Life cycle = 1 / (4 x I) days where I (in Amps) is the total battery current load of all modules in the backplane.

424

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Battery Module

LED Indicators and Descriptions

The following figure shows the LED indicators.

Active

Bat1 Low

Bat2 Low

The following table shows the LED descriptions.

LED Descriptions

LEDs Color

Active

Bat1 Low

Bat2 Low

Green

Red

Indication when On

Bus communication is present.

Battery 1 voltage is low.

Battery 2 voltage is low.

1RWH The Bat1 Low and Bat2 Low LEDs turn ON when a battery is not installed, installed backwards, or in need of replacement.

Battery

Installation and

Replacement

Considerations

The following procedure describes the installation of a battery.

Step

Action

Remove the insulating strip from the plus (+) pole of the battery before inserting it into the module. This strip is used to insulate the battery when on the shelf.

Note: The battery installed in the module, when shipped, has the insulating strip in place. Remove this strip and re-install the battery before operation.

When single battery backup is required, install the battery in Battery Slot 1. The circuitry is designed so Battery 1 supplies the current until it is used up. Battery

2 (when installed) then assumes the load requirement without interruption.

Battery status is indicated via LEDs and Modsoft status bytes.

When the controller is in operation, the batteries can be replaced at any time.

Note: When the controller is powered OFF, battery replacement can be done without RAM loss only when a second functioning battery is installed.

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

425

Battery Module

Installing/

Removing a

Battery

The following procedure describes how to install or remove a battery.

Step

Action

Remove the insulating strip from the new battery.

If necessary, remove the old battery. Detach it from its housing (on the front of the module), by pulling the battery access strip (see below) until the battery pops out.

Insulating Strip

Battery

&$87,21

Pull on this tape to remove battery. Do not use metallic tool.

Batt. install date

Access Strip

3 Replace it with the new battery using the reverse of the procedure in step 2.

426

:$51,1*

0D\FDXVHSHUVRQDOLQMXU\RUGDPDJHWRHTXLSPHQW

Do not use any metallic tools (i.e., pliers, screwdriver, etc.) when removing or replacing a battery in this module. Using tools during removal and replacement may cause personal injury and/or damage to the battery and this module.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\RU

HTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

:$51,1*

0D\FDXVHSHUVRQDOLQMXU\RIGDPDJHWRHTXLSPHQW

Ensure that proper polarity is maintained when connecting and inserting new batteries into the XCP90000. Inserting the battery improperly may cause personal injury and/or damage to this module.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQGHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\RU

HTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Battery Module

&$87,21

+D]DUGRXVZDVWH

Used batteries (hazardous waste) must be disposed of according to local rules and regulations governing hazardous waste.

)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVSUHFDXWLRQFDQUHVXOWLQLQMXU\RUHTXLSPHQWGDPDJH

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

427

Battery Module

428

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

,QGH[

Numerics

140 CFA 040 00 application notes, 722 description, 722 dimensions, 723 terminal block illustration, 722 wiring diagram, 723

140 CFB 032 00 application notes, 724 description, 724 terminal block illustration, 724 wiring for input modules, 725

140 CFC 032 00 wiring diagram for 140 DDI 353 00, 729

140 CFC 032 00 application notes, 728 description, 727 dimensions, 728 terminal block illustration, 727 wiring diagram for 140 DAI 353 00, 729 wiring diagram for 140 DAI 453 00, 729 wiring diagram for 140 DAI 553 00, 729 wiring diagram for 140 DDI 153 10, 730 wiring diagram for 140 DDI 853 00, 729 wiring diagram for 140 DDO 153 10, 731 wiring for 140 DDO 353 0X, 732 wiring for output module, 726

&

140 CFD 032 00 application notes, 733 description, 733 dimensions, 733 terminal block illustration, 733 wiring diagram, 734

140 CFE 032 00 dimensions, 735

140 CFE 032 00 application notes, 735 description, 735 terminal block illustration, 735 wiring diagram, 736

140 CFG 016 00 application notes, 737 description, 737 dimensions, 737 terminal block illustration, 737 wiring diagram

(grouped AC output mode), 740 wiring diagram

(grouped DC output mode), 741 wiring diagram

(isolated AC input mode), 738 wiring diagram

(isolated output mode), 739

840 USE 100 00 11/2004 xv

Index

140 CFH 008 00 application notes, 742 description, 742 dimensions, 742 terminal block illustration, 742 wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 745 wiring diagram

(instrument grounding), 744 wiring diagram (source grounding), 743

A

ACI03000 configuration, 445 description, 461

I/O map status byte, 447 register assignment, 446 specifications, 462 wiring diagram, 463

ACI04000 description, 464

I/O map status byte, 448 module zoom selections, 448 register assignment, 447 specifications, 465 wiring diagram, 466

ACO02000 configuration, 478 description, 482

I/O map status byte, 478 module zoom selections, 479 register assignments, 478 specifications, 482 voltmeter monitor specifications, 483 wiring diagram, 484

ACO13000 configuration, 479 description, 486

I/O map status byte, 480 module zoom selections, 480 register assignments, 479 specifications, 486 wiring diagram, 488 xvi

Agency approvals

ASCII interface, 773 backplane expander, 777 backplanes, 776 battery module, 774 counters, 773

CPUs, 770

DIO drops, 770 field bus modules, 771 high speed interrupts, 773

Hot Standby, 772

I/O, 775 intrinsically safe modules, 774

NOEs, 772

NOMs, 772 power supplies, 769

RIO heads and drops, 771 simulators, 774 single axis motion, 773

AII33000

configuration, 367

description, 375

field wiring, 378

I/O map register assignment, 367

I/O map status byte, 370 module zoom selections, 370

RTD/resistance module specifications, 375

terminal color and keying assignment, 378

thermocouple/millivolt map register assignment, 369

Thermocouple/Millivolt module specification, 376

wiring diagram (Cenelec/RTD), 379

wiring diagram (Cenelec/TC), 380

wiring diagram (CSA/RTD), 381 wiring diagram (CSA/TC), 382

wiring diagram (FM/RTD), 383

wiring diagram (FM/TC), 384

wiring diagram (UL/RTD), 385

wiring diagram (UL/TC), 386

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

AII33010

configuration, 371

description, 387

field wiring, 388 fixed wiring, 388

map status byte (inputs), 372 module zoom selections, 372 register assignment, 372

specifications, 387

terminal strip color and keying assignment, 388

wiring diagram (Cenelec), 389

wiring diagram (CSA), 390

wiring diagram (FM), 391

wiring diagram (UL), 392

AIO33000

configuration, 373

description, 393

field wiring, 394 fixed wiring system, 394

I/O map status byte, 373

module zoom selections, 374

specifications, 393

terminal strip color and keying assignment, 394

wiring diagram (Cenelec), 398

wiring diagram (CSA), 395

wiring diagram (FM), 396

wiring diagram (UL), 397

AMM09000

3x registers, 494

4x registers, 496 common specifications, 501 configuration, 494 description, 498

I/O map status byte, 497 input specifications, 499 linear measuring ranges, 496 module zoom selections, 497 output specifications, 500 register assignments, 494 status warning, 495 topology specifications, 498 wiring diagram, 502

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Index analog input modules configuration, 445 analog input/output module AMM09000, 498 analog output modules configuration, 478

analog simulator module XSM01000, 417

ARI03010 configuration, 448 description, 467

I/O map status byte, 450 module zoom selections, 450 register assignment, 449 specifications, 468 wiring diagram, 469

ASCII interface module ESI06210, 332

AS-i master module EAI92100, 195

ATI03000 configuration, 451 description, 470

I/O map status byte, 454 measurement ranges, 454, 455 module zoom selections, 456 register assignment, 452 specifications, 470 wiring diagram, 472

AVI03000 configuration, 457 description, 473

I/O map status byte, 459 linear measuring ranges, 459, 475 module zoom selections, 460 register assignment, 457 specifications, 474 wiring diagram, 476

AVO02000 configuration, 480 description, 489 module zoom selections, 481 register assignments, 481 specifications, 489 wiring diagram, 492 xvii

Index

B

backplane expander XBE10000, 352

backplanes four position, 677 mounting hardware specifications, 674 part numbers, 674 selecting, 674 six position, 678 sixteen position, 680 ten position, 679 three position, 676 two positions, 675

battery module XCP90000, 423

bus configuration, 256

C

CableFast cable lengths, 759 cable selections (XTS), 760 cable specifications, 758 description, 716

I/O connector for Quantum, 761

I/O connector illustration, 762 inner wire color codes, 759 quantum modules and backplane illustration, 716 specifications, 717 terminal block descriptions, 720 terminal block features, 721 terminal block selection, 718 terminal block stacking convention, 721

XCA102xx pigtail, 761

XTS102xx pigtail, 762

CableFast accessories jumper, fuse replacement, 763 part numbers, 763 terminal block common strip, 763 cables part numbers, 659

CE closed system installation

AC & DC powered systems, 712

AC/DC installation illustration, 712 line filter connections, 713 protective cover, 713 xviii

CFB03200 terminal block dimensions, 724

CFI00800 application notes, 746 description, 746 dimensions, 746 wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 749 wiring diagram

(instrument grounding), 748 wiring diagram (source grounding), 747

CFJ00400 application notes, 750 description, 750 dimensions, 750 terminal block illustration, 750 wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 753 wiring diagram

(instrument grounding), 752 wiring diagram (source grounding), 751

CFK00400 application notes, 754 description, 754 dimensions, 754 terminal block illustration, 754 wiring diagram (chassis grounding), 757 wiring diagram

(instrument grounding), 756 wiring diagram (source grounding), 755

CHS11000

A/B designation slide switch, 360

blinking Com Act LED error codes, 359

description, 357 illustration, 357

keyswitch and update button, 359

LED descriptions, 358

LED indicators, 358 specifications, 358

communication interface modules

Ethernet TCP/IP module, 9

InterBus interface modules, 10

LonWorks modules, 10

Modbus Plus on Fiber, 9

SY/MAX-Ethernet, 9 twisted-pair wiring, 9

types, 8

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

connector types, for fiber optic links, 261

CPS11100

description, 60 illustration, 60

LED description, 62

LED indicator, 62 wiring diagram, 62

CPS11100 (PV01 or greater)

description, 63 illustration, 63

LED description, 65

LED indicator, 65 wiring diagram, 65

CPS11400

description, 66 illustration, 66

CPS11410

description, 69 illustration, 69

CPS11420

description, 72 illustration, 72

CPS12400

description, 75 illustration, 75

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Index

CPS12420

description, 78 illustration, 78

CPS21100

description, 81 illustration, 81

LED description, 82

LED indicator, 82 specifications, 82

wiring diagram, 83

CPS21400

description, 84 illustration, 84

LED description, 85

LED indicator, 85 specifications, 85

wiring diagram, 86

CPS22400

description, 87 illustration, 87

LED description, 88

LED indicator, 88 specifications, 88

wiring diagram, 89

CPS41400

description, 90 illustration, 90

LED description, 91

LED indicator, 91

operating curve and timing chart, 92

operating curve and timing chart, 95

specifications, 94

wiring diagram, 95

xix

Index

CPS51100

description, 96 illustration, 96

CPS52400

description, 99 illustration, 99

CPU

hardware specifications, 50 part numbers, 50

CPU11302

ASCII communication port parameters, 111

description, 115

front panel switches, 110

illustration, 105

LED descriptions, 108

LED error codes, 109

LED indicators, 108

Modbus connector pinouts, 113

Modbus ports pinout connections, 113

Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 114

rear panel rotary switches, 112

RTU communication port parameters, 111

specifications, 106

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 112

SW1 and SW2 switches, 112

valid communication port parameters, 111

CPU11303

ASCII communication port parameters, 121

illustration, 115

LED descriptions, 118

LED error codes, 119

LED indicators, 118

Modbus connector pinouts, 123

Modbus ports pinout connections, 123

Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 124

rear panel switches, 122

RTU communication port parameters, 121

specifications, 116

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 122

SW1 and SW2 switches, 122

valid communication port parameters, 121

CPU21304

ASCII communication port parameters, 131

description, 125

front panel switches, 130

illustration, 125

LED descriptions, 128

LED error codes, 129

LED indicators, 128

Modbus connector pinouts, 133

Modbus ports pinout connections, 133

Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 134

rear panel switches, 132

RTU communication port parameters, 131

specifications, 126

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 132

SW1 and SW2 switches, 132

valid communication port parameters, 131

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

CPU42402

ASCII communication port parameters, 141

description, 135

front panel switches, 140

illustration, 135

LED descriptions, 138

LED error codes, 139

LED indicators, 138

Modbus connector pinouts, 143

Modbus ports pinout connections, 143

Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 144

rear panel switches, 142

RTU communication port parameters, 141

specifications, 136

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 142

SW1 and SW2 switches, 142

valid communication port parameters, 141

CPU43412, 150

ASCII comm port parameters, 151

Modbus connector pinouts, 154

Modbus ports pinout connections, 155

Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 155

rear panel rotary switches, 152

RTU comm port parameters, 151

specifications, 146

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 152

SW1 and SW2 switches, 152

valid comm port parameters, 151

Index

CPU43412A

ASCII communication port parameters, 162

description, 156

front panel slide switch, 161

key switch, 163

LED descriptions, 159

LED error codes, 160

LED indicators, 159

Modbus connector pinouts, 165

Modbus pinout connections for portable computers, 166

Modbus ports pinout connections, 166

rear panel switches, 164

RTU communication port parameters, 162

specifications, 157

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 164

valid communication port parameters, 162

CPU53414

ASCII communicaton port parameters, 173

CPU front panel switches, 172

description, 167

key switch, 174

LED descriptions, 170

LED error codes, 171

LED indicators, 170

Modbus ports pinout connections, 176

Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 177

rear panel switches, 175

RTU communication port parameters, 173

specifications, 168

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 175

SW1 and SW2 switches, 175

valid communication port parameters, 173

840 USE 100 00 11/2004 xxi

Index

CPU53414A

ASCII communication port parameters, 184

description, 178

front panel slide switch, 183

illustration, 178

key switch, 185

LED descriptions, 181

LED error codes, 182

LED indicators, 181

Modbus connector pinouts, 187

Modbus ports pinout connections, 188

Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 188

rear panel switches, 187

RTU communication port parameters, 184

specifications, 179

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 187

valid communication port parameters, 184

CRA21X10

description, 214 illustration, 214

LED descriptions, 217

LED indicators, 217

rear panel switches, 218

specifications, 215

wiring diagram, 216, 221

CRA21X20

description, 219 illustration, 219

LED descriptions, 222

LED indicators, 222

rear panel switches, 223

specifications, 220

CRA93200

illustration, 230

xxii

CRA93X00

address settings, 234

description, 230

error codes, 233

LED descriptions, 232

LED indicators, 232

rear panel switches, 234

specifications, 231

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 234

CRP81100

description, 190 illustration, 190

LED descriptions, 191

CRP93X00

LED descriptions, 228

LED indicators, 228

specifications, 227

D

DAI34000 description, 509 specifications, 510 wiring diagram, 511

DAI35300 description, 512 specifications, 513 wiring diagram, 514

DAI44000 description, 515 specifications, 516 wiring diagram, 517

DAI45300 description, 518 specifications, 519 wiring diagram, 520

DAI54000 description, 521 specifications, 522 wiring diagram, 523

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

DAI54300 description, 524 specifications, 524 wiring diagram, 525

DAI55300 description, 527 specifications, 527 wiring diagram, 528

DAI74000 description, 530 specifications, 531 wiring diagram, 532

DAI75300 description, 533 specifications, 534 wiring diagram, 535

DAM59000 common specifications, 642 description, 639 fuse locations, 643 input specifications, 640 output specifications, 641 topology specifications, 639 wiring diagram, 644

DAO84000 description, 564 specifications, 564 wiring diagram, 566

DAO84010 description, 568 specifications, 568 wiring diagram, 570, 575

DAO84210 description, 572 specifications, 572

DAO84220 description, 577 fuse locations, 579 specifications, 577 wiring diagram, 580

DAO85300 description, 582 fuse locations, 584 specifications, 582 wiring diagram, 584

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Index

DD035301 fuse locations, 595

DD036400 recommended cables, 604

DDI15310 description, 536 logic states, 537 specifications, 536 wiring diagram, 537

DDI35300 description, 538 specifications, 538 wiring diagram, 539

DDI35310 description, 540 specifications, 540 wiring diagram, 541

DDI36400 color codes for input groups, 544 compatible connection sub-bases, 545 description, 542 front view illustration, 543

LEDs, 544 recommended cables, 544 specifications, 542

DDI67300 description, 546 minimum version levels, 547 specifications, 546 wiring diagram, 549

DDI84100 description, 550 specifications, 551 wiring diagram, 552

DDI85300 description, 553 specifications, 554 wiring diagram, 555

DDM39000 common specifications, 648 description, 646 fuse locations, 649 input specifications, 646 output specifications, 647 topology, 646 wiring diagram, 650 xxiii

Index

DDM69000 common specifications, 653 description, 651

I/O map register (outputs), 636

I/O map status byte (outputs), 636 input specifications, 651 module zoom selections (inputs), 636 module zoom selections (outputs), 637 output specifications, 652 register assignments, 635 topology, 651 version levels, 654 wiring diagram, 655

DDO15310 description, 586 fuse locations, 588 specifications, 587 wiring diagram, 589

DDO35300 description, 590 fuse locations, 592 specifications, 590 wiring diagram, 593

DDO35301 description, 594 specifications, 594 wiring diagram, 596

DDO35310 description, 597 fuse locations, 599 specificatons, 597 wiring diagram, 600

DDO36400 color codes for input groups, 604 compatible output adapter sub-bases,

605 description, 601 front view illustration, 603 selecting point status indicator

LEDs, 604 specifications, 601

DDO84300 description, 606 fuse locations, 607 specifications, 606 wiring diagram, 608 xxiv

DDO88500 description, 609 fuse locations, 611 specifications, 609 wiring diagram, 612

DII33000

description, 402

field wiring, 403

specifications, 402

terminal strip color and keying assignment, 403

wiring diagram (Cenelec), 404

wiring diagram (CSA), 405

wiring diagram (FM), 406

wiring diagram (UL), 407

DIO configuration

description, 25

dual cable illustration, 26

part numbers, 27

single cable illustration, 25

DIO modules CRA21X10 or CRA21X20, 214

DIO33000

description, 408 specifications, 408

terminal strip color and keying assignment, 409

wiring diagram (Cenelec), 410

wiring diagram (CSA), 411

wiring diagram (FM), 412

wiring diagram (UL), 413

direct CPU driver

network interface techniques, 33

discrete I/O true high illustration, 441 discrete I/O true low illustration, 441 discrete input (16-point) modules description, 505 module zoom selections, 505 register assignments, 505 discrete input (24-point) modules description, 505

I/O map register assignment, 506 module zoom selections, 506

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

discrete input (32-point) modules description, 506

I/O map register assignment, 507 module zoom selections, 507 discrete input (8-point) module

module zoom selections, 400 register assignments, 400

discrete input (96-point) modules description, 507 module zoom selections, 508 register assignments, 508 discrete input modules description, 505 discrete input/output (16/8 point) modules

I/O map assignments (outputs), 638 module zoom selections (inputs), 638 module zoom selections (outputs), 638 register assignments, 637 discrete input/output modules configuration, 635 discrete output (12-point) module description, 558 register assignments, 558 discrete output (16-point) modules description, 559 module zoom selections, 560 register assignments, 559 discrete output (32-point) modules description, 560 module zoom selections, 561 register assignments, 561 discrete output (8-point) modules

description, 401, 557

I/O map register assignment, 401, 557 module zoom selections, 401, 557

module zoom selections (outputs), 558 discrete output (96-point) module, 562 module zoom selections, 563 register assingment, 562

discrete simulator module XSM00200, 416

discrete verified output module

DVO85300, 625 distributed I/O

Quantum configuations, 18

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Index

DRA84000 description, 613 specifications, 613 wiring diagram, 615

DRC83000 description, 616 specifications, 616 wiring diagram, 618

DSI35300 description, 631 specifications, 632 wiring diagram, 633 dual cable configuration

RIO configuration, 22

RIO in a Hot Standby configuration, 24

DVO85300 configuration, 620 description, 625

Modsoft zoom screen selections, 621 register assignments, 620 specifications, 625 wiring diagram, 628

E

EHC10500

description, 290 illustration, 290

LED descriptions, 292

LED indicators, 292

specifications, 291

wiring diagram, 293

xxv

Index

EHC20200

3x register content, 308

Command 1, 295

Command 1 and Command 2 response formats, 303

Command 2, 296

Command 3, 296

Command 3 read input counter, 304

Command 3 response format, 304

Command 4, 297

Command 4 output register format, 304

Command 4 response format, 305

command words, 297

configuration, 294

COUNT DOWN example, 310

counting pulses, 326

description, 319

fuse location, 321

I/O map register assignment, 294

I/O map status byte, 305

illustration, 319

LED descriptions, 322

load values, 307, 311

module configuration, 306, 310

module functions, 324

module zoom selections, 317

one 32 bit counter, 301

operations, 295

RATE SAMPLE example, 310

rate sample mode, 303

rate sample mode caution, 312

rate sampling, 326

read input counter command, 308

read rate sample, 311

reset latched outputs, 308

response for configuration command, 307

xxvi

response to read rate sample command, 311

signal descriptions, 329

specifications, 320

timing diagrams, 324 timing parameters, 324

two 16 bit counters, 300

two 32 bit counters, 302

user logic, 309

using I/O mapped registers, 306

wiring diagram, 330

wiring diagram 1, 313

wiring diagram 2, 314

wiring diagram 3, 315

wiring diagram 4, 316

EIA92100

AS-i cable connection illustration, 200

description, 195

illustration, 196

LED bus mode, 197

LED descriptions, 197

LED diagnostics, 199

LED display, 197

LED slave I/O mode, 198

specifications, 200

error stopped codes definitions, 766 list, 765

ESI06210

description, 332

front panel connectors and switches, 336

front panel push button, 337

illustration, 332

LED blinking sequence, 335

LED descriptions, 334

LED indicators, 334

RS-232 serial port setup, 337

RS-232C serial port, 336

specifications, 333

Status LED crash codes, 335

Ethernet MMS modules NOE5X100, 273

Ethernet SY/MAX modules NOE3X100, 270

Ethernet TCP/IP module NOE2X100, 266

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

F

fiber optic cable

termination kits, 261

tools, 262

fiber optic network

adding nodes, 263

bus configuration, 256

calculating number of modules, 264

point-to-point configuration, 256

self healing ring configuration, 259

tree configuration, 258

fuses description, 671

H

hardware specifications

ASCII interface module, 52 counter modules, 52

field bus modules, 50

high speed interrupt module, 52

Hot Standby module, 51

I/O modules (analog out), 56

I/O modules (discrete in), 53

I/O modules (discrete in/out), 55

I/O modules (discrete out), 54

intrinsic safe analog modules, 57 intrinsic safe discrete modules, 57 miscellaneous modules, 57

NOM modules, 51

power supplies for local and RIO drops, 49

RIO heads/drops, 50

single axis motion modules, 52

high speed counter (5 channel)

EHC10500, 290

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Index

high speed counter module (2 channel)

EHC20200, 319

high speed interrupt modules HLI34000, 338

HLI34000

description, 338 illustration, 338

LED descriptions, 340

specifications, 339

wiring diagram, 341

Hot Standby configuration

description, 22

Hot Standby module CHS11000, 357

I

I/O map interface

network interface techniques, 34

I/O map status byte description, 442 illustration, 442 table/module configuration, 443

I/O modules

description, 7, 431

discrete I/O true high/true low circuit, 441 illustration, 431

LED descriptions, 431

LED descriptions for 16 point modules, 432

LED descriptions for 24 point input modules, 433

LED descriptions for 32 point I/O modules, 433

LED descriptions for bi-directional modules, 434

LED descriptions for discrete 12 point modules with fault indication, 436

LED indicators for 16 point modules, 432

LED indicators for 24 point input modules, 433

LED indicators for 32 point I/O modules, 433

LED indicators for bi-directional

modules, 434

xxvii

Index

LED indicators for discrete 12 point modules with fault indication, 436 primary keys, 437 secondary keying and backplane position codes, 439 terminal strip key codes, 437 terminal strip/module keying, 436 intelligent/special purpose I/O modules

description, 11

InterBus communication module

NOA6XXXX, 201

InterBus interface modules

communication interface modules, 10

Intrinsically safe analog input module

AII33000, 375

intrinsically safe analog output module

AIO33000, 393

intrinsically safe current input module

AII33010, 387

intrinsically safe discrete input module

DII33000, 402

intrinsically safe discrete output module

DIO33000, 408

intrinsically safe modules

description, 362

identification and labeling, 363

illustration, 364

installation, 362 intrinsic safety, 362 safe barriers, 362

safe wiring practices, 363 wiring and grounding, 363

wiring diagram, 365

L

local I/O

Quantum configurations, 18

local I/O configuration

description, 20 illustration, 20

LonWorks modules

communication interface modules, 10

LonWorks NOL911X0, 208

xxviii

M

miscellaneous components battery, 664 cable connector orientation, 660 cables, 659 coding kit, 660

CPU battery, 664 description, 659 empty module, 660 empty module with door cover, 661 field wiring terminal strip, 662

I/O conversion connector, 666

IP 20 compliant field wiring terminal strips, 663

Modbus Plus ruggedized tap, 665

Modbus Plus tap, 664 remote I/O BNC connector, 667 remote I/O splitter, 667 remote I/O tap, 666

RG-11 remote I/O F connector, 667

RG-6 remote I/O F connector, 667 terminal strip jumper kit, 661

MMS interface

network modules, 10

Modbus and Modbus Plus communications

features, 37

Modbus communications

description, 37

Modbus connector

25-pin, 349

9-pin, 349

Modbus connector pinouts

25-point connections, 176

nine-pin connections, 176

MODBUS I/O Scanner functionality, 280

Modbus Plus communications

description, 38

Modbus Plus network option modules

NOM21X00, 235

Modbus Plus on Fiber NOM25200, 245

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

module mounting procedure description, 686

I/O terminal strip mounting procedure, 689 illustration, 687 installing jumper clips, 688 removing Quantum module door, 690 mounting brackets

125 mm, 682

20 mm, 683 description, 681 part numbers, 681

MSB10100 MSX10100, 342

MSC10100 MSX10100, 342

MSX motion modules MSX10100, 342

MSX10100

analog input

(electrical specifications), 346

analog input

(operational specifications), 344

analog output

(electrical specifications), 346

analog output

(operational specifications), 345

application program

(operational specifications), 343 communications

(operational specifications), 343

compatibility

(operational specifications), 345

description, 342

DIP switch settings, 351

discrete inputs

(operational specifications), 344

discrete inputs and high speed input

(electrical specifications), 346 discrete output

(electrical specifications), 346

discrete outputs

(operational specifications), 344

drive interface

(electrical specifications), 347

electrical specifications, 346

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

encoder feedback interface

(electrical specifications), 347

front panel indicators, 348

high speed input (operational specifications), 344

illustration, 342

incremental encoder feedback, 345

LED descriptions, 348

Modbus connectors, 349

motor temperature input (electrical specifications), 347

operational specifications, 343

power requirements (electrical specifications), 347

rear panel switches, 351

resolver feedback (fully configured version), 345

resolver interface (electrical specifications), 346

servo, 343

servo connector, 349

servo connector signals, 350

Index

N

network interface techniques

CPU interface support, 33 description, 33 direct CPU driver, 33

I/O map interface, 34

option module interface, 33

network modules

MMS interface, 10

network status, 261

NOA61110

seven segment display, 205

NOA611X0

LED descriptions, 203

LED indicators, 203

required loadables, 206 reset push button, 206

RS-232C port, 206

NOA62200

LED descriptions, 204

LED indicators, 204

xxix

Index

NOA6XXXX

comparison of features, 207

description, 201

front panel conncections, 205

illustration, 201

InterBus port, 205

specifications, 202

NOE2X100

description, 266 illustration, 266

installation, 268 installation example, 268

LED descriptions, 267

LED indicators, 267

specifications, 266

NOE3X100

description, 270 illustration, 270

LED descriptions, 272

specifications, 271

SY/MAX addressing, 272

NOE5X100

description, 273 illustration, 273

LED descriptions, 275

LED indicators, 275

specifications, 274

NOE77100

peer cop based I/O scanner, 280

NOE771x0

BOOTP server, 284

NOE771x1

Enhanced Web Diagnostics, 288

xxx

NOE771xx

Bandwith Monitoring, 286

DHCP server, 285

enhanced MODBUS I/O scanner, 281

LED descriptions, 278

LED indicators, 278

MODBUS I/O scanner, 280

MODBUS/TCP server, 282

Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP modules, 281

run LED status, 279

services, 287

specifications, 277

NOL911X0

auxiliary LonWorks communication

port, 212

description, 208

front panel connectors, 211

front panel push buttons, 210

illustration, 208

LED descriptions, 209

LED error codes, 210

LED indicator status, 210

LED indicators, 209

media types, 212

primary LonWorks communication port, 211

RS-232 configuration port, 211

specifications, 209

NOM modules

Modbus Plus on Fiber, 9 twisted-pair wiring, 9

NOM21X00

ASCII comm port parameters, 241

description, 235

front panel switches, 241

LED descriptions, 237

LED error codes, 238

LED indicators, 237

Modbus connector pinouts, 242

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers, 243

rear panel switches, 240

RTU comm port parameters, 241

specifications, 236

SW1 and SW2 address settings, 240

valid comm port parameters, 242

NOM25200

adding nodes, 263

address settings, 251

ASCII comm port parameters, 249

bus configuration, 256

cables, 262

calculating modules in a fiber network, 264

comm port parameters, 250

connecting, 255, 263

description, 245

fiber optic cable ports, 254

fiber optic configurations, 256

front panel switches, 249

hot standby systems example, 260

illustration, 246

LED descriptions, 247

LED topology and descriptions, 247

materials for fiber optic links, 261

mixed fiber optic/copper network, 256

Modbus connector pinouts, 252

network status, 261 optical star passive couplers, 261

point-to-point configuration, 256

rear panel switches, 251

RJ45 cable parts, 253

RJ45 connector, 253

RTU comm port parameters, 250

self healing ring configuration, 259

specifications, 247

termination kits, 261

tree configuration, 258

O

option module interface

network interface techniques, 33

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Index

P

part numbers

ASCII interface module, 52 counter modules, 52

CPU, 50

DIO heads/drops, 51

Ethernet modules, 51

high speed interrupt module, 52

Hot Standby module, 51

single axis motion modules, 52

Peer Cop

MODBUS I/O Scanner characteristics, 280

point-to-point configuration, 256

power and grounding considerations

125 Vdc powered systems, 700

AC powered systems, 693

AC powered systems for CE compliance, 696

CE compliance installation instructions for AC systems, 695

CE compliance installation instructions for Vdc systems, 698

DC powered systems, 694 description, 692 power and grounding guidelines chassis grounding, 710

Modbus Plus communication tap installation for CE compliance, 710 other equipment grounding, 711

power supply ground connection, 710 systems with multiple power feeds, 711

power supplies compatibility issues, 709

description, 5, 703 modes, 5 redundant, 5

Profibus CRP81100, 190

xxxi

Index

Q

Quantum Automation Series

block diagram, 4 capabilities, 4

Quantum configurations

description, 18 distributed I/O, 18 local I/O, 18 remote I/O, 18

Quantum editors

description, 14

Quantum network support

description, 30

supported networks, 31

Quantum simulator modules

description, 12

R

redundant power supplies description, 707 register assignment

ACI03000, 446

ACI04000, 447

AII33000, 368

AII33010, 372

ARI03010, 449

ATI03000, 452

AVI03000, 457 remote I/O

Quantum configurations, 18

RIO configuration

description, 21

dual cable illustration, 22

Hot Standby, 22

single cable illustration, 21

RIO drop modules CRA93X00, 230

RIO head modules CRP93X00, 226

RIO in a Hot Standby configuration

dual cable configuration illustration, 24

single cable configuration illustration, 23

RIO modules

communication interface modules, 9

RJ45 connector, 253

xxxii

S

self healing ring configuration, 259

signal descriptions

EHC20200, 329

single cable configuration

RIO, 21

RIO in a Hot Standby configuration, 23

spare parts description, 670

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

specifications

ACI03000, 462

ACI04000, 465

ACO02000, 482

ACO13000, 486

AII33010, 387

AIO33000, 393

ARI030010, 468

ATI03000, 470

AVI03000, 474

AVO02000, 489

CableFast, 717

CHS11000, 358

CPS11100, 61

CPS11100 (PV01 or greater), 64

DAI34000, 510

DAI35300, 513

DAI44000, 516

DAI45300, 519

DAI54000, 522

DAI54300, 524

DAI55300, 527

DAI74000, 531

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

DAI75300, 534

DAO84000, 564

DAO84010, 568

DAO84210, 572

DAO84220, 577

DAO85300, 582

DDI15310, 536

DDI35300, 538

DDI35310, 540

DDI36400, 542

DDI67300, 546

DDI84110, 551

DDI85300, 554

DDM39000, 646

DDM69000, 651

DDO15310, 587

DDO35300, 590

DDO35301, 594

DDO35310, 597

DDO36400, 601

DDO84300, 606

DDO88500, 609

DII33000, 402

DIO33000, 408

DRA84000, 613

DRC83000, 616

DSI35300, 632

DVO85300, 625

standalone power supplies models, 704 summable power supplies description, 705

Index xxxiii

Index system configurations

local, RIO, and DIO, 18

system space requirements dimensions, 684 illustration, 685 locations, 684 minimum spacing, 684 system specifications

AC/DC power supplies, 44

agency approvals, 46

description, 43 electrical, 43

I/O modules

(between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc), 44

I/O modules

(greater than 48 Vac or Vdc), 44

I/O modules

(less than 24 Vac or Vdc), 44

mechanical, 43

operating conditions, 45 storage conditions, 45

T

Telefast Input DDI36400, 542

Telefast Output DDO36400, 601 terminal strip/module keying description, 436 illustration, 437 primary keying, 436 secondary keying, 437

termination kits, 261

tree configuration, 258

V

version levels

DDM69000, 654 xxxiv

W

wiring diagram

140 CFA 040 00, 723

140 CFB 032 00, 725

140 CFD 032 00, 734

140 CFG 016 00, 738, 739, 740, 741

140 CFH 008 00, 743

ACI03000, 463

ACI04000, 466

ACO02000, 484

ACO13000, 488

AII33000, 379

AII33010, 389

AIO33000, 395

AMM09000, 502

ARI03010, 469

ATI03000, 472

AVI03000, 476

AVO02000, 492

CFC03200, 729

CFI00800, 747

CFJ00400, 751

CFK00400, 755, 756, 757

CPS11100, 62

CPS11100 (PV01 or greater), 65

DAI34000, 511

DAI35300, 514

DAI44000, 517

DAI45300, 520

DAI54000, 523

DAI54300, 525

DAI55300, 528

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

DAI74000, 532

DAI75300, 535

DAM59000, 644

DAO84000, 566

DAO84010, 570, 575

DAO84220, 580

DAO85300, 584

DDI15310, 537

DDI35300, 539

DDI35310, 541

DDI67300, 549

DDI84110, 552

DDI85300, 555

DDM39000, 650

DDM69000, 655

DDO15310, 589

DDO35300, 593

DDO35301, 596

DDO35310, 600

DDO84300, 608

DDO88500, 612

DII33000, 404

DIO33000, 410

DRA84000, 615

DRC83000, 618

DSI35300, 633

DVO85300, 628

EHC10500, 293

EHC20200, 313, 330

HLI34000, 341

intrinsically safe modules, 365

XSM01000, 419

X

XBE10000

configuration illustration, 354

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

Index

XCP90000

battery backup, 424

configuration, 422

description, 423 illustration, 423

installing and removing a battery, 425

LED descriptions, 425

LED indicators, 425

specifications, 424

XSM00200

description, 416 illustration, 416

XSM01000

description, 417 illustration, 417

specifications, 418

wiring diagram, 419

xxxv

Index xxxvi

840 USE 100 00 11/2004

नमस्ते! मैं एक एआई चैटबॉट हूं जिसे विशेष रूप से Schneider Electric Modicon Quantum Reference guide के साथ आपकी सहायता करने के लिए प्रशिक्षित किया गया है. मैंने दस्तावेज़ की अच्छी तरह से समीक्षा की है और आपको आवश्यक सटीक जानकारी का पता लगाने या स्पष्ट और सरल शब्दों में सामग्री को समझाने में मदद कर सकता हूं. चाहे आप विशिष्ट सुविधाओं, समस्या निवारण चरणों या सामान्य उपयोग पर मार्गदर्शन की तलाश कर रहे हों, अपने प्रश्न पूछने के लिए स्वतंत्र महसूस करें. आप अपनी चिंताओं या जरूरतों के बारे में जितनी अधिक जानकारी प्रदान करेंगे, उतनी ही सटीक और प्रभावी ढंग से मैं आपकी सहायता कर सकता हूं!

सहायक टाइपिंग कर रहा है

सहायक कीबोर्ड से बाहर है. कृपया, बाद में फिर से प्रयास करें.

Modicon Quantum

Automation Series

Hardware Reference Guide

Document Set

Table of Contents

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog/Digital, Input/Output

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18 Quantum I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Appendix A Miscellaneous Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Appendix B Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Appendix C Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673

Appendix D Power and Grounding Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

Appendix E CableFast Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

Appendix F Error Stopped Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

Appendix G Agency Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Safety Information

Important Information

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

About the Book

At a Glance

Quantum Automation

System Overview

At a Glance

Modicon Quantum Automation

System Overview

At a Glance

Modicon Quantum Automation Series Overview

Quantum Power Supplies

Quantum CPU Modules

Quantum I/O Modules

Quantum Communication Interface Modules

Quantum Intelligent/Special Purpose I/O Modules

Quantum Simulator Modules (XSM)

Quantum Battery, Backplanes, and CableFast Cabling

Quantum Programming Packages

Quantum System Configurations

At a Glance

Quantum Configurations

At a Glance

Quantum Local I/O, Remote I/O and Distributed I/O Configurations

Quantum Local I/O

Quantum Remote I/O (RIO)

Quantum Distributed I/O (DIO)

Network Configurations

At a Glance

Quantum Network Support

Quantum Network Interface Techniques

Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications

Quantum System Specifications

At a Glance

System Specifications for the

Quantum Module

Quantum System Specifications

Quantum Module Specifications and Configuration

At a Glance

Hardware Specifications for the

Quantum Modules

Quantum Hardware Specifications

Power Supply Modules

At a Glance

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module

}

140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115/230 Vac 3 A Module (PV01 or Greater)